Pioneer DVR-RT501-S Operating Instructions
D VD Recorder & VCR Operating Instructions Discover the benefits of registering y our product online at www .pioneer .co.uk (www .pioneer-eur .com) D VR-R T501-s 2H30301B_En_01_03 8/4/05, 19:18 1
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A_En CAUTION The ST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En W ARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230V or 120V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . This product complies with the Low V oltage Directive (73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives (89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC). D3-4-2-1-9a_En Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. To ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. D3-4-2-1-8_A_En The following caution label appears on your unit. Location: inside of the unit CAUTION ATTENTION CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM. DRW2247 - A RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B QUAND OUVERT. ÃÂVITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU. ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÃÂ LING VED ÃÂ BNING. UNDGÃÂ UDSÃÂTTELSE FOR STRÃÂ LING. VARNING KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÃÂ LNING NÃÂR DENNA DELÃÂRÃÂPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSÃÂTTA DIG FÃÂR STRÃÂ LEN. VARO! AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÃÂKYVÃÂLLE JA NÃÂKYMÃÂTTÃÂMÃÂLLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSÃÂTEILYLLE. ÃÂLÃÂ KATSO SÃÂTEESEEN. PRECAUCIAÃÂN CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACIÃÂN LÃÂSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICIÃÂN A LOS RAYOS LÃÂSER. VORSICHT BEI GEÃÂFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GERÃÂTEINNEREN VORHANDEN. AUGEN NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHLAUSSETZEN! 2H30301B_En_01_03 8/4/05, 19:18 2
W ARNING To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to impr ove heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 10 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ovided for ventilation to ensure r eliable operation of the product, and to pr otect it from overheating. T o prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 C â 35 C ( 41 F â 95 F); less than 80 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long- term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En Do not connect either wire to the earth terminal of a three pin plug. NOTE After replacing or changing a fuse, the fuse cover in the plug must be replaced with a fuse cover which corresponds to the colour of the insert in the base of the plug or the word that is embossed on the base of the plug, and the appliance must not be used without a fuse cover . If lost replacement fuse covers can be obtained from your dealer . Only 5 A fuses approved by B.S.I or A.S.T .A to B.S.1362 should be used. D3-4-2-1-2-2_En The wires in this mains lead are colour ed in accordance with the following code: Blue : Neutral Brown : Live If the plug provided is unsuitable for your socket outlets, the plug must be cut off and a suitable plug fitted. IMPOR T ANT FOR USE IN THE UNITED KINGDOM The cut-off plug should be disposed of and must not be inserted into any 13 amp socket as this can result in electric shock. The plug or adaptor or the distribution panel should be provided with 5 A fuse. As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ; The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured black. The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured red. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling. Private households in the 25 member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one). For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal. By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the environment and human health. 2H30301B_En_01_03 8/4/05, 19:18 3
4 En * WMA (Windows Media TM A udio) compatibility Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or register ed trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. 01 Before using y our unit Precautions ............................................................ 6 Accessories ............................................................ 7 Features ................................................................. 8 Disc ........................................................................ 9 Discs which can be pla yed bac k ......................... 9 Discs on which video can be recorded ............. 10 Recording f or mat .............................................. 10 Disc playbac k in other players .......................... 11 Pa r ts and functions .............................................. 12 F ront ................................................................. 12 Rear .................................................................. 12 Displa y window ................................................. 13 Remote control ..................................................... 14 Basic connections ................................................ 16 Playbac k connection ............................................ 16 02 V arious settings A utomatic TV tuning and clock setting ................. 18 SETUP MENU ...................................................... 19 Using the SETUP MENU .................................. 19 Setting the language ............................................ 20 OSD LANGU A GE ............................................. 20 D VD MENU ....................................................... 20 A UDIO .............................................................. 20 SUBTITLE ......................................................... 20 Setting the parental control .................................. 21 Selecting parental control ................................. 21 T emporarily cancelling parental control ............ 21 Setting the clock ................................................... 22 Setting the disc .................................................... 22 REFORMA T ...................................................... 22 NEW DISC FORMA T ........................................ 23 FINALISE .......................................................... 23 PRO TECT DISC ............................................... 23 UNDO FINALISE .............................................. 23 Other (SYSTEM SETUP) ..................................... 24 DIMMER (Brightness of the display windo w) .... 24 DISPLA Y/CALL (T urning the screen display âÂÂONâ or âÂÂOFFâÂÂ) ................................................. 24 Setting the screen ................................................ 24 TV SCREEN ..................................................... 24 STILL MODE .................................................... 25 NO NOISE BACKGR OUND ............................. 25 BRIGHTNESS .................................................. 25 D VD OUTPUT ................................................... 25 A V3 INPUT ....................................................... 25 Setting the audio .................................................. 26 DRC .................................................................. 26 EXTERNAL A UDIO INPUT ............................... 26 NICAM .............................................................. 26 DOLBY DIGIT AL OUTPUT ............................... 26 Setting the recording ............................................ 26 INITIAL REC TO ............................................... 26 INITIAL REC MODE ......................................... 26 AU TO CHAPTER .............................................. 27 INDEX PICTURE .............................................. 27 BILINGU AL RECORDING ................................ 27 Setting the other ................................................... 27 JPEG INTER V AL .............................................. 27 DivX î VO D ........................................................ 27 Setting the channel .............................................. 28 A utomatic station presetting ............................. 28 To skip a channel position ................................. 28 Replace TV station positions ............................ 29 Manual TV station presetting ............................ 29 03 Disc playbac k Playbac k procedure ............................................. 30 Playbac k by selecting a title ................................. 31 Checking media inf ormation ................................. 32 Special pla yback .................................................. 33 F ast forward pla ybac k ....................................... 33 Re view pla yback ............................................... 33 Still pla yback ..................................................... 33 Fr ame advance ................................................. 33 Slow motion pla yback ....................................... 33 Locating a chapter or track ............................... 33 Commercial skip ................................................... 34 Locating a specific scene ..................................... 34 Repeat pla yback ............................................... 35 One touch repeat .............................................. 35 A-B repeat pla yback ......................................... 35 Title, Chapter repeat pla yback .......................... 35 Title selection ....................................................... 36 D VD menu ............................................................ 36 Changing angles .................................................. 37 Zooming ............................................................... 37 Subtitles ............................................................... 37 Changing soundtrack language ........................... 38 Karaoke pla yback ................................................. 38 Va r ious operations on CD .................................... 39 MP3/WMA*/JPEG/DivX î playbac k ....................... 41 PROGRESSIVE scan .......................................... 45 Contents 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:18 4
5 En : D VD-Video : D VD-R : D VD-RW in VR mode : A udio CD and CD-R/CD-R W : D VD-RW in Video mode : Video tape Media mark Each applicable media are indicated using the symbol sho wn below . Editing an original title .......................................... 70 Adding a chapter mark ..................................... 70 Combining chapters .......................................... 71 Changing an original title name ........................ 72 Erasing a scene (Edit title) ................................ 73 Erasing an original title ..................................... 74 Changing a disc name ......................................... 75 Changing a disc name ...................................... 75 Using the ke yboard screen ............................... 76 07 Dubbing Dubbing a tape onto a disc .................................. 78 Dubbing a disc onto a tape .................................. 79 Dubbing using other equipment ........................... 80 08 Additional inf ormation Glossar y ............................................................... 82 Screen sizes and disc f ormats ............................. 83 Language code list ............................................... 84 Error/W arning message list .................................. 85 Problems and troub leshooting ............................. 86 Video head cleaning ............................................ 87 Other (Additional information) .............................. 88 Handling discs .................................................. 88 Storing discs ..................................................... 88 Damaged discs ................................................. 88 Cleaning the pickup lens ................................... 88 Handling video tapes ........................................ 88 Storing video tapes ........................................... 88 Moving the recorder .......................................... 88 Hints on installation .......................................... 88 Specifications ....................................................... 89 04 T ape playbac k Loading and unloading a cassette tape ............... 46 Cassette tape playbac k ........................................ 47 Special pla yback .................................................. 48 Picture search ................................................... 48 Still picture ........................................................ 48 Slow motion ...................................................... 48 Fr ame by F rame picture .................................... 48 Adjusting trac king condition .............................. 48 Repeat pla yback ............................................... 48 Commercial skip ............................................... 48 To displa y VCR oper ation status ....................... 48 ZERO RETURN function ...................................... 49 Video inde x search system .................................. 49 05 Recording Read this bef ore recording on disc ...................... 50 T ypes of disc ..................................................... 50 Recording modes ............................................. 50 Disc remaining time .......................................... 51 Images that cannot be recorded ....................... 51 Recording a TV program ...................................... 52 One-touch Timer Recording (OTR) ...................... 54 VIDEO Plus î programming system .................... 55 Checking the channel setup to use the VIDEO Plus system .................................. 55 Setting the timer program using the VIDEO Plus system .................................. 56 Timer recording .................................................... 59 Stereo recording and playbac k ............................ 62 06 Editing the disc Editing the disc ..................................................... 63 Editing a playlist ................................................... 64 Creating a pla ylist ............................................. 64 Changing a title name ....................................... 65 Erasing a scene (Edit title) ................................ 66 Combining the title ............................................ 68 Erasing a pla ylist ............................................... 69 DVD-Video VR mode Video mode DVD-R CD VCR 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:18 5
6 En Before using your unit 01 Precautions Follow Instructions â All operating and maintenance instructions should be followed and warnings adhered to. Cleaning â Unplug this product from the wall socket before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Accessories â Do not use accessories not recom- mended in this operation manual as they may be hazardous. Water and Moisture â Hazard of electric shock â Do not use this product near water or in rainy/moist situations. Placing or Moving â Do not place on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. Power Cord Protection â Power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them. Pay particular attention to plugs and the point from which the cords exit the product. Lightning â For added protection of this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, disconnect it from the wall socket. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power- line surges. Overloading â Do not overload wall sockets and extension cords as this can result in risk of fire or electric shock. Objects and Liquid â Never allow objects of any kind or liquids to be pushed/spilled into this product through openings as they may come into contact with dangerous voltage or other hazards. Do not place any objects, such as vases or lighted candles on the product. Servicing â Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service â Disconnect this product from the wall socket and all power sources including batteries, and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is dam- aged. b) If any liquid has been spilled onto, or objects have fallen into the product. c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water. d) If the product does not operate normally even if you follow the operation manual. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operation manual. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operating condition. e) If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance. This indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts â When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts that are specified or that have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorised substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards. Safety Check â Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in safe operating order. MOISTURE CONDENSATION - DO NOT OPERATE THIS VCR/DVD FOR AT LEAST TWO OR THREE HOURS WHEN MOISTURE IN THE AIR CONDENSES ON THE VCR/DVD. WHAT IS MOISTURE CONDENSATION? When cold liquid is poured into a glass, for example, water vapour in the air will condense on the surface of the glass. This is called moisture condensation. MOISTURE WILL CONDENSE ON THE UNIT IN THE FOLLOWING CASES; ⢠When you move this VCR/DVD from a cold to a warm place. ⢠After heating a cold room or under extremely humid conditions. WHEN YOU EXPERIENCE THE ABOVE CONDI- TIONS; Plug the power cord into the wall socket, turn on the unit and leave at room temperature until moisture condensation disappears. Depending on the surrounding conditions, this may take from two or three hours. Impor tant W arning Please read this page carefully before attempting to oper ate your VCR/D VD . 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:18 6
7 En Before using your unit 01 * Recording and pla yback of any material ma y require consent. Please ref er par ticular ly to the provi- sions of the cop yright Act 1956, the Dramatic and Musical P erf ormers Protection Act 1958, the P erformers Protection Acts 1963 and 1972 and to any subsequent statutor y enactments and orders. * Unauthorised recording of copyrighted television prog rams, films , video cassettes and other materials may infringe the rights of copyright owners and be contr ar y to cop yright laws. Copyright Remote control Tw o AAA/R03 siz e batteries for the remote control 21 pin SCAR T cable 75 ⦠coaxial cable Accessories 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:18 7
8 En Before using your unit 01 Features Playbac k function Title menu Recording function Timer recording Y ou can program the recorder to record up to 12 programs , up to a month in advance , using the VIDEO Plus î system* 1 f or easy programming if y ou w ant. As well as single programs , you can specify daily or weekly recordings, too . *1 VIDEO Plus and PlusCode ar e register ed trademarks of Gemstar Development Corporation. The VIDEO Plus system is manufactur ed under license from Gemstar Development Corporation. Edit function Editing recorded material without c hanging the original titles Y ou can create a pla ylist based on the or iginal titles. The playlist w onâÂÂt aff ect the original titles. If you erase the playlist, the original titles remain. It is recom- mended to create and edit the pla ylist to prev ent impor tant titles from being erased accidentally . Chapter mark Y ou can add (or delete) a chapter mark to (from) the original title. This function is useful when searching f or the scene y ou wish to watch that y ou ha ve marked with the Chapter mark function. Erasing scenes Y ou can erase an unnecessary scene from the created playlist or the original titles. Combining titles Y ou can combine se ver al original titles or playlists to a separate pla ylist. Dubbing function Dubbing a tape onto a disc or a disc onto a tape MP3/WMA/JPEG/ DivX î playbac k MP3/WMA files can be pla yed back. Also , you can display JPEG/DivX î files on the TV screen and enjoy them. The title list appears on finalised D VD-RW disc (recorded in the Video mode) and D VD-R disc. ⢠⢠Dubbing cannot be carried out when attempting to cop y a âÂÂcop y guardedâ video tape or disc. Not only can you pla yback and record video tapes , b ut y ou can also pla yback D VD discs or make recordings using D VD-RW/D VD-R discs with this unit. In addition, you can edit the programs y ou hav e recorded. A realistic, powerful, Movie Theater sound When connected to Dolby Digital and DTS compli- ant devices , you can enjo y realistic, powerful surround sound. Playbac k the scene y ou want to see immediately As D VDs do not require rewinding like video tapes , y ou can get to the scene y ou wish to watch immedi- ately . A v ariety of search functions allow you to find the scene you wish to w atch. As thumbnail images are display ed in the title menu, y ou can find the title y ou want to pla y bac k quickly . With just this one unit, you can dub ho we ver y ou like , from video tape to disc, or from disc to video tape. DVD-Video DVD-Video DVD-R VR mode Video mode DVD-R VR mode Video mode CD VR mode Video mode VCR VR mode VR mode VR mode VR mode DVD-R VR mode Video mode VCR Progressive scan-compatib le Compared to standard interlaced video, prog ressive scan effectiv ely doubles the amount of video information f ed to your TV or monitor . The result is a stable , flick er-free image. (Check y our TV/monitor for compatibility with this feature .) DVD-Video DVD-R VR mode Video mode One-touch Timer Recording (OTR) The One-touch Timer Recording f eature provides a simple and conv enient wa y to make a timed record- ing. DVD-R VR mode Video mode VCR DVD-R 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:19 8
9 En Before using your unit 01 Disc Region management information This unit is designed and manuf actured to suppor t the region management information that is recorded on a D VD disc. If the region number wr itten on the D VD disc does not correspond to the region number of this unit, this unit cannot play that disc. ⢠The region number of this unit is âÂÂ2âÂÂ. ⢠The unit will pla y D VD-Video discs mar ked with labels containing âÂÂ2â or âÂÂALL âÂÂ. Example: 2 * This unit is designed to playbac k music Compact Discs (CD) that conform to the CD standard. CDs that contain (copy- restriction) signals to protect copyrights cannot be play ed back. * About DualDisc playbac k. A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc , one side of which contains D VD content video, audio , etc. while the other side contains non- D VD content such as digital audio mater ial. The non-D VD , audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD Audio specification and therefore ma y not pla y . It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, the opposite side to that being pla yed will be scratched. Scratched discs may not be pla yable . The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. D VD-A udio content will not pla y . F or more detailed inf ormation on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manuf acturer or disc retailer. Discs which can be pla yed bac k In this unit, use only discs that meet the standard, such as those bear ing the below logo marks on the disc label surface. If you use a non-standard disc, we cannot guarantee playback. Ev en if such a disc can be play ed back, we cannot guarantee the image or sound quality . The D VD logo is a registered trademark. Media type Logo mark D VD-Video D VD-RW V er .1.0 V er .1.1 V er.1.2 Ve r .1.1CPRM suppor t Ve r .1.2CPRM suppor t D VD-R V er .2.0 (V er . 2.0/4x/8x) A udio CD* CD-R/CD-RW l 1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder befor e playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs may not play . 2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when you load a disc. However , this will not affect playback. 3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play . Model Playable DVR -7000 DVR -3100 DVR -5100H Recordable Ye s 1,2,3 Ye s 1 No No Operating D VD-Video ⢠Some operations of D VD-Video may be prohibited by the manuf acturer , or some operation methods or functions of the D VD-Video may be diff erent from the description in this manual. ⢠If you attempt an operation that is prohibited b y either the disc or the unit, a â â mark will appear on the TV monitor . For operations prohibited by the disc, see the inf ormation that came with the disc. ⢠When the menu screen or the operation guide appears during disc playbac k, follo w the displa yed inf ormation. Discs which cannot be play ed back The discs listed below cannot be pla yed bac k in general. Even if one of these can be pla yed bac k, it may not be pla yed back correctly . If a disc is played back b y mistake , extensiv ely loud sounds may blo w the speakers or ma y damage the hearing of those in hearing range. Do not playbac k the discs listed below . CDG, Photo-CD , CD-ROM, CD-TEXT , CD- EXTRA, Video CD , SVCD , SA CD , PD , D VD-R OM, D VD-RAM, D VD R/RW , D VD audio , etc. The follo wing D VD-Video discs may not be played bac k on this unit: â¢D VD-Video that do not hav e the region number âÂÂ2â or âÂÂALL âÂÂ. ⢠SECAM D VD-Video . ⢠Prohibited or business-use D VD-Video . CD-R/CD-R Ws may not be pla yed bac k for the f ollo wing reasons. ⢠Compatibility of the disc and this unit. ⢠Compatibility of the disc and the recorder used. ⢠Unfinalised discs. Do not playbac k the follo wing discs. Playbac k of these discs may cause a failure. ⢠Discs on which paper , labels or stickers are affixed. ⢠Discs that hav e sticky areas left b y adhesive tape. ⢠Special-shaped discs. PC-created disc compatibility Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be play able in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these par ticular instances, check with the software publisher f or more detailed information. Older models of D VD recorders and DVD writers may reject D VD-RW V er. 1.2 / 4x discs. If you want to share D VD-RW discs between this recorder and an older recorder/wr iter , we recommend using V er . 1.1 discs. The follo wing table shows older Pioneer D VD recorder compatibility with D VD-RW V er . 1.2 / 4x discs. 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:19 9
10 En Before using your unit 01 Discs on which video can be re- corded To record video with this unit, use the discs belo w: Media type For mat D VD-RW (V er .1.0) D VD-RW (V er .1.1 and Ve r .1.2) DV D - R (V er .2.0 and Ve r. 2.0/4x/8x) Av ailable functions VR mode VR mode Video mode Video mode Playbac k, recording and editing (Original/playlist) Playbac k, recording and editing (Original/playlist) Pla yback and recording Editing (with limitation) Pla yback and recording Editing (with limitation) Media type Logo mark D VD-RW V er .1.0 V er .1.1 V er .1.2 Ve r .1.1CPRM suppor t Ve r .1.2CPRM suppor t D VD-R V er .2.0 and V er . 2.0/4x/8x Recording f ormat This unit has two modes f or f ormatting discs for recording: VR mode and Video mode. When a blank, ne w disc is loaded into this unit, the automatic format function star ts to format the disc. (For the disc f or mat setting in this step, see page 23.) VR mode ⢠This mode can be used f or D VD-RW . ⢠In this mode, the discs can be recorded and edited repeatedly . ⢠The disc recorded in this mode can be pla yed back with other D VD-R W -compatib le play ers. ⢠When a V er.1.1 CPRM or V er .1.2 CPRM disc is used, you can record a âÂÂCopy Onceâ program (see page 51). Video mode ⢠This mode can be used f or D VD-R and D VD-RW (V er .1.1/1.2). ⢠When you finalise the disc after recording, the disc recorded with this unit can be play ed back with other D VD play ers. ⢠Recording, editing or playbac k of an unfinalised disc can be done only with this unit. Howe ver , there are some limitation to editing operations. ⢠In this mode, y ou cannot record a âÂÂCopy Onceâ program (see page 51). ⢠When you record a TV program of a bilingual broadcast, only one of the audio modes can be recorded. Y ou hav e to select it. Format modes that can be used with each disc The usable f ormat depends on the media type as shown in the below tab le. D VD-RW ⢠The disc can be erased and used again about 1,000 times. ⢠Only the VR mode can be used for V er .1.0 discs. ⢠With V er.1.1/1.2 discs , you can record b y select- ing the VR mode or Video mode. ⢠When you record in the VR mode, y ou can repeat- edly record and erase. By erasing unnecessary titles, y ou eff ectively increase remaining time . ⢠When you record in the Video mode, you can record until the disc becomes full. ⢠When you use the Video mode, you can ne wly record on the disc by f or matting the disc. How- ev er , if the disc is f ormatted, all the recorded contents will be erased. D VD-R â¢Y ou can record on the disc only in the Video mode. â¢Y ou can record until the disc becomes full. ⢠Finalising the discs allows pla yback on other D VD play ers. Howev er , the finalised discs can no longer be recorded. ⢠Discs can be recorded to repeatedly until they are finalised. NO TES: ⢠There are some pla yers that cannot pla yback discs that were recorded with this unit. We cannot guarantee the pla yback with other units . ⢠This unit cannot record on D VD-R and D VD-RW discs that are 8 cm in diameter . ⢠This unit cannot record on CD-R or CD-R W . ⢠This unit ma y not be able to record to or playbac k from discs that have been recorded on other units due to the recording conditions, surface dirt or scratches. ⢠Other units ma y not be able to record to or playbac k from discs that have been recorded on the unit due to the recording conditions, surface dirt or scratches. 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:19 10
11 En Before using your unit 01 CHAPTER 1 TITLE1 TITLE2 DVD DISC CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3 CHAPTER 1 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 TRACK 3 TRACK 4 TRACK 5 Audio-CD Disc playbac k in other player s A disc recorded in this unit can be finalised. The disc can be pla yed bac k in other play ers that can playbac k D VD-R W and D VD-R. F or more inf or mation on finalisation, see âÂÂFINALISEâ in âÂÂSetting the discâ (page 23). When recording in the VR mode Even if a disc recorded in the VR mode is finalised, y ou can record or edit b y cancelling the finalisation. (See âÂÂUNDO FINALISEâ on page 23.) When you pla yback the disc with another play er , make sure that the D VD pla yer supports D VD-RW and bears the follo wing mark. When recording in the Video mode When a disc recorded in the Video mode is finalised, it cannot be recorded onto any more. Therefore , bef ore finalisation, be sure to perform all desired recording. After finalisation, a title list that can be used by the D VD pla yer is automatically created. NO TES: ⢠The finalisation process may require from a f ew minutes up to 1 hour depending on the disc type and the amount of free space on the disc. â¢A D VD-RW V er .1.1/1.2 recorded in the Video mode cannot be recorded or edited after finalisation, but if y ou f ormat the disc by erasing all the content, you can again record on this disc. â¢A finalised disc may not pla y because of the condition of the D VD or the compatibility with the play er used f or pla yback. ⢠Some pla yers ma y not pla yback the discs recorded with this unit. W e cannot guarantee the playbac k using other players . Title/Chapter/T rac k A D VD-Video has large par titions called âÂÂTitlesâÂÂ, and smaller par titions within them called âÂÂChaptersâÂÂ. A music CD has other par titions called âÂÂT racksâÂÂ. A n umber is allotted to each par tition and these n umbers are called âÂÂtitle numbersâÂÂ, âÂÂchapter n umbersâ or âÂÂtrac k numbersâÂÂ. When recording in the VR mode One-time recording is set to 1 title (1 chapter). Howe ver , if y ou stop recording temporarily or erase scenes by editing, the chapter will automatically be par titioned. The interval between chapters can be specified. (See page 27.) When recording in the Video mode One-time recording is set to 1 title. In recording, chapters are set automatically . The inter val between chapters can be specified. (See page 27.) NO TES: ⢠The title, chapter and trac k are numbered, b ut some discs may not record the n umbers. ⢠Recording on D VD-R/RW in the Video mode is a new standard appro ved at the 2000 D VD f orum. Conf ormity to this standard varies with each D VD play er manufacturer . Some models of D VD play er or D VD-ROM drive , theref ore, will not pla yback recorded videos. 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:19 11
Before using your unit 01 12 En AV3 Pa r ts and functions Rear Front ST ANDBY/ON b utton AUDIO (L/R)/VIDEO IN (A V3) jacks VCR EJECT button D VD S-VIDEO IN (A V3) jack VCR/DVD button OPEN/CLOSE button PLA Y button ST OP button FF (Fast Forward) button REW (Rewind) button REC button CHANNEL /â b uttons Disc tray Cassette Loading Slot VCR indicator DUBBING button Display window IR Remote sensor DVD indicator 2H30301B_En_12_17 8/4/05, 19:19 12
Before using your unit 01 13 En No . Displa y Description Lights during video tape playbac k. 1 NO TES: ⢠Some discs may not pla yback correctly , or chapter n umber , pla yback time , etc ma y not be displa yed. ⢠During CD playbac k, the counter display runs up to 99 M 59S and then restar ts from 00M 00S . Display windo w Video tape is temporarily stopped. Lights during video tape recording. Timer recording display . 2 4 Appears when a CD is inser ted. Appears when a CD-R is inser ted. Appears when a D VD-Video is inser ted. Appears when a D VD-R is inser ted. Appears when a D VD-RW is inserted. Appears when a D VD-RW in VR mode is inser ted. When the disc is set to video mode, VR does not appear . Video tape is in the unit. Clock displa y (Colon [ : ] flashes). Counter displa y in hour/minute/second f or VCR/D VD , minute/second f or CD . TV channel display . Tr ack number displa y for CD . The external input channel (A V1, A V2, or A V3) display . Lights during playback of D VD and CD . Flashes in auto resume. D VD or CD is temporarily stopped. Lights during D VD recording. CD CD-R DV D D VD-R D VD-RW VR 10:00 01 H 00M 00S 2CH TRK 002 A1/A2/A3 3 4 D VD recording modes. XP , SP , LP or EP can be selected in turn by pressing the REC MODE/SPEED repeatedly . 2 VCR recording modes. SP or LP can be selected in turn b y pressing the REC MODE/SPEED repeatedly . SP/LP XP/SP/LP/E P Appears when a CD-RW is inserted. CD-R W Progressiv e scanning mode. TV When the tape or disc is pla y ed back or the SETUP men u is displa yed, TV disappears. 2H30301B_En_12_17 8/4/05, 19:19 13
Before using your unit 01 14 En P age Remote control ST ANDBY/ON T ur ns power on/off. 19 VCR EJECT Ejects the cassette tapes. 46 D VD OPEN/CLOSE Opens or Closes the tra y . 30 D VD/VCR Switches to operation between VCR and D VD . 30, 47, 78, 79 0-9 Direct channel selection of TV . 52, 54 Entering a Pluscode for VIDEO Plus timer programming 56 Setting input. 20, 34, 76 Entering a password. 21 TIMER REC Sets the unit to star t recording at a preset time. 58, 61 INPUT SELECT SCART input or A V -F ront input. 80, 81 VIDEO Plus Display the VIDEO Plus program screen. 56 RETURN Close the menu window . 19, 42 CANCEL Deletes the Timer recording program. 58, 61 Cancels input data in the setting mode. 20, 77 TITLE MENU/T OP MENU Displays titles of a D VD disc. 31, 36, 39, 64 CH /â Channel selection for VCR. 52, 54 / Cursor buttons. TRK (TRACKING) /â Manual tracking in the pla yback mode for VCR. 48 / Cursor buttons. ENTER Option selection in the menu. D VD MENU Displays the menu of the D VD disc. 31, 36 SETUP Displays the setup men u. 19, 59 ST OP Stop. 30, 47, 53 PLA Y Playbac k. 30, 47 PA USE/STILL Still picture/Recording pause on/off. 33, 48, 53 SKIP / Skips chapters in the forw ard or rev erse direction. 33, 43, 72 INDEX âÂÂ/ Searches for the INDEX mark of a tape. 49 REW/SEARCH â Rewind/Re view pla yback. 33, 47, 48 F .FWD/SEARCH F ast Forward/F orward search pla yback. 33, 47, 48 ONE T OUCH REPEA T Skips the D VD playback bac k 10 seconds. 35 CM SKIP Skips commercial breaks. 34, 48 SLO W Slow motion pla yback. 33, 48 REC Recording/O TR. 52, 54, 80 REC MODE/SPEED Selects the recording mode. 52, 54, 78 DUBBING Copies VCR to D VD or D VD to VCR. 78, 79 A UDIO Changes the soundtrack language of the D VD . 38 A UDIO SELECT Switches sound between mono and stereo . 62 DISPLA Y Displays VCR or D VD operation status. 32, 48, 65 ZOOM Zoom (for D VD). 37, 43 REPEA T A-B Repeats playbac k between A and B . (D VD/CD) 35 ZERO RETURN Stops the tape when the counter reaches 00 H 00 M 00 S .4 9 COUNTER RESET Resets the counter to 00 H 00 M 00 S .4 9 ANGLE Changes playbac k angle of a D VD disc. 37, 43 SUBTITLE Selects subtitles of the D VD disc. 37 AT R Digital A UT O TRACKING. 48 PLA Y MODE Displays the pla ybac k mode. 34 REPEA T Repeats playbac k. 35, 48 CLOCK/COUNTER Changes the front panel displa y mode. 49 PROGRESSIVE Activates the progressive scanning mode . 45 2H30301B_En_12_17 8/4/05, 19:20 14
Before using your unit 01 15 En 1 23 Replace the compartment cov er . Install two AAA/R03 batteries (supplied), paying attention to the polarity diagram in the battery compartment. Open the battery compartment cover in the direction of the arrow . How to install the batteries Use dry cell batteries type AAA/R03. These batteries are offered as carbon / zinc-type. You may use both, but do not mix types. Note: Flat, weak batteries will leak. Corrosive electrolyte will damage the remote control handset. Leak proof batteries will not leak immediately when they are flat. As long as the handset is still working, there is no danger of leakage. To prevent damage, remove the batteries if you do not use the handset for several months. Damage because of leakage is not covered by the guarantee. Distance of Remote Control Operation Effective angle: approx. 60 ð approx. 7m Point the remote control directly at the remote sensor. If bright sunlight directly beams onto the unit front. If an obstacle is placed between the unit and the handset. The remote control handset will not work properly in the following cases: If the batteries have not been installed according to their polarities. If the batteries are weak. When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâ s rules that apply in your country/area. D3-4-2-3-1_En AV3 2H30301B_En_12_17 8/4/05, 19:20 15
Before using your unit 01 16 En Basic connections Connect your VCR/DVD to your main aerial and TV set as shown in the illustration. When you have finished making these connections, connect your VCR/DVD to the mains power supply (230V / 50Hz). Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet. TV AC power cord 230V/50 Hz VCR/DVD Aerial-Input To SCART socket RF-Input (from house antenna) TV Scart socket (AV1) RF-Output (to TV) Aerial Supplied Coaxial cable In addition to the coaxial cable connection, you should also connect the supplied SCART cable from the VCR/ DVD to your TV as shown. As well as transferring the high quality pictures and sound to your TV, the SCART connection can automatically switch the TV to its AV channel for playback. Connecting this unit to your TV using the SCART connections Some TVs may not allow automatic switching to the AV input channel. In this case you should manually select the AV input setting on your TV's controls when playing through this unit. Supplied SCART cable DECODER/EXTERNAL SCART Socket (AV2) Pla ybac k connection The exact arrangement you use to interconnect various video and audio components to the VCR/DVD is dependent on the model and features of each component. Check the Operation Manual provided with each component for the location of SCART socket. SCART-cable (not supplied) If a Satellite Receiver is used, we recommend the following configuration: Connection to a Satellite Receiver To record from Satellite Receiver press INPUT SELECT on the remote control of the VCR/DVD. âÂÂA1â will appear on the front display. Select the particular satellite channel on the Satellite Receiver. Satellite Antenna Satellite Receiver VCR/DVD TV SCART-cable (supplied) 2H30301B_En_12_17 8/4/05, 19:20 16
Before using your unit 01 17 En TV To A udio (L) Input To A udio (R) Input A UDIO Cord (not supplied) Stereo Amplifier VCR/D VD A udio (R) Output SCART -cable (supplied) A udio (L) Output To SCAR T input TV SCART sock et (A V1) Connect to a Stereo Amplifier with A udio Output If your VCR/D VD is connected to a stereo amplifier , the video soundtrack can output through the loudspeakers of the stereo system. Connect to an A V Amplifier with b uilt-in digital surround (f or DVD/CD pla yback) If you are using an Amplifier with a b uilt-in digital surround as f ollows, y ou can enjo y the various audio systems such as Dolby Digital and DTS b y using the Coaxial Digital Output. Connect to a TV with Component video output (for D VD/CD pla yback) Y ou can enjo y the highest quality picture by connecting the unitâ s component video out jacks to the component video input jacks of y our TV , with component video cab les (not supplied). At shipment (with the factory settings), component video signals are not output from these component video jacks . Connect the unit to the TV with the SCART cable and change the D VD OUTPUT setting to COMPONENT . (See page 25.) 3 3 3 3 3 PROGRESSIVE outputs Some TVs or monitors are equipped with component video inputs that are capable of reproducing a progressiv ely scanned video signal. Connecting to these inputs allows you to vie w the highest quality pictures with less flick er . 3 3 3 3 3 INTERLA CED outputs Some TVs or monitors are equipped with component video inputs. Connecting to these inputs allows y ou to enjoy the highest quality D VD picture pla yback. NO TES: ⢠In connecting to a TV that are not capab le of reproducing a pr ogressively scanned video signal using the component sockets, do not select progressive scanning mode. If y ou do it, the component video outputs does not feed the correct signals and y ou can not see any picture (see page 45). ⢠When connecting to a TV using the SCART sock et, make sure that the prog ressive indicator on the displa y window is not lit. If it is lit, the video and S-Video outputs do not f eed the correct signals and you cannot see any picture. T o turn off the progressive indicator , make the progressiv e scanning mode inactive (see page 45). ⢠If the component video input jacks on a TV are the BNC type, use an adapter to conv er t the RCA jac ks from the component video cables to BNC (not supplied). TV Coaxial digital cable (not supplied) AV Amplifier with built-in various decoder as above VCR/D VD Coaxial digital Audio Output SCART -cable (supplied) To SCAR T input TV SCART sock et (A V1) Use this connection to connect an: ⢠A V amplifier with built-in *Dolb y Digital decoder ⢠A V amplifier with built-in *DTS decoder NO TES: ⢠The COAXIAL jac k only outputs the audio from the D VD section. VHS signal is output only from the SCART -sockets and A UDIO L/R jacks. ⢠When you mak e the connections abov e, do not set DOLBY DIGIT AL to DOLBY DIGIT AL or DTS to ON on the AV Amplifier . If you do , a loud noise will suddenly come out from the speakers, aff ecting your ears or causing the speakers to be damaged. ⢠DTS audio is only output via the COAXIAL output jac k. Y ou theref ore need to connect this unit to a suitable DTS decoder in order to hear the audio from DTS discs. When pla ying DTS-encoded CDs, only noise will be heard from the speakers or analog stereo outputs . ⢠Some DTS decoders which do not suppor t D VD-DTS interface ma y not work properly with the unit. 2H30301B_En_12_17 8/4/05, 19:20 17
V arious settings 02 18 En A utomatic TV tuning and c loc k setting Plug in your unit into the mains supply and it will start to automatically tune itself in and set the correct date and time. After setting itself up, you must set the TV to the video channel. ONLY WHEN YOU PLUG IN THIS UNIT FOR THE FIRST TIME, THE AUTOMATIC SETUP WILL BE AVAILABLE. ST ANDBY/ON CHANNEL / â AV3 4 If there is interference from an adjacent broad- cast channel in the picture (wa vy lines, picture roll, etc.), press the CHANNEL / â buttons on y our unit to select any other RF channel betw een 23 and 69, retuning your TV until the word âÂÂTESTâ flashes on the TV screen. If you con- nected a satellite receiver as e xplained on page 16, you must s witch off the VCRâ s transmitter . Press the unitâ s CHANNEL / â b uttons repeatedly until OFF appears in the display windo w (OFF will appear after 69 or before 23). 5 Press the ST ANDBY/ ON button to turn OFF the unit. Now the TV is tuned to your unit. NO TES: ⢠The unit automatically corrects the clock setting every hour and automatically adjusts the clock setting for Daylight Saving Time. ⢠Your unit will tune the TV stations as follows. CH 1 BBC 1 CH 5 Channel 5 CH 2 BBC 2 CH 6 Satellite CH 3 ITV CH 7 etc. CH 4 Channel 4 ⢠If you want to change the RF output channel or switch to âÂÂOFFâÂÂ, press and hold the STANDBY/ON button on the front of your unit in the Standby mode until the current RF output channel appears. Press the CHANNEL / â buttons on your unit to select the RF channel you desire. Preparation: ⢠Make sure that your unit is connected properly to the TV. ⢠If a satellite receiver is connected with the coaxial lead, make sure itâÂÂs switched ON and set to SKY ONE. ⢠Turn on the TV and select the channel you wish to allocate for video use. 1 Plug in your unit's plug into the mains supply . âÂÂA utoâ will star t to flash in the unit displa y . And also âÂÂA UTO TUNINGâ will be displa yed on the TV screen. Y our unit will automatically tune itself in and set the correct time and date (Depending on the reception condition, it may tak e approx. 10 minutes.) 2 Press and hold the ST ANDBY/ON b utton on the front of your unit in the Standby mode until RF output channel âÂÂ36â will appear in the unit displa y . 3 If you ha v e used a 21 pin scar t lead you now , simply select the A V channel on y our TV and go to step 5. T une the TV in the same wa y as tuning in a TV broadcast station until the word âÂÂTESTâ flashes on the TV screen. Ref er to the TV operating instructions for tuning. Now the output from the unit is tuned to this channel. Whene ver y ou w ant to pla y back a tape , select this channel. 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 18
V arious settings 02 19 En SETUP MENU The SETUP MENU consists of several menus where you can make v arious settings concerning language, audio functions, and images. In addition, this menu inc ludes a cloc k, channel and other things that require setting just after pur- c hase. For details of each menu, see the corresponding section in this chapter . Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Press ST ANDBY/ON b utton to turn on the VCR/ DV D . Using the SETUP MENU The follo wing e xample shows the basic setting procedure of the SETUP MENU . The remote control ke ys that operate the SETUP MENU are displa yed at the bottom of the screen. TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP OTHER LANGUAGE P ARENT AL CLOCK DISC SETUP OTHER SETUP MENU TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU LANGUA GE P ARENT AL CLOCK DISC SETUP O THER LANGUA GE OSD LANGUA GE D VD MENU A UDIO SUBTITLE ENGLISH ENGLISH AUT OMATIC ENGLISH TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU LANGUA GE P ARENT AL CLOCK DISC SETUP O THER LANGUA GE OSD LANGUA GE D VD MENU A UDIO SUBTITLE RETURN SETUP ENTER BA CK END ENGLISH ENGLISH AUT OMATIC ENGLISH SELECT ENGLISH FRANCAIS ESP ANOL DEUTSCH IT ALIANO O THER AUT OMATIC OFF ENTER 1 Press SETUP while the D VD and video tape are stopped. The SETUP MENU screen will appear . 3 Press or to select the desired submenu and press ENTER . The screen for the selected submen u will appear . 4 Press or to select the desired item y ou w ant, and press ENTER. Selectable items will be listed. 5 Press or to select the desired item and press ENTER. This completes the setting procedure. ⢠To return to the pre vious screen, press RETURN . ⢠To close the SETUP MENU , press SETUP . NO TES: ⢠F or items that require different operations from the basic setting procedure, the setting procedure is described in each individual section. ⢠The item which is indicated by red colour cannot be selected. 2 Press or to select the desired menu and press ENTER . The submenu screen of the selected menu will appear . 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 19
V arious settings 02 20 En Setting the language Y ou can c hoose the language of the menu screen, D VD menu, DVD audio and subtitles. Preparation: ⢠T urn ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select âÂÂLANGU A GEâ from âÂÂSYSTEM SETUPâ . Fo r the procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. OSD LANGU A GE Y ou can set the language f or on screen display . Select âÂÂOSD LANGU AGEâ and select the language from the list below . Selectable languages: ENGLISH, FRANCAIS, ESP ANOL, DEUTSCH, IT ALIANO D VD MENU When sev eral menu languages are recorded on a DV D, you can select the language to be used for the D VD menu. Select âÂÂD VD MENUâ and select the language from the list below . Selectable languages: ENGLISH, FRANCAIS, ESP ANOL, DEUTSCH, IT ALIANO The selected language is the first priority menu language. O THER If you w ant to select another language, bef ore pressing ENTER, input the language code by using the n umeric ke ys . (See the Language code list on page 84). Then press ENTER . ⢠If you input a wrong number , press CANCEL . A UDIO When sev eral audio languages are recorded on a DV D, you can select the audio language to be pla yed back. The selected language remains in effect after the power is turned off or the disc is replaced. Select âÂÂA UDIOâ and select the audio language from the list below . Selectable languages: ENGLISH, FRANCAIS, ESP ANOL, DEUTSCH, IT ALIANO The language you ha ve selected will pla y if it is recorded on the disc. ORIGINAL The unit will select the first prior ity language of each disc. O THER If you w ant to select another language, bef ore pressing ENTER, input the language code by using the n umeric ke ys . (See the Language code list on page 84). Then press ENTER . ⢠If you input a wrong n umber , press CANCEL . NO TE: If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the first-prior ity language is selected. SUBTITLE When sev eral subtitles languages are recorded on DV D, you can select the language to be used for the subtitles. The selected language remains in eff ect after the power is turned off or the disc is replaced. Select âÂÂSUBTITLEâ and select the menu language from the list below . Selectable languages: ENGLISH, FRANCAIS, ESP ANOL, DEUTSCH, IT ALIANO The subtitle is display ed with the selected language if it is recorded on the disc. O THER If you w ant to select another language, bef ore pressing ENTER, input the language code by using the n umeric ke ys . (See the Language code list on page 84). Then press ENTER . ⢠If you input a wrong n umber , press CANCEL . AU T OMA TIC ⢠The unit will automatically select the same language in the A UDIO setting. ⢠When the unit selects the same language as the A UDIO setting, the subtitles will not appear during playbac k. ⢠When you do not use the same language as the A UDIO setting, the subtitles will appear during playbac k. OFF Subtitles do not appear . NO TE: If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the first-prior ity language is selected. TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU LANGUA GE P ARENT AL CLOCK DISC SETUP O THER LANGUA GE OSD LANGUA GE D VD MENU A UDIO SUBTITLE ENGLISH ENGLISH AUT OMA TIC ENGLISH 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 20
V arious settings 02 21 En Setting the parental contr ol Some discs are specified as not suitable for c hildren. This unit can prevent pla yback of such discs. Preparation: ⢠T urn ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â P ARENT AL â from â SYSTEM SETUP âÂÂ. For the procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. Selecting parental control Select âÂÂP ARENT AL â and select the parental control lev el. If the recorder is set to a lower le vel than the disc, it will require you to enter a pass word bef ore the disc will play . Select from lev el 1 to level 8. On a scale of 1- 8, âÂÂ1â is the most restrictive. To lock the selected parental contr ol level 1 To loc k the selected parental control level, press or to select âÂÂP ASSWORDâÂÂ. 2 Use the n umeric keys to input a 4-digit password. ⢠If you input a wrong n umber , press CANCEL . ⢠Be sure to remember this number! 3 Press ENTER. To cancel the locked parental contr ol level 1 Select âÂÂP ASSWORDâ shown in step 1 of the above section and use the n umeric keys to input the password. 2 Press ENTER. The lock ed mark â â will change to an unlock ed mark â âÂÂ. Then, you can change the parental control le vel, or enter a new pass word. ---- change to 1234 TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER LANGUA GE P ARENT AL CLOCK DISC SETUP O THER P ARENT AL P ASSWORD P ARENT AL SETUP MENU RETURN SETUP ENTER BA CK END DELETE - - - - INPUT NO. 09 CANCEL SELECT P ARENT AL OFF ENTER Y OUR DISC EXCEEDS THE P ARENT AL CONTROL LEVEL 1. P ARENT AL CONTROL LEVEL CANCEL PICTURE NO TES: ⢠The selected le vel will apply to oper ations ex ecuted after this. ⢠The unit cannot restrict playbac k of some discs. ⢠Some discs may not be encoded with specific r ating lev el information though its disc jacket sa ys âÂÂadultâÂÂ. P arental control will not wor k with those discs. ⢠If you forget the pass word, you can reset the recorder to its f actory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 87), then set a new pass word. T emporaril y cancelling parental contr ol P arental control can temporarily be cancelled with some D VDs. 1 Playbac k a D VD . (See page 30.) 2 If the D VD disc has been designed to temporarily cancel the rating le vel, the screen that f ollows the âÂÂREADINGâ screen will change. If you select âÂÂYESâ with the ENTER, the message âÂÂY OUR DISC EXCEEDS THE P ARENT AL CONTROL LEVEL 1. â will then appear . 3 If you wish to cancel the set rating le vel tempo- rar ily , select âÂÂP ARENT AL CONTROL LEVEL â with or , then press ENTER . If the pass word has been selected, the passw ord input screen will appear . Alternatively , if the pass word has not been set, playbac k will commence. If you donâÂÂt kno w (or hav e f orgotten) the pass word, select âÂÂCANCEL PIC- TUREâÂÂ. The setting screen will disappear . Press OPEN/ CLOSE to remov e the disc. 4 Use the n umeric keys to input the pass word. â¢T o interr upt the input process, press RETURN . 5 Press ENTER. 6 Playbac k will commence if the entered password w as correct. NO TE: This temporary cancellation of the rating lev el will remain active until the disc is ejected. When the disc is ejected, the original rating lev el will be set again automatically . 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 21
V arious settings 02 22 En Y ou can f ormat, protect, or finalise a disc. Preparation: ⢠T urn ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â DISC SETUP â from â SYSTEM SETUP âÂÂ. For the procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. REFORMA T Y ou can f ormat a recorded D VD-R W . Check the content of the disc bef ore f ormat. If you for mat the disc, the recorded content of the disc will be erased. To f or mat a D VD in the Video mode, select âÂÂREFOR- MA T AS D VD VIDEO âÂÂ, and to format it in the VR mode, select âÂÂREFORMA T AS D VD VRâÂÂ. The screen below will appear . ⢠When you select âÂÂST AR Tâ and press ENTER , fo r mat will star t. The screen below will appear . ⢠When format finished, âÂÂREFORMA TTING COM- PLETED PRESS ENTERâ will appear . Press ENTER , the normal TV screen will appear . ⢠When you select âÂÂCANCEL â and press ENTER, the DISC SETUP screen will appear . NO TES: â¢Y ou cannot reformat D VD-R. â¢Y ou cannot reformat a disc if the disc protection is âÂÂONâÂÂ. In such a case, be sure to cancel the disc protection (see page 23) bef ore format. ⢠During formatting, finalising and undo finalising, the progress will be shown b y âÂÂâÂÂâ in the front display window . Setting the c loc k /01/05 00:00 01 27/09/05 10:20 0 Y our VCR/D VD is fitted with a 24 hour clock. Y ou m ust set the date and time for timer recor d- ings. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â CLOCK â from the â SYSTEM SETUP â section of the SETUP MENU and press ENTER (F or the full procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19). Ex.: Setting the clock to âÂÂ10:20â September, 27th, 200 5. 1 Select the desired items using or (date, month, year , hour and minute), then press ENTER . 2 Press or to set the value of the selected item. 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to set the date, y ear and present time, and press ENTER . The SETUP MENU will close. This completes clock time setting. To set the A UTO TIME 1 Select â AU TO TIME â from âÂÂCLOCK âÂÂ. 2 Press ENTER , then press or to select ON or OFF . NO TES: ⢠In case of a power failure, the clock will continue to operate for another 30 minutes with quartzcontrolled precision. To indicate that the power failure has lasted for an excessive period of time âÂÂ0:00â will appear on the display. In this case readjust time and date. ⢠When the AUTO TIME is set to ON, the unit automatically corrects the clock setting. TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER LANGUA GE P ARENT AL CLOCK DISC SETUP O THER CLOCK CLOCK (DD/MM/YY) AU TO TIME ON 01 /01/05 00:00 SETUP MENU RETURN SETUP ENTER BA CK END SELECT SELECT ENTER TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER DISC SETUP REFORMA T AS DVD VIDEO REFORMA T AS DVD VR NEW DISC FORMA T FINALISE PROTECT DISC (VR ONL Y) UNDO FINALISE PROCEED VR PROCEED OFF PROCEED PROCEED SETUP MENU REFORMA T ST ART CANCEL REFORMA T Setting the disc 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 22
V arious settings 02 23 En NO TES: ⢠During the finalisation the cursor will move repeatedly . When the finalisation finished, âÂÂFINALISING COMPLETED PRESS ENTERâ will appear . Press ENTER , the normal TV screen will appear . ⢠The finalisation process may require a fe w minutes to about 1 hour according to disc type or the amount of free space on the disc. â¢Y ou can record or edit a finalised D VD-RW (in VR mode) by cancelling the finalising, but you cannot do these opera- tions with a D VD-RW (Video mode), or with a D VD-R. ⢠This unit may not be able to record or edit a disc which was recorded or edited using another D VD recorder . â¢Y ou cannot pla yback a disc recorded on VR mode on a unit that does not suppor t D VD-RW . â¢E v en if you finalise a disc in the Video mode, the disc cannot be play ed back in some D VD play ers. â¢A D VD-R disc can not be named after it is finalized. PRO TECT DISC Y ou can protect a disc to pre vent the content recorded on it from being er ased, edited or re-recorded. Only D VD-RW (in VR mode) can be protected. Select âÂÂPR O TECT DISC (VR ONL Y)â and select âÂÂONâ to protect the disc. To cancel the disc protection, select âÂÂOFFâÂÂ. UNDO FINALISE Y ou can cancel the finalisation of a finalised D VD-R W (in VR mode). Y ou cannot cancel the finalisation f or discs other than abo ve . Y ou can record or edit on a disc whose finalisation has been cancelled. Select âÂÂUNDO FINALISEâÂÂ, and the screen below will appear . ⢠When you select âÂÂST AR Tâ and press ENTER, the cancelling finalisation will star t. The screen belo w will appear . ⢠When you select âÂÂCANCEL â and press ENTER, the DISC SETUP screen will appear . NO TES: ⢠During the cancelling finalisation the cursor will mov e repeatedly . When the cancelling finalisation finished, âÂÂUNDO FINALISING COMPLETED PRESS ENTERâ will appear . Press ENTER , the normal TV screen will appear . ⢠The cancelling finalisation process ma y require a fe w minutes to about 1 hour according to disc type or the amount of free space on the disc. ⢠When the discâ s finalisation cannot be cancelled, y ou cannot select âÂÂUNDO FINALISEâÂÂ. FINALISING PLEASE W AIT FINALISE ST ART CANCEL NEW DISC FORMA T VIDEO MODE ST ART CANCEL INITIALIZING DISC VIDEO MODE UNFINALISING PLEASE W AIT UNDO FINALISE ST ART CANCEL NEW DISC FORMA T If you insert an unused disc, the disc is automatically for matted. If you use the D VD-R W (V er .1.1/1.2), you can select the mode to be used for automatic f or mat. Select âÂÂNEW DISC FORMA Tâ and select the mode from the list below . VR :F ormat the disc in the VR mode . VIDEO :F or mat the disc in the Video mode. When you insert an unused disc, the f ollowing message screen will appear . ⢠When you select âÂÂST AR Tâ and press ENTER, the for matting will star t. The screen belo w will appear . ⢠When format finished, âÂÂFORMA TTING COMPLETED PRESS ENTERâ will appear . Press ENTER , the normal TV screen will appear . ⢠When you select âÂÂCANCEL â and press ENTER, the normal TV screen will appear . NO TE: If a recorded disc has scratches or contamination on it, the âÂÂNEW DISC FORMA Tâ screen ma y appear . If this happens, select âÂÂCANCEL âÂÂ. FINALISE To pla y a D VD disc recorded on this unit you must finalise the disc to ensure compatibility with other D VD pla yers . In addition if you are using a D VD-R W disc you must record in Video mode. When âÂÂFINALISEâ is selected, the screen below will appear . ⢠When you select âÂÂST ARTâ and press ENTER , finalisation will star t. The screen belo w will appear . â¢W hen y ou select âÂÂCANCEL â and press ENTER, the DISC SETUP screen will appear . 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 23
V arious settings 02 24 En This section describes settings about the screen. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â VIDEO â from â AV SETUP âÂÂ. F or the procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. TV SCREEN Y ou can select the TV screen size to suit the screen image. Select âÂÂTV SCREENâ and select screen size from the list below . 4:3 Panscan It displa ys a wide picture across the whole screen with left and right edges automatically cut off. 4:3 Letter bo x Select this mode when connecting to a conv entional TV . When pla ying back a wide screen D VD disc, it displa ys a wide picture with blac k bands at the top and bottom of screen. 16:9 Select this mode when connecting to a wide-screen TV . A wide-screen picture is displayed in full siz e. NO TE: If you select â 4:3 Pan Scanâ but the DVD disc is not fo r matted in the pan scan format, the aspect ratio will be displayed as â 4:3 LetterboxâÂÂ. TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU TV SCREEN STILL MODE NO NOISE BA CKGROUND BRIGHTNESS D VD OUTPUT A V3 INPUT 4:3 Letter box AUT OMATIC ON STD RGB VIDEO VIDEO ENTER RETURN SETUP BACK END SELECT ENTER Other (SYSTEM SETUP) Y ou can turn the displa y window and screen display âÂÂONâ or âÂÂOFFâÂÂ. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â O THER â from â SYSTEM SETUP âÂÂ. For the procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. DIMMER (Brightness of the display window) Y ou ma y adjust the brightness or tur n off the display on the front panel of the unit. Select âÂÂDIMMERâ and select the displa y window status from the list below . AU T OMA TIC : When the power is on, the displa y window appears bright. When the power is off , it appears dar k. DIM : The window displa y alwa ys appears dark. OFF : When the power is on, the displa y window appears dark. When the power is off , it is tur ned off. DISPLA Y/CALL (T urning the screen display âÂÂONâ or âÂÂOFFâÂÂ) Y ou can turn off the screen display that is output to the TV screen by this unit. Select âÂÂDISPLA Y/CALL âÂÂ, and select âÂÂONâ or âÂÂOFFâÂÂ. ON : The screen display appears. OFF : Nothing but the SETUP MENU and error messages appear . ⢠In the OFF selection, The DISPLA Y button on the remote control will be av ailable . SPRACHE RA TING UHR DISC SETUP O THER TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU O THER DIMMER DISPLA Y/CALL AUT OMATIC ON ENTER RETURN SETUP BACK END SELECT ENTER Setting the screen 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 24
V arious settings 02 25 En STILL MODE Y ou can set the type of image displa yed on the TV screen when the playbac k of the D VD is stilled. Select âÂÂSTILL MODEâ and select the image to be display ed from the list below . AU T OMA TIC The field still or frame still is automatically selected. (F or normal use.) STILL BY FRAME The frame still is set. Note for the field still and frame still: ⢠Field* still Since only one field (half of the video information) is shown on the TV screen, the picture appears rough but does not shak e. â¢F r ame* still Tw o fields are alternatively sho wn on the TV screen. The picture shakes b ut the resulting picture quality is superior to the field still pictures. Field*: A field ref ers to the video inf ormation in one-half of a frame. 1 frame (screen) consists of 2 fields. Fr ame*: A frame refers to the total area occupied by each picture on the TV screen. NO NOISE B A CKGROUND When you select a channel where the broadcast has finished or no broadcast is set, the TV screen will automatically appear blue . The function abov e works when you select âÂÂNO NOISE BACKGR OUNDâ and select âÂÂONâ from the list. If you donâÂÂt w ant to use this blue bac kground function, select âÂÂOFFâÂÂ. The def ault setting is âÂÂONâÂÂ. BRIGHTNESS Y ou can control the brightness lev el of the image. Select âÂÂBRIGHTNESSâ and select the le vel from the list below . MAX : The image becomes br ighter . STD : The image is of standard brightness. MIN : The image becomes darker . D VD OUTPUT Y ou can select the output signal of D VD playbac k pic- ture to the TV screen as an RGB signal, a COMPO- NENT VIDEO signal or a S-VIDEO signal. RGB: RGB signal (A V1) COMPONENT : COMPONENT VIDEO signal S-VIDEO: S-VIDEO signal (A V1) NO TES: â¢I f you select COMPONENT , ref er to the connections shown on page 17. ⢠An RGB output is av ailable when being connected to TV using SCART connector . When you press ST OP on the front panel f or 5 sec- onds, D VD OUTPUT setting will be restored to âÂÂRGBâÂÂ. ⢠Use the appropriate connection setting for y our TV . Refer to the o wner's manual f or your TV f or details. ⢠Depending on its specifications, y our TV may not be able to receiv e RGB output from this unit. ⢠If you connect the unit to y our TV with S-VIDEO sig- nal input, a blac k and white image ma y be display ed f or around 10 seconds when you start the unit up. A V3 INPUT Y ou must select the input mode of A V3 (front A V - input). (see the upper connection on page 81) S-VIDEO: Only the S-Video signal will be (D VD only) input. (Composite video signal will be cut.) VIDEO: Only the composite video signal will be input. (S-Video input signal will be cut.) 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 25
V arious settings 02 26 En NICAM This unit is capable of NICAM stereo . Y ou can select the NICAM mode as f ollows (see page 60 f or NICAM recording and pla yback). AU T OMA TIC : to record NICAM programs OFF: to set the NICAM off DOLBY DIGIT AL OUTPUT Y ou can select the output sound from the DIGIT AL A UDIO OUTPUT on the rear panel. DOLBY DIGIT AL: to output with DOLBY DIGIT AL PCM: to output with PCM f ormat Setting the audio TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP SENDER SETUP O THER DRC EXTERNAL AUDIO INPUT NICAM DOLBY DIGIT AL OUTPUT STD STEREO AUT OMATIC DOLBY DIGIT AL A UDIO SETUP MENU ENTER RETURN SETUP BACK END SELECT ENTER This section describes audio settings. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â A UDIO â from â AV SETUP âÂÂ. For the proce- dure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. DRC DRC (Dynamic Range Control) enables y ou to control the dynamic range so as to achie ve a suitab le sound f or y our equipment. Select âÂÂDRCâ and select the le vel from the list below . MAX : Full dynamic range is maintained. STD : Full dynamic range is reduced. TV : Dynamic range is reduced. NO TES: ⢠This function works only during playbac k of Dolby Digital recorded discs. ⢠When you listen to the sound from TVâ s speaker , we recommend that you select âÂÂTVâÂÂ. ⢠The le vel of Dynamic Range Reduction ma y differ depending on the D VD . EXTERNAL A UDIO INPUT The audio mode for the audio input jac k can be selected, choosing either stereo or monaural. Select âÂÂEXTERNAL A UDIO INPUTâ and select from the list below (see page 81). STEREO : The sound is treated as stereo sound. L CH : The sound is treated as the monaural sound of the left channel. R CH : The sound is treated as the monaural sound of the right channel. This section describes recording settings. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and set it to the video input mode. ⢠Select â REC SETUP âÂÂ. For the procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. INITIAL REC T O Y ou can select the recording media that is first display ed in the item âÂÂREC TOâ on the timer recording screen. Select âÂÂINITIAL REC T Oâ and select âÂÂD VDâ or âÂÂVCRâÂÂ. INITIAL REC MODE Y ou can select the recording mode that is first display ed in the item âÂÂREC MODEâ on the timer recording screen. Select âÂÂINITIAL REC MODEâÂÂ. VCR recording modes: SP/LP D VD recording modes: XP/SP/LP/EP NO TE: F or the D VD recording mode , see page 50. And for the VCR recording mode, see page 46. TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL O THER REC SETUP INITIAL REC TO INITIAL REC MODE AU TO CHAPTER INDEX PICTURE BILINGUAL RECORDING SETUP MENU DVD SP 10MIN 0 SEC L CH ENTER RETURN SETUP BACK END SELECT ENTER Setting the recor ding 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 26
V arious settings 02 27 En Setting the other AU TO CHAPTER Y ou can automatically make chapter marks on the D VD to be recorded. Select âÂÂA UT O CHAPTERâ and select the inter val between chapter marks from the list below . OFF : The automatic chapter is not used. 5 MIN : The interval is set to 5 minutes . 10 MIN : The interval is set to 10 minutes. 15 MIN : The interval is set to 15 minutes. 30 MIN : The interval is set to 30 minutes. INDEX PICTURE Y ou can set the time that the thumbnail image is registered in the title menu of D VD-RW (VR mode). Select âÂÂINDEX PICTUREâ and select from the list below . 0 SEC : The image 0 second after a recording star t is registered. 1 MIN : The image 1 minute after a recording start is registered. 3 MIN : The image 3 minutes after a recording star t is registered. NO TE: Y ou cannot select the thumbnail image f or Video mode. BILINGU AL RECORDING In case of the recording of a bilingual program to a disc with video f or mat, you can select the recording sound. L CH : to record with left channel R CH : to record with right channel Y ou can set the s witching interval between pla yed back images in the slide sho w mode. And, you can display the registration code of DivX î VO D. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â O THER âÂÂ. For the procedure , see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. JPEG INTER V AL Y ou can select the interval time f or JPEG slide show (page 43). Select âÂÂJPEG INTER V AL â and select the switching inter val betw een images from the list below . OFF : The slide show mode is not used. 5 SEC : The inter val is set to 5 seconds. 10 SEC : The inter v al is set to 10 seconds. 15 SEC : The inter v al is set to 15 seconds. DivX î VO D In order to pla y DivX î V OD (video on demand) content on this recorder , you first need to register the recorder with your DivX î VOD content provider . Y ou do this by generating a DivX î V OD registration code, which you submit to y our provider . To display y our registration code , select âÂÂDISPLA Yâ and press ENTER . Y our 8-digit registtation code is displa yed. NO TES: ⢠DivX î V OD content is protected by a DRM (Digital Rights Management) system. This restricts playbac k of content to specific, registered devices . ⢠Resetting the recorder (as described in page 87) will not cause you to lose y our registration code . 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 27
V arious settings 02 28 En Setting the channel This VCR/D VD has a built-in tuner to receive TV broadcast transmissions. Before you recor d a TV - Broadcast, you must set and preset all a vailab le c hannels. This VCR/D VD can preset up to 80 c hannels. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â CHANNEL SETUP âÂÂ. For the procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. A utomatic station presetting Select âÂÂA UT O TUNINGâ and press ENTER . The VCR/D VD will begin searching and storing all the broadcasting channels av ailable in y our area. While this is happening, âÂÂA UT O TUNINGâ will be sho wn on the screen. When automatic tuning process is completed, the screen will return to nor mal. NO TES: â¢Y our unit will tune the TV stations as follows . CH1 BBC1 CH2 BBC2 CH3 ITV CH4 Channel 4 CH5 Channel 5 CH6 Satellite CH7 etc. ⢠TV reception interf erence or power f ailure may result in Automatic station presetting malfunctions . In such a case repeat the setting procedure from the beginning. If the automatic tuning procedure has problems receiving some stations correctly , y ou can try to preset the station manually (see page 29). ⢠When the unit is in the auxiliary input mode, you cannot preset channels. TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER CHANNEL SETUP CH TUNING AU TO TUNING GUIDE CH SET PROCEED PROCEED PROCEED SETUP MENU ENTER RETURN SETUP BACK END SELECT ENTER To skip a channel position Unwanted channels can be skipped so that the y cannot be called up by pressing CH / â . Example: Skip the channel position 29. 1 Select âÂÂCH TUNINGâ and press ENTER . 2 Select âÂÂCHâ and press ENTER . Then select the skipping channel position number (29) and press ENTER . 3 Select âÂÂSKIPâ and press ENTER . 4 Select âÂÂONâ and press ENTER . Now this channel position is skipped. NOTE: To cancel skipping, select âÂÂOFFâ at step 4 above. CH 29 SKIP OFF CH 29 SKIP OFF 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 28
V arious settings 02 29 En Replace TV station positions Y ou can replace the channel positions as you lik e. Example: Replace the TV station No. 6 with position No . 2. 1 Select âÂÂCH TUNINGâ and press ENTER . 2 Select âÂÂCHâ and press ENTER . Then select the moving channel position number (6) and press ENTER . 3 Select âÂÂMO VEâ and press ENTER . 4 Select the channel position number (2) to which the selected position at step 2 abov e is to be mov ed and press ENTER . Now these channel positions were replaced with each other . CH 6 SKIP OFF MOVE 6 CH 6 SKIP OFF MOVE 6 Manual TV station presetting The Automatic station presetting function (See page 28) memorises the availab le broadcasts to suitab le CH positions. Some broadcasts may not be preset correctly b y the automatic tuning system - in this case you can tune stations manually as f ollows . Example: Presetting a station on program position 5. 1 Select âÂÂCH TUNINGâ and press ENTER . 2 Select âÂÂCHâ and press ENTER . Then select the channel position number (5) and press ENTER . 3 Select âÂÂTUNINGâ (tuning scale) and press ENTER . CH 5 SKIP OFF MOVE 5 TUNING 4 Press A (rising frequency) or B (falling frequency) once. The search star ts. It stops at each broadcast automatically . (â A â changes to â âÂÂ) Press B or A repeatedly until the desired station appears. If the broadcast is too weak (eg. with a dr ifting picture), the search will not stop . If you want to stop , press C /D or B /A . 5 If the tuned-up picture is not satisfactory , press C or D until the best picture is achiev ed. Then press ENTER. 6 Repeat the steps 2 and 5 to preset other TV stations. NO TE: Occasionally , the auto search might catch a w eak signal and stop . If the TV station signal is weak, you shouldn't store this station. In that case restar t the auto search using B or A . CH ENTER RETURN SETUP BACK END SEARCH F. TUNE 5 SKIP OFF MOVE 5 TUNING ENTER CH 5 SKIP OFF MOVE 5 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:21 29
30 En Disc playback 03 READING Pla ybac k pr ocedure Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) 1 Press OPEN/CLOSE . The disc tra y will open. 2 Place a disc onto the tra y . Hold the disc, position it with the printed label side up, align it with the guides, and place it in its proper position. 3 Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc tra y . âÂÂREADINGâ appears on the screen and some discs star t pla yback automatically . â¢A menu screen ma y appear on the TV screen, if the disc has a menu f eature. In this case, press , , , or ENTER to operate a menu f eature. 4 Press PLA Y to star t playback. 5 Press ST OP to end pla yback. ⢠The VCR/D VD memor ises the stopped point, depending on the disc. â â appears on the screen for appro x. 4 seconds. â â k eeps blinking in the display until the pla yback is stopped completely . Press PLA Y to resume playbac k (from the scene point). ⢠If you press ST OP again (â â appears on the screen), the VCR/D VD will clear the stopped point. 6 Then press OPEN/CLOSE . The disc tra y opens. Remov e the disc and press ST ANDBY/ON . The disc tra y closes automatically and VCR/D VD turns off. DVD-Video VR mode Video mode DVD-R CD NO TES: ⢠If a non-compatible disc is loaded, âÂÂINCORRECT DISCâÂÂ, âÂÂREGION CODE ERRORâ or âÂÂP ARENT AL ERRORâ will appear on the TV screen according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check y our disc again (see pages 9 and 21). ⢠Some discs may tak e a minute or so to star t playbac k. â¢A prohibition symbol â â m ay appear at the upper right of the screen. This symbol means either the f eature you tried is not av ailable on the disc, or the VCR/D VD can not access the feature at this time . This does not indicate a problem with the VCR/D VD . ⢠When you set a single-f aced disc label downwards (ie . the wrong wa y up) and press PLA Y or OPEN/ CLOSE , âÂÂREADINGâ will appear and then it will change to âÂÂNO DISCâÂÂ. ⢠Some pla yback operations of D VDs may be intentionally fix ed by software producers . Since this VCR/ D VD plays D VDs according to the disc contents the softw are producers designed, some playbac k f eatures may not be a vailable . Also refer to the operation manual supplied with the D VDs. ⢠When pla ying DTS-encoded Audio CDs , excessiv e noise will be heard from the analog stereo outputs. T o av oid possib le damage to the audio system, the consumer should take proper precautions when the analog stereo outputs of the VCR/D VD are connected to an amplification system. ⢠Most discs labelled âÂÂNon PC/MAC CD F or matâ will not pla yback on this VCR/D VD . ⢠About DualDisc playbac k. A DualDisc is a new tw o -sided disc, one side of which contains D VD content video , audio , etc. while the other side contains non-D VD content such as digital audio material. The non-D VD , audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD Audio specification and theref ore ma y not play . It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, the opposite side to that being pla yed will be scratched. Scratched discs ma y not be play ab le. The D VD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. D VD- A udio content will not pla y . For more detailed inf or mation on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manuf acturer or disc retailer . 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:21 30
31 En Disc playback 03 Pla ybac k b y selecting a title When playing bac k a recorded disc, you can displa y the title menu and select the title to be played bac k. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a recorded D VD . ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) 1 Press TITLE MENU . The title menu will appear . If there are many original titles and playlists ... Before pressing TITLE MENU , press D VD MENU until âÂÂVR ORGâ or âÂÂVR PL â will appear on the upper right of the TV screen, then press TITLE MENU . The first original title or playlist will be highlighted. 2 Press or to select the title you want to pla yback. 3 Press ENTER or PLA Y . The selected title is pla yed bac k. NO TES: ⢠If you donâÂÂt display the title men u and press PLA Y , the first title is play ed bac k. ⢠When a title is play ed by selecting it from the title men u, only the title selected is play ed. ⢠When a disc that has been recorded in the Video mode is finaliz ed, a title list is automatically created that can be pla yed bac k e ven with other D VD pla y ers. Consequently , the menu bef ore finalizing is different from that of after finalizing. ⢠The title menu is used not only for pla ying back titles but also f or editing various discs and titles. For details of editing oper ation, see page 63. ⢠If you create a pla ylist, an original title and playlist appear in the title men u. For creating a pla ylist, see page 64. ⢠In case the disc includes more than 10 titles, y ou can turn to the next or the previous page . Press , then press or to display ne xt/previous page. T o return to nor mal use, press . â¢Y ou cannot s witch to the VCR mode when the title men u is showing. Press TITLE MENU to clear the title menu, then press DVD/VCR to switch to the VCR mode. ⢠The recording information of discs that hav e been recorded on other recorders ma y not be display ed. NO TE: When a disc that has been recorded in the Video mode is finalised, a title list is automatically created that can be play ed bac k ev en with other D VD play ers. Consequently , the menu bef ore finalising is different from that of after finalising. â â â â 1/1 PREV NEXT 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP PL TITLE MENU Original titles Playlist Thumbnail image Recording information DISC NAME:â â â â 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP PL REC DA TE :23/11/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP TITLE MENU REC DA TE :29/11/2005 TIME :11:30 LENGTH :00:59:45 CHANNEL :09 REC MODE :SP DISC NAME:â â â â 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP PL VR mode Video mode DVD-R 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:21 31
32 En Disc playback 03 Chec king media inf ormation V arious information on the loaded disc can be display ed on the TV screen. NO TES: ⢠The displa yed inf ormation varies with the type of media. ⢠Some inf or mation may not appear due to media type or operating conditions. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load the disc. ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) 1 Press DISPLA Y . Media inf ormation will appear. 2 Press DISPLA Y while the media inf ormation above is displa yed. The ne xt media information will appear . *The remaining time displa yed during recording may be diff erent from the actual remaining time. When you want to check the remaining time, stop recording and display the media informa- tion again. 3 Press DISPLA Y again while the media information above is displa yed. The media inf ormation will disappear . TITLE 01/35 TIME 00:25:41 CHAPTER 08/38 SUBTITLE -- / -- ANGLE 01/01 REC MODE SP A UDIO 01/03ENG Dolby Digital CLOCK 10:27 CH 3 Playback condition (playback, stop, pause and record) The number of audio languages and present language Playback elapsed time Current subtitles language Recording mode The number of titles and present title number Present channel Present time The number of angles and present angle number The number of chapters and present chapter number VR mode DVD-Video Video mode DVD-R 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:21 32
33 En Disc playback 03 Special pla ybac k F ast f orward playbac k Press SEARCH dur ing nor mal pla yback. Each press of SEARCH will increase the speed of the search (x1.5), (x12), (x24), (x60). The speed of the search is increased up to only 2 steps (x6, x16) in CD . â¢T o resume nor mal playbac k, press PLA Y . Revie w playbac k Press SEARCH during nor mal playbac k. Each press of SEARCH will increase the speed of the search (x3), (x12), (x24), (x60). The speed of the search is increased up to only 2 steps (x6, x16) in CD . â¢T o resume nor mal playbac k, press PLA Y . Still playbac k Press PA USE/STILL dur ing normal playbac k. â¢T o resume nor mal playbac k, press PLA Y . Frame adv ance Press PA USE/STILL dur ing still playbac k. One frame is adv anced each time you press PA USE/STILL. â¢T o resume nor mal playbac k, press PLA Y . Slow motion pla yback Press SLO W during nor mal playbac k or still pla yback. Each press of SLO W will change the speed of the slow â 1/2âÂÂ, â 1/4âÂÂ, â 1/8âÂÂ. â¢T o resume nor mal playbac k, press PLA Y . â¢T o resume the still playback, press PA USE/STILL . Locating a chapter or trac k Press SKIP ( ) Forward or SKIP ( ) Rev erse dur ing playbac k to locate a chapter that you want to w atch. Each time you press the b utton, a chapter or track is skipped. NO TE: There may be a slight delay between pressing the b utton and the function activation. NO TES: ⢠The unit is capable of holding a still video image or On screen displa y image on your television screen indefinitely . If you lea v e the still video image or On screen displa y image display ed on your TV for an e xtended period of time, you risk permanent damage to your television screen. Projection tele visions are very susceptible . â¢F ast forw ard and revie w pla yback does not work with a MP3/WMA/JPEG-CD . â¢F r ame advance and slow motion does not w ork with a CD . VR mode DVD-Video Video mode DVD-R CD 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:21 33
34 En Disc playback 03 Commer cial skip / Locating a specific scene Commercial skip Use this function to skip commercials while y ou pla yback. Press CM SKIP during playbac k. The time jumps to a point approx. 30 seconds later and pla yback resumes. NO TE: With some D VD-Video , the Commercial skip operation ma y not work. Locating a specific scene Specify the time recorded on the disc, chapter or title to play- back. 1 Press PLA Y MODE . The pla y mode screen will appear . 2 Press or to select âÂÂTIME SEARCHâÂÂ, âÂÂCHAPTER SEARCHâ or âÂÂTITLE SEARCHâÂÂ, and press ENTER . TIME SEARCH: Input the time until the pla yback is restar ted. CHAPTER SEARCH: Select the chapter number to be play ed back. TITLE SEARCH: Select the title number to be pla yed bac k. The screen abov e shows the displa y when âÂÂCHAPTER SEARCHâ is selected. 3 When selecting âÂÂTIME SEARCHâÂÂ, input the time until the pla yback is restarted with the n umeric keys or / / / . When selecting âÂÂCHAPTER SEARCHâ or âÂÂTITLE SEARCHâÂÂ, press or to select the chapter number or title number . 4 Press ENTER. The pla yback starts at the point you selected. NO TE: F or âÂÂREPEA TâÂÂ, see âÂÂTitle, Chapter repeat playbac kâ (page 35). NO TE: Y ou cannot s witch to the VCR mode when the play mode screen is showing. Press PLA Y MODE to clear the play mode screen, then press D VD/VCR to s witch to the VCR mode. TIME SEARCH CHAPTER SEARCH TITLE SEARCH REPEAT TIME SEARCH CHAPTER SEARCH TITLE SEARCH REPEA T CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3 DVD-Video VR mode Video mode DVD-R 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:21 34
35 En Disc playback 03 Repeat pla ybac k 1 Press REPEA T A-B during playbac k. The star t point is selected. 2 Press REPEA T A-B again. The end point is selected. Pla yback starts at the point that y ou selected. Pla yback stops at the end point, returns to point A automatically , then starts again. To resume normal playbac k, press REPEA T A-B again. âÂÂOFFâ appears on the screen. Title, Chapter repeat playbac k 1 P ress REPEA T . The play mode screen will appear . 2 Press or to select âÂÂREPEA Tâ and press ENTER . 3 Press or to select âÂÂOFFâÂÂ, âÂÂCHAPTERâ or âÂÂTITLEâ from the list. OFF: Playbac k is not repeated. CHAPTER: The chapter in playback is repeatedly pla yed back. TITLE: The title in pla yback is repeatedly pla yed bac k. 4 Press ENTER. To cancel the repeat pla yback, select âÂÂOFFâ in step 3. One touch repeat This feature can be used to repeat the last 10 seconds of viewed material on a D VD disc - then normal playbac k will continue. Press ONE T OUCH REPEA T during playbac k. The playbac k returns to a point 10 seconds earlier, then resumes playing. NO TE: If ONE T OUCH REPEA T is pressed less than 10 seconds after the beginning of the current title, it will just go bac k to the star t of that title. A-B repeat playbac k A-B repeat playbac k allows y ou to repeat material between two selected points. TIME SEARCH CHAPTER SEARCH TITLE SEARCH REPEAT TIME SEARCH CHAPTER SEARCH TITLE SEARCH REPEA T OFF CHAPTER TITLE NO TES: ⢠Some discs may not work with the repeat operation. ⢠In A-B repeat mode, subtitles near point A or B may not appear . ⢠A-B repeat does not work dur ing the Title and the Chapter repeat playbac k. â¢Y ou ma y not be able to set A-B repeat, depending on the scenes of the D VD . ⢠A-B repeat and Title , Chapter repeat does not work with a MP3/ WMA/JPEG-CD . â¢Y ou cannot s witch to the VCR mode when the play mode screen is showing. Press REPEA T to clear the play mode screen, then press D VD/VCR to s witch to the VCR mode. ⢠One touch repeat and Title , Chapter repeat playbac k does not wo rk with a CD . VR mode DVD-Video Video mode DVD-R CD 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:21 35
36 En Disc playback 03 Title selection / D VD menu NO TE: Depending on the D VD , you ma y be unable to select the title , and a âÂÂtitle menuâ may simply be called a âÂÂmenuâ or âÂÂtitleâ in the instructions supplied with the disc. Title selection Tw o or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title. 1 Press TITLE MENU/T OP MENU during playbac k. The title menu appears on the screen. ⢠Press TITLE MENU/T OP MENU again to resume playbac k at the scene when you pressed TITLE MENU/T OP MENU . 2 Press / or / to select the desired title. 3 Press ENTER . The playbac k of the selected title will start. D VD menu Some D VDs allow y ou to select the disc contents using the menu. When y ou playbac k these D VDs, you can select the subtitles language and soundtrack langua ge, etc. using the DVD menu. 1 Press D VD MENU during playbac k. The D VD menu appears on the screen. ⢠Press D VD MENU again to resume pla yback at the scene when you pressed D VD MENU . 2 Press / or / to select the desired item. 3 Press ENTER. The menu continues to another screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the item completely . DVD-Video 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 36
37 En Disc playback 03 Changing angles / Zooming / Subtitles NO TES: ⢠Depending on the D VD , you ma y not be able to change the angles ev en if multi-angles are recorded on the disc. â¢Y ou can use the P ause, Slo w , Search or Skip f eature in the z oom mode . ⢠Changing soundtrack or subtitles language is cancelled when you open the disc tra y . The initial def ault language or av ailable language will be heard and seen if the disc is pla yed bac k again. ⢠Depending on the D VD you ma y be unable to turn on, tur n off , or change the subtitles, e v en if they are re- corded on the disc. While pla ying the D VD , the subtitles may change while opening or closing the disc tra y , or while changing the title. ⢠In some cases, the subtitles lan- guage is not changed to the se- lected one immediately . Changing angles When playing bac k a disc recorded with m ulti-angle facility , you can change the angle that you are vie wing the scene from. 1 Press ANGLE during playbac k. The current angle will appear . 2 Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle is selected. Zooming This unit will allow y ou to zoom in on the frame image. Y ou can then make selections by s witching the position of the frame. 1 Press ZOOM during playbac k. The center par t of the image will be zoomed in. Each press of ZOOM will change the ZOOM âÂÂx2â , âÂÂx3â and âÂÂx4âÂÂ. 2 Press / or / to view a diff erent par t of the frame. Y ou ma y mov e the frame from the center position to UP , DO WN, LEFT or RIGHT direction. 3 In the zoom mode press ZOOM repeatedly to return to a 1:1 view âÂÂx1âÂÂ. ANGLE 1/3 Subtitles T urning the subtitles On and Off When playing bac k a disc recorded with subtitles, you can turn the subtitles on or off. Press SUBTITLE during pla yback until âÂÂSUBTITLE OFFâ appears. Changing the subtitles language Y ou can select the langua ge when playing bac k a disc recorded with multilingual subtitles. Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during playbac k until your desired language appears. The on screen display will disappear af- ter a f ew seconds. VR mode DVD-Video Video mode DVD-R 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 37
38 En Disc playback 03 Changing soundtrac k language Y ou can select the language when you pla y a multilingual disc. 1 Press A UDIO dur ing playbac k. The current soundtrac k language will appear . 2 Press A UDIO repeatedly until the desired language is selected. The on-screen displa y will disappear after a fe w seconds. Karaoke playbac k Y ou can turn the v ocal on or off recorded on the D VD KARA OKE. During D VD KARAOKE disc pla yback, press A UDIO repeatedly until the desired setting is selected. Vo. ON : The primary vocal is output when it is recorded on the disc. Vo. OFF : The primary vocal is not output. NOTES : ⢠Some Karaoke discs may not have the vocal on/off function. ⢠The on screen display will disappear after a few seconds. AUDIO 1/2 V o. OFF Dolby Digital Changing soundtrac k language / Karaoke pla ybac k A UDIO 1/8 ENG Dolby Digital A UDIO 2/8 FRA Dolby Digital NO TES: ⢠If the desired language is not heard after pressing the button sev eral times, the language is not recorded on the disc. ⢠The vocal output f eature is used during playback of Dolb y Digital (multi-channel) recorded D VD KARAOKE discs . This f eature allows you to turn off v ocal audio trac ks, or restore them f or background accompaniment. ⢠When pla ying Karaok e, connect appropriate audio equipment such as an amplifier to this unit. DVD-Video 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 38
39 En Disc playback 03 V arious operations on CD Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load the music CD . ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode . (The D VD indicator will light.) Press TITLE MENU/T OP MENU . The TRACK INFO screen will appear . This section describes the TRA CK INFO screen where m usic CDs can be pla yed bac k using the various operations. Press . The menu list will appear . NO TES: ⢠In case the disc includes more than 10 trac ks, you can turn to the next or the pre vious page. Press , then press or to displa y next/pre vious page. T o return to nor mal use, press . â¢Y ou cannot s witch to the VCR mode when the TRACK INFO screen is showing. Press TITLE MENU/T OP MENU to clear the TRACK INFO screen, then press D VD/VCR to s witch to the VCR mode. Playing bac k a selected trac k 1 Press or to select the track number you w ant to pla yback and press . 2 Press or to select âÂÂP LA Yâ from the menu list and press ENTER . The selected trac k will be play ed back. Excluding specified trac k 1 During stop, press or to select the track number y ou do not want to pla yback and press . 2 Press or to select â HIDE/SHO Wâ from the menu list and press ENTER . The selected trac k will not be play ed back. (âÂÂHâ appears at the side of the track n umber .) When you w ant to cancel the exclusion, press or to select the track n umber with âÂÂHâ and press . Press or to select âÂÂHIDE/SHOWâ from the menu list and press ENTER , âÂÂHIDEâ will be cancelled. 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 39
40 En Disc playback 03 V arious operations on CD NOTES: ⢠When pla ying a CD-R/CD-RW recorded in the MP3 or WMA fo r mat, âÂÂRANDOM PLA Yâ and âÂÂTIME SEARCHâ will not appear in the menu list. ⢠See also A-B Repeat on page 35. Random playbac k 1 Press or to select âÂÂRANDOM PLA Yâ from the menu list and press ENTER . The order of music trac ks is randomly changed. 2 Press PLA Y . Music is play ed back in random order . To cancel random pla yback, select âÂÂRANDOM PLA Yâ from the menu list again, and press ENTER . Repeat playbac k of selected track 1 Press or to select the track number y ou want to repeat pla yback and press . 2 Press or to select âÂÂREPEA T TRA CKâ from the menu list and press ENTER . 3 Press PLA Y . The selected trac k will be play ed bac k repeatedly . To cancel repeat trac k pla yback, select âÂÂREPEA T TRACKâ from the menu list again, and press ENTER . Repeat playbac k of all tracks 1 Press or to select âÂÂREPEA T ALL â from the menu list and press ENTER. 2 Press PLA Y . All tracks on CD will be pla yed back repeatedly . To cancel the repeat all pla yback, select âÂÂREPEA T ALL â from the menu list again, and press ENTER . Playing bac k programs Y ou can specify the pla yback order y ourself . 1 Press or to select âÂÂPROGRAM PLA YBACKâ from the menu list and press ENTER . 2 Press or to select to the track number that y ou want to change the order of and press ENTER . The â â mark will appear at the r ight side of the trac k number . 3 Press or to select to the track number that y ou want to specify and press ENTER . The trac k number that you select in step 2 mo ve to the bef ore position that you specified tr ack. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the pla yback order . 5 Press PLA Y . The trac ks will be play ed back in the changed order . To cancel progr am playbac k, select âÂÂEXIT PROGRAM MODEâ from the menu list and press ENTER . Playing bac k trac k by specifying the time 1 Press or to select âÂÂTIME SEARCHâ from the menu list during playbac k and press ENTER . 2 Press / or / to specify the elapsed time of the track (this will be the star ting point of playbac k) and press ENTER . Pla yback will start from the specified elapsed time. CD 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 40
41 En Disc playback 03 MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX î pla ybac k MP3/WMA files can be played back. Also, y ou can displa y JPEG/DivX î files on the TV screen. Some discs may not pla y due to the condition of the recording. Limitations on MP3/WMA/ JPEG/DivX î file playbac k: ⢠MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX î file is a disc that is standardised by ISO9660. ⢠The director y and file names of the MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX î file must correspond to the ISO standardised file names. ⢠This unit can read 200 files per director y . If one directory has more than 200 files, it reads up to 200 files, the remaining files will be omitted. ⢠The unit is able to recognise up to a maximum of 50 directories per disc. ⢠MP3/WMA files cannot be used for playbac k f or the purpose of duplicating. ⢠MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX î files may be used f or playbac k, but not f or recording. ⢠If the CD has both audio tracks and MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX î files, only audio trac ks are play ed. ⢠It may take more than one min ute f or this unit to read MP3/WMA/ JPEG/DivX î files depending on its structure. ⢠Music recorded by âÂÂJoliet Record- ing Specificationâ can be play ed back. Long file names will be cut. ⢠The music files recorded by âÂÂHierarchical File System â (HFS) cannot be play ed. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load the disc storing MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX î . ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) Using the BRO WSER screen 1 Press TITLE MENU . The BRO WSER screen will appear. 2 The MP3, WMA JPEG and DivX î files and folders stored in the disc are displa yed on the BR OWSER screen. ⢠Select a f older and press ENTER . The files in the folder appear . When the file to be display ed is selected Y ou can select the file types to be displa yed on the BR O WSER screen. 1 Press and then press or to select âÂÂSELECT FILESâ and press ENTER . The follo wing list will appear . MUSIC ONL Y : Only the MP3/WMA files appear. PICTURES ONL Y : Only the JPEG files appear . MO VIE ONL Y : Only the DivX î files appear . ALL: All files and folders appear . 2 Select one item in the abov e list and press ENTER . The display will be changed to the selected displa y type. popArt Grammy03_01.mp3 Grammy03_02.mp3 Grammy03_03.mp3 Grammy03_04.mp3 Grammy03_05.mp3 Gramm y 03_06.m p 3 T oulouse-Lautrec PLA Y SELECT FILES BRO WSER MUSIC ONL Y MUSIC ONL Y PICTURES ONL Y MOVIE ONL Y ALL CD 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 41
42 En Disc playback 03 Playing bac k MP3/WMA files 1 Press or to select MP3/WMA file. ⢠In case the disc includes more than 10 files, y ou can turn to the next or the pre vious page. (See page 39.) BRO WSER PLA Y RETURN TITLE MENU BACK END SELECT SET w01.wma w02.wma w03.wma w04.mp3 w05.wma w06.wma w07.mp3 w08.wma w09.wma w10.mp3 ENTER w02.wma w03.wma w04.mp3 w05.wma w06.wma w07.mp3 w08.wma w09.wma w10.mp3 w01.wma w01.wma 00:00:19 MODE: NORMAL REPEA T: OFF TRACK INFO RETURN PLA Y BA CK END SELECT SET TITLE MENU ENTER MP3 file specifications ⢠MP3 files must ha ve the e xtension letters âÂÂ.mp3âÂÂ. ⢠Standard, sampling frequency , and the bit rate: MPEG-1 A udio 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz 32kbps to 320kbps (constant bit r ate or v ariable bit rate) ⢠The recommend recording setting for a high quality sound is 44.1kHz of sampling frequency and 128kbps of constant bit rate. WMA file specifications ⢠When creating a WMA disc, make sure that the cop yr ight function is off . DRM (Digital Rights Management) files cannot be pla yed bac k. ⢠WMA files must hav e the e xtension letters âÂÂ.wmaâÂÂ. ⢠Standard, sampling frequency , and the bit rate: WMA version 7 and 8 32kHz, 48kbps 44.1kHz, 48kbps to 192kbps 48kHz, 128kbps to 192kbps ⢠Music files recorded as mono , 48kHz, 48kbps cannot be pla yed back b y this unit. CD 3 To return to the BRO WSER screen, press RETURN . â¢T o stop playback of the MP3/WMA files , press TITLE MENU . 2 Carry out either of the item a or b belo w . a : Press ENTER . b : Press and then press or to select âÂÂPLA Yâ and press ENTER. The TRACK INFO screen appears to pla yback the selected file . F or the details of the TRA CK INFO screen, see âÂÂV arious operations on CDâ on page 39. 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 42
43 En Disc playback 03 Playing bac k JPEG files 1 Press or to select JPEG file. ⢠In case the disc includes more than 10 files, y ou can turn to the next or the pre vious page. (See page 39.) 2 Select either a or b as below: a : Press ENTER . b : Press and then press or to select âÂÂPLA Yâ and press ENTER . The thumbnail images of the JPEG files stored in the route director y or the f older appear . Press , , or to select the pages of the thumbnail images, or select the JPEG file to be displa yed at first for the slide show . 3 Press ENTER to play the selected picture. If you ha ve set the interval time for JPEG slide show , the pictures will be play ed back one after another automatically . (See page 27.) ⢠Press ZOOM to enlarge the displa yed image . ⢠Press ANGLE to rotate the image b y 90 degrees each time. â¢T o display the next or the pre vious picture, press SKIP 7 or 6 . JPEG file specification JPEG files must hav e the extension letters âÂÂ.jpeâÂÂ, âÂÂ.jpegâ or âÂÂ.jpgâÂÂ. 4 To return to the thumbnail screen, press RETURN . â¢T o stop the slide show , press TITLE MENU . Base_ball.jpg Friend.jpg Drive.jpg party_240803.jpg practice_ski.jpg My_car.jpg ENTER RETURN PLA Y BACK END SELECT SELECT TITLE MENU CD 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 43
44 En Disc playback 03 1 Press or to select DivX î file. ⢠In case the disc includes more than 10 files, y ou can turn to the next or the pre vious page. (See page 39.) 2 Select either a or b as below: a : Press ENTER . b : Press and then press or to select âÂÂPLA Yâ and press ENTER . The selected title is play ed back. â¢Y ou can use F ast f orward, Re view , Still, Fr ame advance and Slo w motion playbac k (See page 33). DivX î video file specifications ⢠Official DivX î Cer tified product. ⢠Pla ys DivX î 5, DivX î 4, DivX î 3 and DivX î V OD video content (in com- pliance with DivX î Cer tified techni- cal requirements). ⢠DivX î file must hav e the extension letters âÂÂ.aviâ âÂÂ.divâ or âÂÂ.divxâÂÂ. Note that all files with the .avi e xtension are recogniz ed as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX î video files and theref ore may not be pla yable on this unit. ⢠Standard, sampling frequency , and the bit rate: DivX î file A udio f or mat: MPEG1 La yer2 (MP2), MPEG1 La yer3(MP3) Bit rate 8kbps - 320kbps Sampling frequencies 8kHz - 48kHz Resolution: Max 720 x 576 (at 25fps) Max 720 x 480 (at 30fps) If the incorrect DRM file is loaded, âÂÂAuthorization Error This player is not authorized to play this video . â will appear on the screen. When you attempt to pla y DivX î VO D, the number of pla ys is lim- ited and the f ollowing message will appear on the screen. If you wish to pla y it, select âÂÂYESâÂÂ. ⢠If the number of plays goes ov er the limit, then âÂÂRental Expiredâ will be display ed, in which case the file will not be played. Playing bac k DivX î video files NO TES: â¢F or e xter nal subtitle files the following subtitle f or mat filename e xtensions are not supported: .sr t, .sub , .ssa, .smi â¢Y ou cannot change the subtitles. ⢠Skip , F rame Advance, Progr am Pla yback, Random Pla yback, Title/All Repeat, Title Search and Zooming cannot be used with DivX î files. ⢠It depends on the recording situation of the DivX î file, the start- up playback position could alter from the time you initially set up to do a âÂÂTime SearchâÂÂ. 2H30301B_En_44_45 8/4/05, 19:23 44
45 En Disc playback 03 Pr ogressive scan The unit supports the progressive scanning system as well as the con- ventional interlaced scanning sys- tem. If your TV is equipped with com- ponent video input jacks which sup- port the progressive video input, y ou can enjoy high quality picture b y making the progressive scanning mode active. Preparation: ⢠Change the D VD OUTPUT setting to COMPONENT and then con- nect the unit to a TV that is equipped with component jacks and suppor ts progressive video input. (See page 25.) ⢠Tu rn ON the TV and set it to the corresponding video input mode. ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) 1 Press PR OGRESSIVE in the stop mode. The PROGRESSIVE in- dicator â â on the display window will light. ⢠The unit recognizes the picture source (film or video) of the cur- rent disc according to the disc inf or mation. 2 Press PLA Y to star t playback. ⢠To mak e the progressiv e scanning mode inactive , press PRO- GRESSIVE in the stop mode. The PROGRESSIVE indicator â â on the displa y window will go off . Wa r n ing: Once âÂÂProgressiveâ is selected when connecting to a TV progres- sive scan incompatib le, no image will be seen on the video dis- play . In this case, y ou must reset the unit b y pressing ST OP on the front panel f or five seconds . The video output will be restored to âÂÂInter- laceâ setting, and a picture will once again be seen on a conv en- tional analog display . Different scanning modes Interlaced scan T echnology that alter nately displays odd-n umbered scanning lines and e ven-n umbered scanning lines. Also called âÂÂ576iâÂÂ, âÂÂiâ meaning âÂÂinterlaceâÂÂ. Progressive scan T echnology that simultaneously displays odd-n umbered scanning lines and ev en-numbered scanning lines from top to bottom. Also called âÂÂ576pâÂÂ, âÂÂpâ meaning âÂÂprogressiv eâÂÂ. NO TES: ⢠Some discs ma y not be play ed bac k with the progressive scan mode correctly because of the disc char acteris- tics or recording condition. ⢠There are some progressiv e TV and High-Definition TV sets that are not fully compatible with the unit, resulting in an unnatural picture when pla ying back a D VD disc in the progressiv e scan mode. In such a case, use the interlaced scanning mode. â¢Y ou cannot activate the prog ressive scan mode in the f ollowing cases: - The unit is in the VCR mode. -A D VD disc is currently pla ying. Y ou must stop pla yback first. P DVD-Video VR mode Video mode DVD-R 2H30301B_En_44_45 8/4/05, 19:23 45
46 En T ape playback 04 T ape speed and maxim um recording time Loading and unloading a cassette tape Use only video cassette tapes marked . Erase prevention tab Erase prevention tab Screwdriver Loading Push the center of the tape until it is automatically inser ted. Inser t the cassette tape with its labeled side facing up and the erase pre vention tab positioned at y our left. An inv er ted cassette tape cannot be inser ted. A utomatic po wer ON When you insert a cassette tape the VCR power will turn ON automatically . A utomatic pla yback When loading a cassette tape without an erase pre vention tab , playbac k will star t automatically . Unloading Y ou can eject the video tape while the unit is turned off. 1 Press (EJECT) on the unit or the remote control. 2 Remov e the cassette tape. A utomatic tape eject This VCR will automatically rewind the tape when the tape has ended. And when the tape is re wound to its beginning, the cassette tape will be ejected automatically . To prevent accidental erasure Remov e the erase pre v ention tab with a screwdriver . Adhesive T ape To record again Cover the hole with a piece of adhesive tape. Video cassette tape E-30 30 min. 1 hour E-60 1 hour 2 hours Standard Play (SP) Long Play (LP) E-90 1 1/2 hou. 3 hours E-240 4 hours 8 hours E-180 3 hours 6 hours Tape speed We recommend using E-180 video tapes or shor ter. VCR ⢠HQ VHS is compatib le with existing VHS equipment. 2H30301B_En_46_49 8/4/05, 19:23 46
47 En T ape playback 04 Cassette tape playback NO TES: ⢠This VCR selects the playback tape speed SP or LP automati- cally . â¢A cassette tape and D VD disc can be pla yed bac k simulta- neously . If y ou press D VD/VCR , the tape pla yback and D VD playbac k alter nate with each other on the screen. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the VCR mode. (The VCR indicator will light.) 1 Load a prerecorded tape (When loading a cassette tape without the erase pre v ention tab , pla yback will start automatically). 2 To start playbac k Press PLA Y . Pla yback will start. If the cassette has not loaded yet, will blink for approx. 4 seconds. To stop playbac k Press ST OP once. The tape will stop but remain fully loaded and ready to pla y . To rewind the tape or forward it rapidly Press ST OP . To rewind the tape: Press REW . To stop the tape winding, press ST OP . To s witch to playback directly (without ST OP ), press PLA Y . Forward/Re verse picture sear ch mode When the tape is being wound, you can s witch to picture search mode (see next page). T o do this, press REW or F .FWD and hold it down. The unit will resume the tape winding as soon as the button is released. To forwar d the tape: Press F .FWD . NTSC video cassette playback When using a pre-recorded NTSC video cassette tape, the connected TV set must be compatible with a 60Hz vertical frequency (sometimes known as a PAL 60Hz feature). Otherwise the on-screen picture will be affected by vertical rolling. Even if your VCR set is capable of processing NTSC video signals, the picture may be shortened vertically (appearance of black bars at the top and at the bottom of the TV screen). The dubbing of a NTSC video cassette tape to a standard PAL VCR is not possible. VCR 2H30301B_En_46_49 8/4/05, 19:23 47
48 En T ape playback 04 Special playback NO TES: ⢠The audio output is muted during SPEED SEARCH, STILL, FRAME AD V ANCE and SLOW MO TION. ⢠Dur ing picture search mode there will be noise bars which are caused by the system. ⢠The Special Playback will automatically change to playbac k after appro x. 5 minutes to protect the video tape against excessiv e wear . Repeat playbac k The entire video tape will be play ed until its end. The tape will then automatically rewind to the beginning and the playbac k will be repeated. 1 Press REPEA T . 2 By pressing REPEA T each time, âÂÂREPEA T ONâ or âÂÂREPEA T OFFâ is selected in turn. 3 When âÂÂREPEA T ONâ is selected, the tape is play ed bac k to the end, and then, it is automati- cally rewound to the starting point and play ed back again. To cancel repeat pla yback: Press REPEA T to select âÂÂREPEA T OFFâÂÂ. Commercial skip Press CM SKIP during playbac k. The video is rapidly f orwarded f or appro x. 30 seconds and playbac k resumes. Y ou ma y press the button up to six times in a ro w to mov e 180 seconds ahead. To display VCR operation status Press DISPLA Y . The clock, da y of the week and more information will be indicated. While watching TV While operating a tape To cancel the display : Press DISPLA Y again. REPEAT ON CH 29 8 : 47 MON 00 : 00 : 00 SP NICAM ST DAY OF THE WEEK CHANNEL TAPE SPEED REAL TIME COUNTER CLOCK STEREO (displayed only for approx. 4 seconds) 8 : 30 MON 00 : 15 : 12 SP L CH HI-FI OPERATING MODE TAPE IN AUTO REPEAT HI-FI STEREO Slow trac king and vertical lock adjustment If noise bars appear in the picture during slow motion, press the TRK (TRA CKING) or â to reduce the noise bars. If the still picture jitters e xcessively , press TRK (TRA CKING) or â to stabilise the still picture. Frame by Frame picture Press PA USE/STILL dur ing pla yback. Press SLO W one by one: The picture advances frame b y frame. To return to playbac k: Press PLA Y or PA USE/STILL . Adjusting tracking condition Automatic tracking adjustment Whenev er you inser t a tape and star t playbac k, automatic tracking starts working and continuously analyses the signal to enable optimum picture quality during playbac k. Manual tracking adjustment If automatic tracking cannot eliminate noises w ell during playbac k, press TRK (TRA CKING) / or TRK (TRA CKING) â / to eliminate the noises. âÂÂMANU AL TR. â will appear . Press it briefly for a fine adjustment, or press and hold f or more sev ere adjustments. To return to automatic tracking, press AT R . âÂÂA UT O TR. â will appear . Slow motion During playback press SLOW . You can change the slow speed by the additional pressing of SLOW . To return to playback: Press PLAY . Picture search Reverse picture search function Press REW x 1 or x 2 during the playbac k. Forward picture search function Press F.FWD x 1 or x 2 during the playback. To return to playback: Press PLAY . Still picture Press PAUSE/STILL during playback. To resume normal playback: Press PLAY . Indication for the selected playback sound (e.g.: L CH = VCR Left Channel) (displayed only for approx. 4 seconds.) 2H30301B_En_46_49 8/4/05, 19:23 48
49 En T ape playback 04 ZER O RETURN function / Video inde x sear ch system ZERO RETURN function This function makes tape rewinding (or f orwarding) stop at the counter âÂÂ00:00:00â position automatically . CH 1 INDEX or is displayed 3 INDEX NO. (up to 9) 1 Press DISPLA Y . The counter display sho ws the tape r unning time during playback or recording. 2 Press COUNTER RESET at the desired tape position. The counter display will be reset to the âÂÂ00:00:00â position (e.g. the beginning of recording). 3 Press ST OP when playbac k or recording is finished. Press ZERO RETURN . The tape will be rew ound or fast f orwarded and automatically stop at the âÂÂ00:00:00â position. Switching the displa y between cloc k and counter Press CLOCK/COUNTER . The clock and tape counter alternate with each other in the display . Video index sear ch system This function enables y ou to locate the beginning of any recording made on the VCR. Recording an INDEX MARK The Index search function automatically records an INDEX mark on the tape whenev er a recording is initiated. Index sear ch Press INDEX or during stop or play mode. F or Succeeding prog rams: Press INDEX F or Preceding prog rams: Press INDEX . (Additional press increases the INDEX NO . up to 9.) When the INDEX or is pressed, the unit star ts searching the INDEX NO . selected and finds the por tion, then playbac k star ts automatically . To stop the Inde x Search, press ST OP . . VCR NO TES for Counter Displa y: ⢠If you re wind the tape bey ond âÂÂ00:00:00âÂÂ, a minus sign (âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂ) will be display ed in front of the time. ⢠When you load a tape , the counter will reset to âÂÂ00:00:00âÂÂ. ⢠The counter does not function on nonrecorded (blank) sections of the tape. When you re wind, f ast f orward or pla y tapes through b lank sections , the counter stops. NO TES for Video index search system: ⢠When you record an INDEX mark at the very beginning of the tape, the mark ma y not be found. ⢠During INDEX search, the tape may stop and begin to pla y at a slightly different location. ⢠INDEX may not function properly with old or worn out video tapes. ⢠INDEX marks may not be f ound if it is extremely close to the point where the search began. ⢠In recording, if you stop record- ing temporarily , the INDEX mark is not recorded on the tape. 2H30301B_En_46_49 8/4/05, 19:23 49
50 En Recording 05 Read this before recording on disc T ypes of disc Y ou can use D VD-RW and D VD-R discs to record video . D VD-R W discs â¢V er 1.1/1.2 discs can be f ormatted for recording in either of the two modes: the VR mode or the Video mode. V er .1.0 discs can only be fo r matted for recording in the VR mode. ⢠High quality images and sound can be repeatedly recorded about 1,000 times. â¢A disc f ormatted in the VR mode can ha ve as man y as 99 original titles and pla ylist titles each. Discs formatted in the Video mode can hav e up to 99 original titles. D VD-R discs ⢠Discs can only be recorded in the Video mode. ⢠Discs can be recorded only once. ⢠Up to 99 titles can be created. For more information on recor ding format, see âÂÂRecording f ormatâ (pa ge 10). Notes on recording in the Video mode ⢠The Video mode cannot be selected for V er. 1.0 D VD-R W discs. ⢠The remaining av ailable area on the disc decreases as recording progresses. Additional contents can be recorded in the remaining time area, but it cannot be o verwritten into the recorded area. â¢T o format a new D VD-RW in the Video mode, set the automatic fo r mat feature to the Video mode. (See page 23.) Recording modes There are 4 modes for recording on disc. Recording time and quality va ry according to mode. ⢠Recording time abov e is based on a 4.7GB disc. Since D VD recording is performed using VBR (V ariable Bit Rate), recording time varies according to the recorded content. To know the correct recording time , stop recording and check the media information. (See page 32.) This section explains things y ou m ust know to record onto a disc. Read it before attempting to record. NO TES: Recording time can change for the f ollo wing reasons. ⢠When image quality is poor as during poor TV reception. ⢠When recording on a disc that has been edited before . ⢠When the video is follo wed with recordings of still images or just audio . NO TE: Should a power f ailure occur or should the A C cord plug be disconnected while recording, editing, initializing, finalising or any other function, the program being recorded will be lost or the disc may not be pla yable . Manufacturer can not guarantee against loss of program or disc should this occur . Recording mode XP SP LP EP Recording time Approx. 60 min Approx. 120 min Approx. 240 min Approx. 360 min Quality Can record high quality images. Can record normal quality images. Quality deteriorates slightly , but recording time is longer . Recording time is prioritised over quality . 2H30301B_En_50_53 8/4/05, 19:23 50
51 En Recording 05 NO TES: ⢠Because of characteristics peculiar to digital video compres- sion technology , scenes with f ast motion may appear as a matrix of larger bloc ks. ⢠During recording, if the picture noise continues f or 1 minute, the recording will stop automatically . Disc remaining time VR mode ⢠Recording is possible as long as there is a vailab le space on the disc. (Finalised discs can be recorded by cancelling the finalisation, see âÂÂUNDO FINALISEâ on page 23.) â¢E r asing unnecessary title frees up availab le space on the disc. (Titles can be erased from finalised discs b y first undoing the finalisation. See âÂÂUNDO FINALISEâ on page 23.) Video mode ⢠Up until the disc is finalised, recording is possible as long as there is av ailable space on the disc. (Once the disc has been finalised, additional recording and erasing are not possible .) ⢠The remaining time cannot be increased, nor can recorded title be ov erwritten. ⢠Titles cannot be erased nor can recorded titles be ov erwritten. Images that cannot be recor ded Some D VD-Video and broadcasts contain copy-restriction signals to protect copyrights . There are 3 types of cop y-restr iction signals: âÂÂCopy F reeâÂÂ, âÂÂCop y Nev erâ and âÂÂCop y OnceâÂÂ. âÂÂCopy Freeâ (unrestricted recording) Land-based TV broadcasts and images y ou record yourself with a video camera allow unrestricted recording. There are no restrictions on recording. âÂÂCopy Ne verâ (recor ding prohibited) ⢠Images that contain the recording prohibited signal cannot be recorded. ⢠If the recording prohibited signal appears halfwa y through an image you are recording, recording is paused at that instant. When the recording prohibited signal ends, recording resumes. ⢠This unit incor porates a b uilt-in cop y guard. It cannot record software or broadcasted progr ams that contain copy restriction signals designed to protect copyright, etc. âÂÂCopy Onceâ (one-time recordable) Programs (images) that contain the one-time recordab le signal can be recorded only in the VR mode using a D VD-R W disc that sup- por ts CPRM V er . 1.1 and V er . 1.2. 2H30301B_En_50_53 8/4/05, 19:23 51
52 En Recording 05 Recording a TV program Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a recordable D VD or video tape into the unit. ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the appropriate mode. 1 Press REC MODE/SPEED to select the recording mode. The recording mode will appear on the TV monitor and change ev er y time REC MODE/SPEED is pressed. VCR recording modes: SP/LP D VD recording modes: XP/SP/LP/EP SP is the normal recording mode for video tapes. LP off ers 2 times the recording time as SP . For more inf orma- tion on D VD recording modes, see page 50. 2 Press the n umeric keys or CH / â to select the channel to be recorded. 1~9 : e.g. 5 = press â 5â 10~80 : e.g. 29 = press â 2â and â 9â within 2 seconds. 3 Press REC . â â appears on the screen f or about 4 seconds and recording will star t. NO TES: ⢠When recording onto a D VD , it takes some time from when y ou press REC until recording actually star ts. Press REC a little bef ore your pref erred star ting point. With a video tape, recording star ts almost at the same time y ou press REC . ⢠If the erase pre vention tab of video tapes is remov ed, the tape will eject when REC is pressed f or recording. Y ou can record pr ograms y ou watch on TV onto video tapes or D VDs. CH 29 CH 29 VCR mode DVD mode INDEX DVD-Video VR mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_50_53 8/4/05, 19:23 52
53 En Recording 05 To stop recording Press ST OP to stop recording. NO TE: When recording onto a D VD , ev en if ST OP is pressed during recording, recording does not stop instantly due to the concluding process of recording. Recording may continue f or as long as 1 minute maximam. While this pro- cess, âÂÂPR OCESSING PLEASE W AITâ will appear on the screen. To stop recording temporarily Press PA USE/STILL to av oid recording unwanted material. â 4 â will appear on screen for about 4 seconds. Press again to resume recording. NO TES: ⢠In the recording onto a video tape, the pause function will be released after 5 minutes to pre vent damage the video tape . The unit will change to the ST OP mode. ⢠When recording onto a video tape, y ou can change a recording channel in the recording pause mode. (Y ou cannot change a recording channel in the D VD recording pause mode.) ⢠Chapter marks are made when recording to a D VD in the VR Mode. A uto Re wind feature This VCR will automatically rewind the tape when the tape has ended (except during OTR and TIMER REC). It will also eject the tape. NO TES: ⢠If the disc space become full, the recording is stopped and âÂÂRECORDING INTERR UPTEDâ will appear on the screen. ⢠In the e vent of a po wer f ailure during D VD recording including O TR and TIMER REC, the program can not be recorded on the disc. When the power resumes , after theVCR/D VD is turned on, the set checks the disc to repair the error which is caused by a po wer f ailure. This checking process ma y require about 1 minute 30 seconds according to disc condition. In this process âÂÂSYSTEM ERROR PLEASE W AIT DISC CHECKINGâ will appear on the screen. DVD-Video VR mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_50_53 8/4/05, 19:23 53
54 En Recor ding 05 One-touch Timer Recor ding (O TR) The One-touch Timer Recording f eature pro vides a simple and con venient way to make a timed recording. CH 29 INDEX CH 29 OTR 0 : 30 OTR 0 : 30 VCR mode DVD mode Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a recordable D VD or video tape into the unit. ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the appropriate mode. Example: One-touch Timer Recording for 30 minutes . 1 Press REC MODE/SPEED to select the recording mode. F or the recording mode, see the step 1 on page 52. 2 Press numeric keys or CH / â to select the channel to be recorded. 3 Press REC . Each additional press of REC will increase recording time as shown in the chart below , up to a maximum of 6 hours. The O TR and recording time will appear on the screen f or about 4 seconds. To cancel O TR Press ST OP or turn off the power . NO TE: If you wish to w atch the D VD playbac k dur ing the VCR O TR, press D VD/VCR to change to D VD mode and perform the D VD playbac k. Y ou can also pla yback the VCR dur ing D VD OTR. Press once twice 3 times 4 times 5 times 6 times NORMAL REC O TR - : - - O TR 0:30 O TR 1:00 O TR 1:30 OTR 2:00 OTR 3:00 OTR 4:00 OTR 5:00 OTR 6:00 NORMAL REC Recording time Press 7 times 8 times 9 times 10 times 11 times Recording time DVD-Video VR mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 54
55 En Recording 05 VIDEO Plus î pr ogramming system VIDEO Plus system is a timer programming system which simplifies timer recording programming. Instead of entering the date, c hannel and recording time, y ou simply enter a PlusCode TM programming n umber that you can find in y our TV listings. NO TE: There are two wa ys to enter a GUIDE CH NO . : â¢T o select numbers you can either use the numeric keys and then ENTER , or you can press ENTER first then use the / buttons to select a number , f ollowed b y ENTER . ⢠When using the n umeric keys, enter using two digits. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a recordable D VD or video tape into the unit. ⢠Press DVD/VCR to select the appropriate mode. Checking the c hannel setup to use the VIDEO Plus system Before y ou can use the VIDEO Plus system y ou need to set up the channel mapping. This ensures that the VIDEO Plus system uses the correct channels for recording b y matching up the preset channels in the recorder with âÂÂguide channelsâÂÂ. Y ou can find these guide channel numbers in your local TV guide or newspaper TV listings. 1 Press SETUP and press or to select âÂÂCHANNEL SETUPâ and press ENTER . The Channel Setup menu will appear . TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER CHANNEL SETUP CH TUNING AU TO TUNING GUIDE CH SET PROCEED PROCEED PROCEED SETUP MENU TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU ENTER RETURN ENTER BACK END SELECT SETUP INPUT NO. 0 - 9 CHANNEL SETUP CH TUNING AU TO TUNING GUIDE CH SET PROCEED PROCEED PROCEED GUIDE CH NO. TUNER CH NO. OK -- 01 TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU CHANNEL SETUP CH TUNING AU TO TUNING GUIDE CH SET PROCEED PROCEED PROCEED TV /CA TV SELEC AU TO CH MEMORY ADD/DELETE GUIDE CH SET GUIDE CH NO. TUNER CH NO. OK -- 01 2 Press or to select âÂÂGUIDE CH SETâ and press ENTER . A window appears to set a guide channel number and the corresponding tuner channel number . 3 Enter a GUIDE CH NO . (guide channel number). DVD-Video VR mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 55
56 En Recor ding 05 4 Press to highlight TUNER CH NO ., then enter the corre- sponding tuner channel number . ⢠Select a tuner channel number in the same wa y as you selected the guide channel number . â¢Y ou can also select one of the external inputs (A V1, A V2 or A V3) instead of a channel number if some channels are received via an e xter nal receiver . 5 Repeat steps 3 â 4 to input the rest of the channel list. 6 Press to highlight OK and press ENTER. 7 When youâ re done, press SETUP to e xit. Setting the timer program using the VIDEO Plus system The VIDEO Plus system simplifies timer recording so that you just enter a PlusCode number (which y ou can find in your TV listings guide) f or the program y ou want to record, tell the recorder whether y ou want to record it just once or regularly , and then select the D VD or the VCR for recording. Note that f or the VIDEO Plus system to work correctly , the clock must be set to the right time and the guide channels must be setup . (See âÂÂChec king the channel setup to use the VIDEO Plus systemâ on page 55.) 1 Press VIDEO Plus . If a PROGRAM FULL message appears then y ouâÂÂll need to delete one of the existing timer prog rams bef ore continuing. Select a timer program from the list and press CANCEL . 2 Use the n umeric keys to enter the PlusCode number . TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU ENTER RETURN ENTER CANCEL DELETE BACK END SELECT SETUP INPUT NO. 0 - 9 CHANNEL SETUP CH TUNING AU TO TUNING GUIDE CH SET PROCEED PROCEED PROCEED TV/CA TV SELECT AU TO CH MEMORY ADD/DELETE GUIDE CH SET GUIDE CH NO. TUNER CH NO. OK 01 -- RETURN CANCEL VIDEO Plus DELETE BACK END SELECT INPUT NO. 0 - 9 VIDEO Plus PlusCode# TYPE OK ONCE 1 - - - - - - - - 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 56
57 En Recording 05 VIDEO Plus PlusCode# TYPE OK ONCE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ENTER RETURN BAC K SELECT ENTER VIDEO Plus PlusCode# TYPE OK ONCE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 VIDEO Plus END OK ONCE DAIL Y WEEKL Y 3 Press to select âÂÂTYPEâÂÂ. Here you can set whether y ou want to record the progr am ONCE, D AIL Y or WEEKL Y . If you want to change it, press ENTER then use the / buttons to select, then press ENTER again. 4 Press to highlight OK, then press ENTER. NO TES: ⢠If youâÂÂve entered a v alid PlusCode number , a summar y of the timer recording appears. Y ou can edit any of this inf ormation as necessar y . Use the / buttons to select the item y ou w ant to edit, press ENTER , then use the / or / buttons as appropriate to select, then press ENTER again. ⢠VPS/PDC is a ser vice provided by the public TV station. When y ou se- lect a VPS/PDC-compatible TV sta- tion and activate the VPS/PDC function, the beginning and the end of the timer recording will be con- trolled by the TV station. Any pro- gr am air time delays will be tak en care of . T o make cer tain this works correctly alwa ys enter the e xact star ting time as published in the news paper or TV listing magazine. ⢠When you use the VPS/PDC func- tion, the recording star t time may be dela yed b y around 1 minute. ⢠If you use the VPS/PDC function and timer recording to record con- secutiv e programs on the same channel, the 2 programs are re- corded as a single title on a D VD . When the programs are recorded using a VCR, no VISS signal is in- ser ted when the second program star ts. ⢠TYPE â select the frequency of the recording (more options av ailable here than in the pre vious screen, such as ev er y w eekda y) â¢D A TE (DD/MM) â the recording date â¢S TA RT â recording star t time ⢠END â recording end time ⢠CH â the channel to be recorded, or one of the e xternal inputs (A V1, A V2 or A V3) ⢠REC TO â record to the D VD or the VCR ⢠REC MODE â recording quality ⢠VPS/PDC â If you w ant to receiv e VPS/PDC signal, select âÂÂONâ at step 4. ⢠Note that If you ha v enâÂÂt set a guide channel f or the selected TV channel, the CH field will be blank ( -- ). In this case, set the channel number manually . 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 57
58 En Recor ding 05 5 Highlight OK and press ENTER . The TIMER REC SET screen appears and you should see the new timer recording in the list. 6 Press SETUP to e xit. 7 Press TIMER REC . The timer indicator â â will appear on the display and the unit stands by for recording. ⢠If the program is D VD recording only , the unit will change to VCR mode automatically . (The D VD mode cannot be selected.) ⢠If the program is VCR recording only , the unit will change to D VD mode automatically . (The VCR mode cannot be selected.) ⢠If the programs are D VD and VCR recording, the unit will tur n off. If you w ant to use the unit, press TIMER REC again to deactiv ate the timer . ⢠If the clock symbol ( ) blinks in the display in spite of the pressing of TIMER REC, the cassette may not have been loaded yet. (see page 46) ⢠If the cassette is ejected in spite of the pressing of TIMER REC, the erase prevention tab of the cassette may have been removed. (see page 46) Checking or c hanging the timer recording When you w ant to check the selected timer recording, f ollow the steps 1 and 2 of âÂÂSetting timer recordingâ and display the TIMER REC SET screen. T o change the timer recording, select the program to be changed and press ENTER . The changing method is the same as that for the recording a program f or the first time. Cancelling the timer recording Display the TIMER REC SET screen. Select the program y ou want to cancel and press CANCEL, then the selected program will be erased from the timer recording list. In case Timer programs-overlap Do not ov erlap timer programs as por tions of the conflicting programs will be lost. The first recording time has priority ov er the next recording time as shown in the diagram belo w . In this case, the ne xt recording time is dela yed a maximum of about 2 minutes . Even when one timer recording is set to star t at the same time as another is set to finish, the later timer recording will be delay ed by up to 2 minutes. NO TES: ⢠Recording star ts a f ew seconds bef ore the preset star ting time. ⢠Y ou cannot use the timer record- ing f or the both D VD and VCR at the same time. ⢠Y ou can pla ybac k the D VD during the VCR timer recording, and you can pla yback the VCR during the D VD timer recording. ⢠If the clock symbol ( ) blinks when the timer recording ended, the TV program has not been completely recorded because of an insufficient capacity for DVD disc or video tape. Press TIMER REC to cancel the timer program. ⢠After setting the timer prog ram with VPS/PDC is âÂÂONâÂÂ, press TIMER REC then unit will automatically turn off . TIMER REC SET REC REC TO MODE VPS/ PDC CH END ST ART DATE DVD EP O N 7 02:35 01:35 27/09(SA T) VCR SP OFF 8 16:00 15:00 MON-SA T DVD XP OFF 12 18:00 17:00 SUN DVD XP OFF 7 02.54 01:54 28/09(SUN) NEW SETUP MENU 8 : 00 11 : 00 9 : 00 10 : 00 Program 1 Prog.1 Deleted Parts Non Recorded Portion Parts Prog.2 Prog.3 Program 2 Program 3 Recording Control Settings 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 58
59 En Recording 05 Timer recor ding The timer recording system allo ws y ou to select the date , time and c hannel and recor d the desired programs. Up to 1 2 timer pro- grams within a month can be stored in this unit. Setting timer recording Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a recordable D VD or video tape. ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the appropriate mode. ⢠Confirm that the clock is indicating the correct time. Example: Set the recording mode to LP and record on D VD; the TV program is on channel 1 starting at 20:00 and stopping at 23:00 on a date of 20th. 1 Press SETUP . The SETUP MENU screen appears. NO TE: In the e vent of a pow er f ailure the data of the automatic recording will be maintained in the built-in memory f or about 30 minutes . Also , the clock will continue to run for this period of time. Thereafter the data will be deleted. When the po wer resumes, the time display will change to âÂÂ0:00â that the timer setting will hav e to be set. 2 Press or to select âÂÂTIMER REC SETâ and press ENTER . The TIMER REC SET screen will appear . 3 Press or to select âÂÂNEWâ and press ENTER . The program screen will appear . TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU DVD-Video VR mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 59
60 En Recor ding 05 4 Press or to select âÂÂTYPEâ and press ENTER . Press or to select âÂÂONCEâ from the list and press ENTER . NO TES: ⢠If you select timer recording on a specified date only one time, select âÂÂONCEâ in the âÂÂTYPEâ for recording. Y ou can record same days of e v er y w eek or from Monda y to F riday using the item âÂÂTYPEâÂÂ. The items you can select are as follo ws: ONCE: Recording on the selected âÂÂD A TEâ EVER Y SUN: Recording every Sun. EVER Y MON: Recording every Mon. EVER Y TUE: Recording e v er y T ue. EVER Y WED: Recording every Wed. EVER Y THU: Recording e v ery Thu. EVER Y FRI: Recording every F ri. EVER Y SA T: Recording e very Sat. MON-FRI: Recording from Mon. to Fr i . MON-SA T: Recording from Mon. to Sat. EVER Y D A Y : Recording e veryday . ⢠The initial setting of âÂÂREC T Oâ and âÂÂREC MODEâ can be changed using âÂÂSetting the recordingâÂÂ. (See page 26.) ⢠VPS/PDC is a service provided by the public TV station. When you select a VPS/PDC-compatible TV station and activate the VPS/PDC function, the be- ginning and the end of the timer record- ing will be controlled by the TV station. Any progr am air time delays will be taken care of . T o mak e cer tain this wor ks correctly alwa ys enter the e xact star ting time as published in the ne ws paper or TV listing magazine. ⢠When y ou use the VPS/PDC function, the recording star t time may be dela yed by around 1 minute. ⢠If you use the VPS/PDC function and timer recording to record consecutive programs on the same channel, the 2 programs are recorded as a single title on a D VD . When the progr ams are re- corded using a VCR, no VISS signal is inser ted when the second program star ts. 5 Press or to select âÂÂD A TEâ and press ENTER . Press or to select the date to be recorded and press ENTER. 6 Press or to select âÂÂST ARTâ and press ENTER . Set the time when the recording is star ted. â¢T o switch ov er the selection item (hour or minute), press or , then press ENTER. ⢠Press or to adjust the time. ⢠After setting the time, press ENTER. 7 Press or to select âÂÂENDâ and press ENTER . Set the stopping time in the same manner for setting the starting time of timer recording. 8 Press or to select âÂÂCHâ and press ENTER . ⢠Press or to select the channel to be recorded and press ENTER. â¢Y ou can select the external input setting mode by pressing . Then press or to select âÂÂA V1âÂÂ, âÂÂA V2â or âÂÂA V3â and press ENTER . 9 Press or to select âÂÂREC TOâ and press ENTER . Select the media (D VD or VCR) to be recorded from the list and press ENTER. 10 Press or to select âÂÂREC MODEâ and press ENTER . The recording modes for the media selected in âÂÂREC T Oâ item are listed up . Select the recording mode and press ENTER . For the recording modes in VCR, see page 46, and for the recording modes in D VD , see page 50. 11 Press or to select âÂÂVPS/PDCâ and press ENTER . Select âÂÂONâ if you want to receiv e VPS/PDC signal. Then press ENTER . 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 60
61 En Recording 05 NO TES: ⢠Recording starts a fe w seconds bef ore the preset starting time. â¢Y ou cannot use the timer recording f or the both D VD and VCR at the same time. â¢Y ou can playbac k the D VD during the VCR timer recording, and you can pla yback the VCR during the D VD timer recording. ⢠If a recordab le tape is not inserted or no disc space is a vailab le, the timer record indicator â â flashes, and âÂÂTIMER RECORDING ERR OR. PLEASE CHECK THE DISC OR T APE. â appears on the screen. Replace the tape or disc to allo w recording. ⢠If y ou perf orm any operation during timer recording, the po wer will not go OFF when timer recording finishes. T o turn the power OFF , press ST ANDBY/ON. â¢F rom about 2 minutes before timer recording starts, some operations cannot be done. ⢠If y ou set recording to start less than 2 minutes ahead of time , the power will not turn OFF after recording finishes. ⢠If the recording media fills up during timer recording, â â will flash and the pow er will not turn OFF . Also, any timer recording scheduled f or later is cancelled. ⢠After setting the timer prog ram with VPS/PDC is âÂÂONâÂÂ, press TIMER REC then unit will automatically turn off. 12 Select âÂÂOKâ and press ENTER . The timer program is deter- mined and the TIMER REC SET screen appears again. 13 When you enter the other prog ram f or the timer recording, repeat the steps 3 to 12 . 14 Press SETUP . The TIMER REC SET screen disappears and the displa y will return to the nor mal screen. 15 Press TIMER REC . The timer indicator â â will appear on the displa y and the unit stands by f or recording. ⢠If the program with âÂÂVPS/PDCâ OFF is D VD recording only , the unit will change to VCR mode automatically . (The D VD mode cannot be selected.) ⢠If the program with âÂÂVPS/PDCâ OFF is VCR recording only , the unit will change to D VD mode automatically . (The VCR mode cannot be selected.) ⢠If the programs with âÂÂVPS/PDCâ OFF are D VD and VCR re- cording, the unit will turn off. Also if the program with âÂÂVPS/ PDCâ ON is set, the unit will turn off. If you want to use the unit, press TIMER REC again to deactiv ate the timer . ⢠If the clock symbol ( ) blinks in the display in spite of the pressing of TIMER REC, the cassette may not have been loaded yet. (see page 46) ⢠If the cassette is ejected in spite of the pressing of TIMER REC , the erase prevention tab of the cassette may have been removed. (see page 46) Checking or c hanging the timer recording When you w ant to check the selected timer recording, f ollow the steps 1 and 2 of âÂÂSetting timer recordingâ and displa y the TIMER REC SET screen. T o change the timer recording, select the program to be changed and press ENTER . The changing method is the same as that for the recording a program f or the first time. Cancelling the timer recording Displa y the TIMER REC SET screen. Select the program y ou want to cancel and press CANCEL, then the selected program will be erased from the timer recording list. In case Timer programs-overlap Do not ov erlap timer programs as por tions of the conflicting programs will be lost. The first recording time has priority ov er the next recording time as shown in the diagr am below . In this case, the ne xt recording time is dela yed a maximum of about 2 minutes. Even when one timer recording is set to start at the same time as another is set to finish, the later timer recording will be delay ed by up to 2 minutes. ENTER RETURN SETUP BACK END SELECT ENTER TIMER REC SET REC REC TO MODE VPS/ PDC TYPE DA TE (DD/MM) ST ART END CH REC TO REC MODE VPS/PDC OK SETUP MENU ONCE 1 DVD LP LP 20/11(THU) 20:00 23:00 XP SP LP EP 8 : 00 11 : 00 9 : 00 10 : 00 Program 1 Prog.1 Deleted Parts Non Recorded Portion Parts Prog.2 Prog.3 Program 2 Program 3 Recording Control Settings 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 61
62 En Recor ding 05 Stereo recording and playback NOTE: When playing HiFi cassette tapes recorded on another VCR, the sound output may be distorted. This is normal and no indication of a unit malfunction. Try to minimise sound distortions by using TRK (TRACKING) /â or change to MONO by pressing of AUDIO SELECT . Bilingual playback performed as follows: On-screen indications (for 4 sec.) Stereo playback performed in: Simultaneously both languages from HiFi track (Mixed sounds) Original sound track (Sub sound) One's mother tongue dubbing (Main sound) One's mother tongue dubbing (Main sound) Stereo Mono Right channel signal output from both loudspeakers Left channel signal output from both loudspeakers L CH HI-FI R CH HI-FI NICAM OFF NICAM M1/2 NICAM M1 NICAM ST NICAM programmes are divided into 4 types as shown belo w . NICAM STEREO broadcast âÂÂNICAM STâ illuminates when a NICAM STEREO broadcast signal is received. NICAM MONO A broadcast âÂÂNICAM M1â illuminates when a NICAM MONO A broadcast signal is received. NICAM MONO A B broadcast âÂÂNICAM M1/2â illuminates when a NICAM MONO A and MONO B broadcast signal is received. NICAM OFF This will be displayed if a NICAM signal is received when âÂÂNICAM OFFâ is selected in the AV SETUP MENU. Playback Press AUDIO SELECT to select either stereo/mono or bilingual playback (where applicable). See the table below for more information. This VCR/D VD is capable of recording Hi-Fi quality sound. When recording on a video cassette, a br oadcast which is transmitted in NICAM Stereo normally records to the HiFi audio tracks - the normal Mono FM audio signal is recorded to the mono audio track on the cassette. The NICAM stereo reception can be switched off if required, b ut normally y ou would leave this on the A utomatic setting (See page 26). When a bilingual broadcast is received, both soundtracks will be recorded (when recording to cassette only). However , bilingual broadcasts are not usually transmitted in the UK. Output selection for D VD Y ou can s witch between the left or right channel and stereo only when pla ying a disc on which a bilingual broadcast was recorded in the D VD-RW VR mode. It is not possible to s witch between channels otherwise as only the channel selected in the setting of NICAM (A UTOMA TIC or OFF) is recorded in the D VD-RW Video mode or D VD-R (see page 25). VR mode Video mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 62
63 En Editing the disc 06 Editing the disc This section explains how to edit the recorded contents on D VD- R Ws. Howe ver , the items that y ou can edit v ary with the recording f ormats. In VR mode, y ou can edit v arious title menus, whereas in Video mode, you can edit only a fe w items. Title menu When the content is recorded, a title name that includes the date, time, channel number and other inf or mation is created automatically . The title menu can be used when you pla yback after confirming the contents (see page 31), or when you chec k the contents recorded on the disc. Original title The titles e xplained abov e are called original titles; these will be added with e very recording. In VR mode you can do various editing operations i.e., y ou can rename the titles, or add the chapter marks. In addition, you can erase the unnecessary titles to increase the disc space. Playlist Y ou can create a pla ylist based on the original titles. Y ou can combine or erase undesired scenes . If you create a pla ylist it will become the pr imar y list used by the disc. If you create a pla ylist to customise your viewing pref erences, and choose to delete it, the original titles will not be affected. It is recom- mended to create and edit the playlist to pre vent impor tant titles from being erased accidentally . If you create a pla ylist, both the or iginal title and playlist will be display ed on the title menu. Editable items The items that can be edited are different betw een original title and playlist. F or the disc in Video mode, only the title name can be edited. The items can be edited in each are as follo ws: NO TES: ⢠This unit ma y not be able to record or edit a disc which was recorded or edited using another D VD recorder . â¢Y ou cannot edit or record the disc on which disc protection is set. In such a case, be sure to cancel the disc protection (see page 23) bef ore star ting the operation. ⢠When a scene has been erased, the selected position f or erasing may v ar y slightly from the actual erased position. Editing items VR mode Video mode Original Playback Adding chapter mark Combining chapters Erasing scenes Erasing titles Renaming titles Creating playlist Combining titles Original Playlist Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y N N Y Y Y N Y Y N N N N Y N N If you finalise the disc in Video mode, the title list will be created and y ou cannot use the title menu. 2H30301B_En_63 8/4/05, 19:25 63
64 En Editing the disc 06 Editing a pla ylist Y ou can create and edit the playlist based on the original title. NO TES: â¢A pla ylist can only be created with a D VD-RW in VR mode. Y ou cannot create a playlist with a D VD-RW in Video mode, nor with a D VD-R. ⢠In case the disc includes more than 10 titles, y ou can turn to the ne xt or the previous page . (See page 31.) â¢Y ou cannot s witch to the VCR mode when the title menu is showing. Press TITLE MENU to clear the title menu, then press D VD/VCR to s witch to the VCR mode. Preparation: ⢠T urn ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load the recorded D VD-RW (VR). ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) Creating a playlist 1 Press TITLE MENU . The title menu will appear . 2 Press or to select the or iginal title which will be used as the base of a playlist. 3 Press . The editing menu of original title will appear . 4 Press or to select âÂÂNEW PLA YLISTâÂÂ. 5 Press ENTER. The editing menu closes and the created pla ylist appears at the bottom of the list. DISC NAME: ---- 1/T 1 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP REC DA TE :23/11/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP TITLE MENU Created playlist RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- Titl11e 1 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME : 08:41 LENGTH : 00:01:17 TITLE MENU PLA Y ADD CHAPTER MARK COMBINE CHAPTERS EDIT TITLE DELETE TITLE RENAME TITLE NEW PLA YLIST NEW PLA YLIST VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 64
65 En Editing the disc 06 NO TES: ⢠The title name can be a maxi- m um of 64 characters . Long names will be shor tened in the title menu. ⢠F or using the k eyboard screen, see âÂÂChanging a disc nameâ (page 76). Changing a title name 1 Press TITLE MENU to display the title men u. 2 Select the pla ylist where you w ant to change the title name. ⢠Press or to select the pla ylist. ⢠Press to display the editing men u of the pla ylist. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂRENAME TITLEâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. The ke yboard screen will appear . 4 Use the ke yboard screen to enter the title name (See P . 76). 5 Press DISPLA Y to retur n the title menu. Family 1 ( . < > # 2 a b c 3 d e f CANCEL Back RETURN Exit Caps 0 Space bar 4 g h i 5 j k l 6 m n o 7 q p r s 8 t u v 9 w x y z DISPLA Y OK DISPLA Y OK Numbers Signs Letters RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP 23/11/2005 08:41 0 6 E P P L REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :006 REC MODE :SLP TITLE MENU PLA Y EDIT TITLE DELETE PLA YLIST RENAME TITLE TITLE COMBINE RENAME TITLE RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :23/11/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP TITLE MENU VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 65
66 En Editing the disc 06 Erasing a scene (Edit title) Y ou can erase an unnecessary scene from the created playlist. When you erase the scene from the pla ylist, the scene is not erased from the original title. 1 Press TITLE MENU to displa y the title menu. 2 Select the pla ylist where a scene you want to er ase is included. ⢠Press or to select the playlist. ⢠Press to display the editing menu of the pla ylist. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂEDIT TITLEâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. The EDIT TITLE screen appears. 4 Press ENTER to pla yback the pla ylist on the EDIT TITLE screen. ⢠Use each operation button ( F .FWD , REW , SKIP 6 6 6 6 6 , SKIP 7 7 7 7 7 , PLA Y , PA USE/STILL , SLO W , CM SKIP ) for the pla yback to search the star ting point of the scene you want to er ase. RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :006 REC MODE :SLP TITLE MENU PLA Y EDIT PROGRAM DELETE PLA YLIST RENAME TITLE TITLE COMBINE EDIT TITLE VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 66
67 En Editing the disc 06 NO TES: ⢠It is no problem to omit the procedures for confirming the scene or adjusting star t and end points. ⢠It is not possible to make an y adjustments f or 2 seconds after a title star ts or 2 seconds before it ends. â¢T o set a star t point at the beginning of a title, set it during countdown. ⢠The points during editing may be different from the pre view . ⢠Star t and end points are adjusted in units of 1 second. 5 Press or to select âÂÂSET ST AR Tâ at the star t point of the scene that you w ant to erase and press ENTER . (T o set the start point easily , search the star t point while âÂÂSET ST ARTâ is selected) The still image at the star t point appears at the left small screen. 6 Press or to select âÂÂSET ENDâ at the end point of the scene you w ant to erase and press ENTER . The still image at the end point appears at the right small screen. 7 Check the er ased scenes. ⢠Select âÂÂPre viewâ and press ENTER . Then the video where the scenes between the star t and end points are erased is pla yed back. ⢠Each operation b utton ( F .FWD , REW , SKIP 6 6 6 6 6 , SKIP 7 7 7 7 7 , PLA Y , PA USE/STILL ) for pla yback also can be used. 8 Adjust the star t and end points. ⢠T o adjust the start point, select âÂÂAdjust startâ and press ENTER . Y ou can change the start point ev er y one frame by pressing or . ⢠T o adjust the end point, select âÂÂAdjust endâ and press ENTER . Y ou can change the end point in the same wa y as the star t point. 9 If you determine the scene to be erased, press or to select âÂÂFinishâ and press ENTER . â¢A chapter mark is automatically added at the location of the erased scene. VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 67
68 En Editing the disc 06 Combining the title Y ou can create a pla ylist by combining sev eral original titles or pla ylists. T o combine titles, it is necessary to create a playlist first. B y combining the titles in the playlist, a pla ylist where sev eral titles are combined is created. 1 Press TITLE MENU to displa y the title menu. 2 Select the pla ylist where you w ant to combine the titles. ⢠Press or to select the playlist. ⢠Press to display the editing menu of the pla ylist. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂTITLE COMBINEâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. Select the title that you w ant to combine from the title menu. 4 Press ENTER. F ollowing the pla ylist, the selected title is combined. The se ver al titles were combined so that the total recording time is displa yed. RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP Title 1 PL F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :006 REC MODE :SLP TITLE MENU PLA Y EDIT TITLE DELETE PLA YLIST RENAME TITLE TITLE COMBINE TITLE COMBINE RETURN ENTER BA CK END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :25/11/2005 TIME :10:03 LENGTH :00:20:00 CHANNEL :11 REC MODE :SP TITLE MENU RETURN PLA Y B ACK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP Title 1 PL F amily REC DA TE :23/11/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:50:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP TITLE MENU VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 68
69 En Editing the disc 06 Erasing a playlist Y ou can erase the created pla ylist. Even if y ou erase the pla ylist, the original title will not be erased. 1 Press TITLE MENU to display the title men u. 2 Select the pla ylist that you want to er ase. ⢠Press or to select the playlist. ⢠Press to displa y the editing menu of the pla ylist. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂDELETE PLA YLISTâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. The selected pla ylist will be erased. RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :006 REC MODE :SLP TITLE MENU PLA Y EDIT TITLE DELETE PROGRAM RENAME TITLE TITLE COMBINE DELETE PLA YLIST VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 69
70 En Editing the disc 06 Editing an original title In VR mode, you can edit v arious items, whereas in Video mode, y ou can edit the title names onl y . NO TES: â¢Y ou can automatically add a chapter mark in recording. F or more inf ormation, see page 27. ⢠In case the disc includes more than 10 titles, y ou can turn to the ne xt or the previous page . (See page 31.) Preparation: ⢠T urn ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load the recorded disc. ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) Adding a chapter mark Y ou can add a chapter mark to the original title. Y ou can add up to 999 chapter marks to one disc, and up to 99 chapter marks to one title. 1 Press TITLE MENU to displa y the title menu. 2 Select the original title where a chapter mark is added. ⢠Press or to select the original title. ⢠Press to display the editing men u of the original title. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂADD CHAPTER MARKâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. The ADD CHAPTER MARK screen will appear . 4 Press PLA Y to search a scene where you want to add the chapter mark. ⢠Search the scene by using each operation b utton ( F .FWD , REW , SKIP 6 6 6 6 6 , SKIP 7 7 7 7 7 , PA USE/STILL, SLO W , CM SKIP ) f or the pla yback. DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP PLA Y COMBINE CHAPTERS EDIT TITLE DELETE TITLE RENAME TITLE NEW PLA YLIST ADD CHAPTER MARK TITLE MENU VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 70
71 En Editing the disc 06 5 When the scene you w ant to add a chapter mark, press ENTER . The playbac k is paused and the position of the added chapter mark appears green. 6 If you w ant to continue to add chapter mark, repeat step 5 . 7 Adding chapter marks is finished. ⢠T o displa y the title menu, press RETURN . ⢠T o return to the nor mal screen, press TITLE MENU . Combining chapters By erasing the added chapter marks, the chapters can be combined. 1 Press TITLE MENU to displa y the title menu. 2 Select the original titles where you want to combine the chap- ters. ⢠Press or to select the original title. ⢠Press to display the editing men u of original title. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂCOMBINE CHAPTERSâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. The COMBINE CHAPTERS screen will appear . At the begin- ning, the top still image in the chapter 2 is displa yed. ADD CHAPTER MARK 17% NAME 2 3 / 11/2005 08:41 CHAPTER 2/4 LENGTH 00:03:08/00:30:17 The added chapter mark RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP PLA Y COMBINE CHAPTERS EDIT TITLE DELETE TITLE RENAME TITLE NEW PLA YLIST ADD CHAPTER MARK TITLE MENU NO TE: Chapter marks that hav e been added automatically in the erasing of a scene procedure (page 73) cannot be erased. VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 71
72 En Editing the disc 06 4 Press SKIP 6 or 7 to select the chapter marks to be erased. 5 Press ENTER. The chapter marks are erased and 2 chapters are combined into 1 chapter . 6 To contin ue erasing the chapter marks, repeat steps 4 and 5 . 7 The combining chapters will completed. ⢠T o displa y the title menu, press RETURN . ⢠T o return to the nor mal screen, press TITLE MENU . Changing an original title name 1 Press TITLE MENU to displa y the title menu. 2 Select the original title that you want to rename . ⢠Press or to select the original title. ⢠Press to display the editing men u of original title. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂRENAME TITLEâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. The ke yboard screen will appear . The entering method of the title name is the same as for the playlist. See the steps 4 and 5 of âÂÂChanging a title nameâ in âÂÂEditing a playlistâ (page 65) and enter the title name (See also page 76 f or more about the ke yboard screen). SELECT RETURN ENTER BA CK END TITLE MENU ENTER COMBINE CHAPTERS NAME 2 3 / 11/2005 08:41 CHAPTER 2/4 LENGTH 00:02:03/00:30:17 RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP TITLE MENU PLA Y ADD CHAPTER MARK COMBINE CHAPTERS EDIT TITLE DELETE TITLE RENAME TITLE NEW PLA YLIST RENAME TITLE NOTES: ⢠The title name can be a maxi- m um of 64 characters in VR mode and a maximum of 30 characters in Video mode. Long names will be shor tened in the title menu. ⢠âÂÂRENAME TITLEâ can only be used with D VD-R discs and video mode D VD-RW discs bef ore they hav e been finalized. VR mode VR mode DVD-Video DVD-R 2H30301B_En_72_77 8/4/05, 19:25 72
73 En Editing the disc 06 3 By pressing ENTER, the f ollowing message screen will appear . 4 Press or to select âÂÂYESâ and press ENTER, then the EDIT TITLE screen will appear. ⢠By selecting âÂÂNOâÂÂ, the title menu appears. 5 The method f or erasing a scene is the same as f or the playlist. See the steps 4 to 9 of âÂÂErasing scenes (Edit title)â in âÂÂEditing a pla ylistâ (page 66). Erasing a scene (Edit title) Y ou can erase an unnecessary scene from the or iginal title. Erase the scene after checking the title . Y ou cannot restore the erased scene. When you erase the scene , you can increase the disc space . 1 Press TITLE MENU to display the title men u. 2 Select the original title where a scene you want to erase is included. ⢠Press or to select the original title. ⢠Press to display the editing men u of original title. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂEDIT TITLEâÂÂ. RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP TITLE MENU PLA Y ADD CHAPTER MARK COMBINE CHAPTERS EDIT PROGRAM DELETE TITLE RENAME TITLE NEW PLA YLIST EDIT TITLE NO TES: ⢠If the scene is erased from the original title, the created playlist is erased. ⢠Disc space will only be freed up if scenes lasting sev eral minutes are deleted. â¢A chapter mark is automatically added at the location of the erased scene. Chapter mark added by er asing scene cannot be erased. VR mode 2H30301B_En_72_77 8/4/05, 19:26 73
74 En Editing the disc 06 NO TE: If the original title is erased the created playlist is also er ased. 3 By pressing ENTER, the f ollowing message screen will appear . 4 Press or to select âÂÂYESâ and press ENTER, then the original title will be erased. ⢠Erasing the title will be cancelled by selecting âÂÂNOâÂÂ. Erasing an original title Y ou can erase the original title. Erase the original title after checking its title. The erased title cannot be restored. When you erase the titles , you can increase the disc space . 1 Press TITLE MENU to display the title menu. 2 Select the original title you want to erase. ⢠Press or to select the original title. ⢠Press to display the editing men u of original title. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂDELETE TITLEâÂÂ. RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP TITLE MENU PLA Y ADD CHAPTER MARK COMBINE CHAPTERS EDIT TITLE DELETE TITLE RENAME TITLE NEW PLA YLIST DELETE TITLE VR mode 2H30301B_En_72_77 8/4/05, 19:26 74
75 En Editing the disc 06 Changing a disc name Y ou can change a disc name from the title men u. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load the recorded D VD disc. ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) Changing a disc name 1 Press TITLE MENU to displa y the title menu. 2 ⢠Press or to select âÂÂDISC NAMEâÂÂ. ⢠Press to display the editing menu. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂRENAME DISCâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. The ke yboard screen will appear . 4 Use the ke yboard screen to enter the disc name. 5 Press DISPLA Y to retur n the title menu. Drama_Family Numbers Signs Letters 1 ( - < > # 2 a b c 3 d e f Back Exit Caps 0 4 g h i 5 j k l 6 m n o 7 q p r s 8 t u v 9 w x y z CANCEL RETURN DISPLA Y OK DISPLA Y OK Space bar NO TES: ⢠The disc name can be a maxi- m um of 30 characters . Long names will be shor tened in the title menu. â¢F or using the ke yboard screen, see âÂÂUsing the ke yboard screenâ (page 76). ⢠âÂÂRENAME DISCâ can only be used with D VD-R discs and video mode D VD-RW discs bef ore they hav e been finalized. 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily DISC NAME: ---- PLA Y LENGTH : CHANNEL : REC MODE : RENAME DISC TITLE MENU RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily DISC NAME:Drama_Family REC DA TE : TIME : LENGTH : CHANNEL : REC MODE : TITLE MENU RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER VR mode Video mode DVD-R 2H30301B_En_72_77 8/4/05, 19:26 75
76 En Editing the disc 06 Using the keyboar d screen This section explains the function of the k eyboard screen and how to input characters . The disc name and the title name can be changed using the ke yboard screen. Ke yboard screen types The ke yboard screen has three types of âÂÂLettersâÂÂ, âÂÂNumbersâ and âÂÂSignsâÂÂ. The type can be s witched over by pressing REW or F .FWD . Letters : This is mainly used f or inputting alphabetical letters. F or the k eyboard screen of Letters , see the previous page . Numbers : This is used for inputting n umbers. Signs : This is used for inputting symbols . Live Show Numbers Signs Letters 1 < > 2 3 Back Exit 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 CANCEL RETURN DISPLA Y OK DISPLA Y OK Inputting characters Live Show Numbers Signs Letters 1 ) ! < > , 2 ? @ # 3 & % / Back Exit 0 Space bar 4 . * _ 5 - = 6 [ ] : 7 è ; \ â 8 < > $ 9 :÷) :÷( ;-/ :÷} CANCEL RETURN DISPLA Y OK DISPLA Y OK There are two methods f or inputting characters. Character input 1 1 Press , , or to select the character to be input. 2 Press ENTER. The selected character will be input. Character input 2 Example: Explained here is the procedure when you input âÂÂFâ and âÂÂJâÂÂ. 1 Press the n umeric keys where a character y ou w ant to input is assigned. 3 d e f 2 Press the n umeric keys contin uously and select the character to be input. To input F , press 3 three times. 3 d e f NO TE: When the inter v al between the pressing numeric keys is 2 seconds or more in selecting the input character , the selected character will automatically be input. 3 Stop the ke y operation when y ou select the character to be input. The selected character will automatically be input. F 4 Press the n umeric keys where the f ollowing character is assigned. 5 j k l Fj 5 When the character to be input is selected, stop the ke y operation. The selected character is automatically input. 2H30301B_En_72_77 8/4/05, 19:26 76
77 En Editing the disc 06 Erasing a character Y ou can erase the input character . Erasing method 1 1 Press , , or to select âÂÂBac kâÂÂ. 2 Press ENTER. The last input character will be erased. 3 To erase the characters continuously , press ENTER . The input characters will be erased from the last to the top one by one . Erasing method 2 1 Press CANCEL on the remote control. The last input character is erased. 2 To erase the characters continuously , press CANCEL . The input characters will be erased from the last to the top one by one . Erasing method 3 Use the cursor to select the character and erase it. 1 Press SKIP 6 or 7 to mov e the cursor after the character y ou want to erase . 2 Press CANCEL . Erase the character bef ore the cursor position. Live Show 1 ( - < > # 2 a b c 3 d e f Back Exit Caps 0 4 g h i 5 j k l 6 m n o 7 q p r s 8 t u v 9 w x y z Numbers Signs Letters Upper Lower Auto caps CANCEL RETURN DISPLA Y OK DISPLA Y OK Space bar Selecting between uppercase and lo wercase letters Y ou can select either uppercase or low ercase letters when modifying your titles , using the ke yboard screen with the âÂÂLettersâ tab . 1 Press STOP . (Or , press , , or to select âÂÂCapsâÂÂ, then press ENTER.) 2 Press or to select the type of letters in the list below and press ENTER . A uto caps : Determines uppercase and lower- case automatically . Upper : Inputs all with uppercase letters. Lower : Inputs all with lo wercase letters. Determining a name To determine the entered disc name and title name, press DISPLA Y . Or , press , , or to select âÂÂOKâÂÂ, then press ENTER . The ke yboard screen disappears and the displa y will retur n to the title menu. The entered disc name and title name are display ed in the title menu. Cancelling character input When you w ant to cancel the input and changed characters, press RETURN . Or , press , , or to select âÂÂExitâÂÂ, then press ENTER . The input and changed characters are cancelled and the title menu will appear . 2H30301B_En_72_77 8/4/05, 19:26 77
78 En Dubbing 07 NO TE: Confirm that the VCR indicator lights . 4 Press DUBBING. ⢠The unit is changed to D VD mode automatically . ⢠The VCR is waiting for pla yback and the D VD is waiting for recording. Then the f ollowing message will appear . 5 Press DUBBING , or or to select âÂÂYESâ and press ENTER . Dubbing star ts. â¢T o cancel dubbing, press ST OP , or select âÂÂNOâ and press ENTER. In dubbing, VCR playbac k, D VD recording and âÂÂdubâ (dubbing) indicator appear on the displa y window . Press CLOCK/COUNTER to displa y the elapsed dubbing time in the displa y window . 6 To stop dubbing, press ST OP . Dubbing a tape onto a disc Y ou can recor d video or audio on a video tape onto a disc. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a source video tape and a disc for recording. ⢠Remov e the erase protection tab of the source video tape to prev ent the data from accidentally being erased. ⢠Confirm the disc space before operation. 1 Press D VD/VCR to set this unit to D VD mode. The D VD indicator will light. 2 Press REC MODE/SPEED and select the recording mode SP , LP , EP or XP . ⢠The recording mode is indicated on both the TV screen and the display windo w . â¢F or the details of the recording mode, see page 50. 3 Press D VD/VCR and set the unit to VCR mode. STOP ENTER ENTER NO YES SELECT DUBBING CONFIRM DUBBING FROM VCR TO DVD YES NO NO TES: ⢠Dubbing cannot be accomplished when - a copy protected tape is used. - a finalised disc is used. - disc protection is set. - disc has no recording space. ⢠Dubbing stops when - the video tape is pla yed bac k to the end and stops. - recording space becomes full. - the picture noise continues f or 1 minute. ⢠The videos recorded from TV programs or mo vies can be used only f or your personal enjo yment without permission of the copyright holder . VR mode Video mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_78_81 8/4/05, 19:26 78
79 En Dubbing 07 NO TES: ⢠When a title is play ed by selecting it from the title menu, only the title selected is play ed. ⢠Dubbing cannot be accomplished when -a copy protected disc is used. -a DivX î file is play ed. - the er ase prev ention tab of video tape is remov ed. ⢠Dubbing stops when - the disc is pla yed back to the end and stops. - no recording space on the Video tape remains ⢠During dubbing, the unit is changed to interlaced scan mode automatically , if it has been previously set to progressiv e scan mode. ⢠If no special permission is obtained from the copyright owner , videos recorded from TV programs or movies can only be used for y our own personal enjo yment. Y ou can recor d both video and audio from a disc to a video tape. When a disc with a cop y guard is used, dubbing cannot be accomplished. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a source disc and a video tape for recording. ⢠Confir m the remaining tape for recording bef ore operation. 1 Press D VD/VCR to set this unit to VCR mode. The VCR indicator will light. 2 Press REC MODE/SPEED and select the recording mode SP or LP . ⢠The recording mode is indicated on both the TV screen and the display windo w . â¢F or the details of the recording mode, see page 46. 3 Press D VD/VCR and set the unit to D VD mode. NO TE: Confirm that the D VD indicator lights. 4 Press DUBBING. ⢠The D VD is waiting f or pla yback and the VCR is waiting f or recording. Then the f ollowing message appears. 5 Press DUBBING , or or to select âÂÂYESâ and press ENTER . Dubbing star ts. â¢T o cancel dubbing, press STOP , or select âÂÂNOâ and press ENTER . In dubbing, D VD pla yback, VCR recording and âÂÂdubâ (dubbing) indicator appear on the displa y window . Press CLOCK/COUNTER to displa y the tape counter in the displa y window . 6 To stop dubbing, press ST OP . Dubbing only the specified titles or the pla ylist When you w ant to dub only specific titles or playlists recorded on the disc, start the playbac k of the desired title or playlist, and then press DUBBING and proceed from step 5 abov e. Dubbing star t from the beginning of the title or playlist. Dubbing only a specified scene When you w ant to dub only specific scene on the disc, press P AUSE/STILL at the desired scene , and then press DUBBING and proceed from step 5 abov e. Dubbing a disc onto a tape STOP ENTER ENTER NO YES SELECT DUBBING CONFIRM DUBBING FROM DVD TO VCR YES NO VR mode Video mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_78_81 8/4/05, 19:26 79
80 En Dubbing 07 Y ou can connect another VCR or camcorder f or dubbing. T ypical connection: When using this unit as a recording device See next page f or the diagrams of connection. NO TES: ⢠When this unit is used as a playbac k device, an y on screen displa ys that appear would also appear on the recording. Howe ver it is possible to set the on screen display to OFF - see the âÂÂDISPLA Y/CALL â section on page 24 f or more information. ⢠If no special permission is obtained from the copyright o wner , videos recorded from TV programs or mo vies can only be used f or your own personal enjo yment. â¢Y ou may not dub a cop y pro- tected video tape or D VD disc. Dubbing using other equipment VR mode Video mode DVD-R VCR 2 Press REC MODE/SPEED and select the recording mode. VCR: SP or LP (See page 46.) D VD: SP , LP , EP or XP (See page 50.) 3 Press REC on this unit. 4 Press the PLA Y b utton on the pla yback de vice. 5 To stop dubbing, press ST OP . When a video is recorded using this unit Preparation: ⢠T urn ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a video tape where the erase-protection tab is not activated or a disc with enough recording space. ⢠T o record onto a video tape, set the unit to VCR mode, whereas to record onto a disc, set it to D VD mode. 1 Press INPUT SELECT and set the channel to A3 (or A2). A2: DECODER/EXTERNAL scar t on the rear panel A3: AUDIO/VIDEO input on the front panel Confirm that A3 (or A2) appears on the display window . 2H30301B_En_78_81 8/4/05, 19:26 80
81 En Dubbing 07 Playbac k unit connection. The playbac k unit can be a camcorder or a video recorder . See each operation man ual for each pla yback operation. The cop y protected video or D VD disc cannot be copied. See âÂÂEXTERNAL A UDIO INPUTâ on page 26 for how to s witch the external audio input. Dubbing with A/V -cable (or S-Video cable) (not supplied) To pla yback unit Recording unit A/V -cable (not supplied) Press INPUT SELECT on the remote control repeatedly until A3 appears on the front displa y . If the other VCR or camcorder is equipped with S-Video output, a superior picture will be achie ved using an S-Video cab le connected to the S-Video-input (A V3) on the front panel with S-Video cable . In this case, y ou must select âÂÂS-VIDEOâ mode in A V3 INPUT -setting on page 25. If you select âÂÂVIDEOâÂÂ, only the composite video signal will be input. (S-Video input signal will be cut.) The S-Video input can be used only for recording on the disc. (The S-Video input cannot be used for recording on the video tape.) To pla yback unit SCART cab le (not supplied) SCAR T cable (supplied) TV -unit (not supplied) Dubbing with SCART cable (not supplied) Press INPUT SELECT on the remote control repeatedly until A2 appears on the front displa y . Recording unit S-Video cable (not supplied) AV3 2H30301B_En_78_81 8/4/05, 19:26 81
Additional information 08 82 En Glossary A-B Repeat Playbac k Pla yback that repeats between tw o set points, A and B. angle Recorded onto some D VD discs are scenes which hav e been simultaneously shot from a number of different angles (the same scene is shot from the front, from the left side, from the right side, etc.). With such discs you can select the angle from which to view the scene . auto chapter F eature that automatically makes chapter marks on a D VD disc during recording. b lue backgr ound F eature that automatically changes unpleasant noise images to a blue screen when a channel without a broadcast or a channel on which the broadcast has ended has been selected. BRO WSER screen Screen that appears when TITLE MENU is pressed during MP3/WMA or JPEG CD is inser ted. c hapter A section within a title is called a âÂÂchapterâÂÂ. CM Skip When pressed during playbac k, playbac k jumps 30 sec ahead and resumes. copy guar d Copyright protection signal. Software and broad- casts that contain this signal cannot be recorded. DivX DivX is a compressed digital video f or mat created by the DivX î video codec from DivXNetworks, Inc. This unit can pla y DivX video files burned on CD-R/ R W/R OM discs. K eeping the same ter minology as D VD-Video , individual DivX video files are called âÂÂTitlesâÂÂ. When naming files/titles on a CD-R/R W disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by def ault they will be pla yed in alphabetical order . DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivXNetworks, Inc. and are used under license. Dolby Digital With multichannel audio , this high quality surround system is used in many movie theaters around the wor ld. Manufactured under licence fr om Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS DTS stands for Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround system diff erent from Dolby Digital that has become a popular surround sound format f or movies. "DTS" and "DTS Digital Out" are r egistered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. D VD menu Menu recorded on a D VD-Video that enables the user to select subtitles language, soundtrac k language, etc. finalise Operation that enab les discs recorded or edited with this unit to be pla yed bac k on other D VD play ers. letter box F eature that displays b lac k bands above and belo w the playbac k images dur ing playbac k of a disc recorded in wide (16:9) format on a 4:3 TV con- nected to this unit. MP3 One type of audio compression that uses MPEG1. one touch repeat If ONE TOUCH REPEA T is pressed during play- back, pla yback retur ns to a point 10 sec earlier and resumes. original title The file created by recording something is called an âÂÂoriginal titleâÂÂ. OT R One-touch Timer Recording. Star t a timed record- ing by pushing just one b utton (up to 6 hours). pan scan F eature that cuts the left and right edges of playbac k images to a 4:3 size during playback of a disc recorded in wide (16:9) f ormat on a 4:3 TV connected to this unit. parental control Some discs control viewing according to the age of the viewer . A control lev el can be set f or those types of discs. 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:26 82
Additional information 08 83 En Screen sizes and disc f ormats playlist User-created titles based on each original title. Progressive scan T echnology that simultaneously displays odd- n umbered scanning lines and e ven-n umbered scanning lines from top to bottom. Also called âÂÂ576pâÂÂ, âÂÂpâ meaning âÂÂprogressiv eâÂÂ. Regions (D VD only) 2 ALL (example region code marks) Regions associate discs and play ers with par ticular areas of the world. This unit will only pla y discs that hav e compatible region codes . Y ou can find the region code of your unit b y looking on the rear panel. Some discs are compatible with more than one region (or all regions). SETUP MENU Menu that contains settings f or various f eatures of this unit, such as recording and pla yback. Timer recording is also set from the SETUP MENU . slide show T echnique for flipping through and vie wing many images (JPEG files). subtitle language Language used for subtitles of mo vies, etc. Viewers can watch in a language of their choosing. title A program recorded on a disc is called a âÂÂtitleâÂÂ. title menu Menu that lists titles and trac ks recorded on the disc. It is used for pla yback and disc editing. top menu Menu on a D VD-Video f or selecting chapters for playbac k, subtitle language, etc. The top menu may be ref erred to as a Title Menu on some D VD discs. track A song on a music CD is called a âÂÂtrac kâÂÂ. TRA CK INFO screen The screen that appears when TITLE MENU is pressed, if an A udio disc is in the unit. Video mode This recording f or mat is compatible with commer- cially av ailable D VD pla yers. VR mode This recording f or mat is the basic D VD-RW recording f or mat, and lets you enjo y the various editing functions av ailable with this unit. Screen sizes and disc formats (See page 24) When viewing on a standard TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 4:3 (Letter Box) The program is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The sides of the program are cropped so that the picture fills the whole screen. Please note that many 4:3 16:9 The program appears squashed. Set to either 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (P an & Scan). 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The program is presented correctly on either setting. When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 16:9 The program is presented in widescreen. 4:3 16:9 Y our TV will determine how the picture is presented-check the manual that came with the TV for details. NO TE: Using the 16:9 (Wide) setting with a standard 4:3 TV , or either of the 4:3 settings with a widescreen TV , will result in a distorted picture. widescreen discs override the player's settings so that the disc is shown in letter box format regardless of the setting. 16:9 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:26 83
Additional information 08 84 En Enter the appropr iate code number for the initial settings âÂÂD VD MENUâÂÂ, âÂÂA UDIOâ and/or âÂÂSUBTITLEâ (see page 20). Language code list Language Abkhazian Af ar Afrikaans Albanian Amharic Arabic Armenian Assamese A ymara Azerbaijani Bashkir Bengali; Bangla Bhutani Bihari Breton Bulgarian Burmese Byelorussian Catalan Cambodian Chinese Corsican Croatian Czech Danish Deutsch Dutch Greek English Esperanto Spanish Code 1112 1111 1116 2927 1123 1128 1835 1129 1135 1136 1211 1224 1436 1218 1228 1217 2335 1215 1311 2123 3618 1325 1828 1329 1411 1415 2422 1522 1524 1525 1529 Code 1530 1531 1611 1625 1620 1619 1628 1635 1722 2111 2122 1724 1731 1811 1933 1819 1831 1929 1924 1911 1711 1930 2011 2033 2124 2129 2121 2135 2125 2131 2225 Language Estonian Basque P ersian F aroese Fiji Finnish F rench Fr isian Galician Georgian Greenlandic Guarani Gujarati Hausa Hebrew Hindi Hungarian Icelandic Indonesian Interlingua Irish Italian J apanese Jav anese Kannada Kashmiri Kazakh Kirghiz K orean Kurdish Laothian Code 2211 2232 2224 2230 2321 2317 2329 2322 2330 2319 2328 2325 2324 2411 2415 2425 2528 2611 2629 2622 2630 2731 2823 2825 2831 2923 2911 1714 2928 2918 2924 Language Latin Latvian, Lettish Lingala Lithuanian Macedonian Malagasy Mala y Mala yalam Maltese Maori Marathi Moldavian Mongolian Nauru Nepali Norwegian Oriya P anjabi P ashto , Pushto P olish Po r tuguese Quechua Rhaeto-Romance Romanian Russian Samoan Sanskrit Scots Gaelic Serbian Serbo-Croatian Shona Language Sindhi Singhalese Slov ak Slov enian Somali Sundanese Swahili Swedish T agalog T ajik T amil T atar T elugu Thai Tibetan Tigrinya T onga Tu r kish Tu r kmen Tw i Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese V olapük W elsh W olof Xhosa Y iddish Yo r uba Zulu Code 2914 2919 2921 2922 2925 2931 2933 2932 3022 3017 3011 3030 3015 3018 1225 3019 3025 3028 3021 3033 3121 3128 3136 3219 3225 1335 3325 3418 2019 3525 3631 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 84
Additional information 08 85 En SYSTEM ERROR PLEASE W AIT SYSTEM ERROR PLEASE W AIT DISC CHECKING SYSTEM ERROR DISC MIGHT BE F AILED PRESS ENTER NO DISC REGION CODE ERROR INCORRECT DISC - C104, C105, C106, C107 PROGRESSIVE OUTPUT . ST OP DISC PLA Y BACK THEN PRESS PROGRESSIVE T O CANCEL. Err or/W arning message list -- ERROR/W ARNING MESSAGE CA USE POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS P AGE NO TE: It is possible that other warning messages other than this listed abov e could appear . If this happens, please chec k the possible solutions abo ve as the y could still provide an e xplanation. The power w as shut down without completing the termination process due to a power failure or dis- connection of the AC cord plug. (Abnor mal termi- nation) The power was abruptly turned off before writ- ing to the disc was completed. The data restoration was completed. PLA Y w as pressed when a disc was not loaded into the unit. A disc specified other than âÂÂRegion 2â or âÂÂRegion ALL â was loaded. The disc cannot be identified. W ait until the message disappears. The data is now restoring. Press ENTER , then the screen re- turns to the nor mal display . The data may not be restored ev en if the res- toration process is perf ormed. Load a disc. A disc specified other than âÂÂRegion 2â or âÂÂRegion ALL â cannot be played back. Check to mak e sure that the disc is compatible with this unit. -- 50 30 9 9 Playbac k Po w er ON REC w as pressed when a disc was not loaded into the unit. The recording termination is processing. Disc became full during recording. Recording was tried onto the disc having no space. Recording was tried onto the disc which does not suppor t recording. Disc erase-protection is applied. Recording was tried onto the finalised disc. Adding data was tried onto the disc recorded in the other unit. Adding data was tried to the disc where PC data w as recorded. A scratch or contamination was f ound on the disc. 99 titles were recorded on the disc. Load a disc. W ait until the process is completed. Erase unnecessary titles or load another disc and restart recording. Check the disc space. Load a recordable disc. Set âÂÂProtect discâ to âÂÂOFFâÂÂ. Undo finalisation or load another disc for recording. Load another disc for recording. Load another disc for recording. Check the disc and reload it, or use another disc for recording. Erase unnecessary titles or load another disc. -- 52 32 10 23 23 -- -- -- 74 71 51 51 51 74 999 chapters were existed on the disc. Y ou tried to record a cop y-guard video. The video was changed to a copy-guard f or mat in recording. Yo u tried to record the âÂÂCopy Onceâ progr am onto a disc (Video mode). Yo u tried to record the âÂÂCopy Onceâ progr am onto a disc without CPRM. Erase unnecessary chapters or load another disc. Y ou cannot record the video con- taining copy-guard signal. Y ou cannot record the video con- taining copy-guard signal. Load a D VD-RW V er. 1.1/1.2 (VR mode) with CPRM. Load a D VD-RW V er. 1.1/1.2 (VR mode) with CPRM. 51 NO DISC PROCESSING PLEASE W AIT RECORDING INTERRUPTED - C204 CANNOT RECORD - C203 CANNOT RECORD - C206 CANNOT RECORD - C207 CANNOT RECORD - C208 CANNOT RECORD - C209 CANNOT RECORD - C210 DISC ERROR - C205, C211, C212, C213 CANNOT RECORD EXCEEDS LIM- ITED NUMBER OF TITLES. CANNOT RECORD , EXCEEDS LIMITED NUMBER OF CHAPTER. CANNOT RECORD PR O TECTED IMAGE. RECORDING INTERRUPTED PRO- TECTED IMAGE. CANNOT RECORD IN VIDEO MODE. COPY IMAGE ONCE ONL Y . CANNOT RECORD ON DISC . THIS IS NOT CPRM DISC . TIMER RECORDING ERROR PLEASE CHCK THE DISC OR T APE Recording When the unit was not connec-ted to the TV with the component video cables, PR OGRESSIVE w as pressed. Press PROGRESSIVE in the stop mode to make the progressiv e scanning mode inactive. 45 No video tape or disc is inser ted as a source for the recording. The source video or disc to be copied is copy- guarded. The video tape or disc became full during dubbing. Cannot Format disc due to a scratch or contami- nation on the disc. Cannot Finalise disc due to a scratch or con- tamination on the disc. Cannot Undo Finalise disc due to a scratch or contamination on the disc. Cannot Protect disc ON/OFF due to a scratch or contamination on the disc. Editing cannot be performed due to a scratch or contamination on the disc. Combining chapters cannot be performed. Load a video tape or disc into the source drive. Y ou cannot dub a video containing copy-guarded material. Load another video tape or disc for recording and restar t. Check the disc and reload it, or use another disc for recording. Check the disc and reload it. Check the disc and reload it. Check the disc and reload it. Check the disc and reload it, or use another disc for recording. Chapter marks that have been added automatically in the erasing of a scene procedure cannot be erased. 78, 79 51 78, 79 -- 88 88 88 -- A process requiring a longer time such as edit- ing is being performed. W ait until the process is complete . -- 73 CANNOT COPY D A T A - C251 CANNOT COPY D A T A - C254, C255 COPYING INTERRUPTED DISC ERROR - C302, C303 DISC ERROR - C304, C305 DISC ERROR - C306 DISC ERROR - C307, C308 CANNOT EDIT CANNOT EDIT - C408 PROCESSING PLEASE W AIT Dubbing Disc setup Title Menu When a recordable tape is not inserted or no disc space is av ailable , TIMER REC was pressed. Load a recordabl tape or disc. 58, 61 85 En 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 85
Additional information 08 86 En SYMPT OMS POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS ⢠Make sure the po wer cord is plugged in. â¢T ry another A C outlet. â¢P ow er is off, chec k fuse or circuit breaker . ⢠Unplug unit, then plug it back in. ⢠Select the D VD or VCR mode bef ore operating. ⢠Antenna connection is not correct or antenna cable is disconnected. ⢠Chec k the unit is connected correctly . ⢠The video input selector of the TV is not set to VIDEO. Set to VIDEO (or equivalent). ⢠Channel is set to the e xternal mode. ⢠Chec k the input settings on the TV and the output settings on the unit. ⢠Chec k the unit is connected correctly . ⢠Chec k the input selector of the amplifier is set properly . ⢠The unit is in the Special pla yback mode. ⢠Aim at the remote control at the remote sensor . ⢠Operate within Appro x. 5 metres or reduce the light in the room. ⢠Clear the path of the beam. ⢠The batteries are weak. Replace the batter ies. ⢠Chec k the batteries are inser ted correctly . ⢠This unit may on rare occasions stop working in cer tain situations, such as when a soiled or damaged disc is used. If this occurs, hold down ST ANDBY/ON on the unit for 10 seconds or longer to reset the unit. The unit may also automatically reset itself if it detects a problem. ⢠If the unit performs a reset of this sor t while data is being recorded onto a disc, it may in rare cases no longer be possible to successfully record to or play back from the disc. VCR/D VD does not operate. No picture. The picture is not nor mal (appears in black and white, etc.). No sound. The remote control does not function. No function in D VD mode. Pr oblems and tr oubleshooting â â â â 30 16 16 â â 25 16~17 â 33, 48 15 â â â¢Y our preferred language ma y not be av ailable on the disc. ⢠No disc is inserted. ⢠The disc ma y be dir ty . Clean up the disc. ⢠The unit cannot pla y D VD-ROMs, etc. ⢠Chec k that the disc is not a D VD-RAM, D VD R/RW , dual disc (D VD/CD h ybrid disc) or other incompatib le format disc. ⢠Some discs ma y not do some of the functions. ⢠Chec k the disc space, using the disc inf ormation. ⢠Chec k the disc for protection. ⢠Chec k if the video to be recorded is not âÂÂcop y-guardedâÂÂ. ⢠Check that the number of recorded titles is 99 or less, using the disc information. ⢠Chec k that the total number of chapters for the recorded titles does not e xceed 999 in the disc inf or mation section. ⢠In a D VD-RW of V er.1.0, recording in Video mode does not wo rk. Check the disc type. ⢠Chec k that the disc is finalised. ⢠Some D VD play ers will not pla y ev en if the disc has been finalised. ⢠If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other pla yer must be R W compatible in order to pla y the disc. Display is not sho wn in your language. Playbac k doesnâÂÂt start. Stopping playbac k, search, slow- motion play , repeat play , or program play , etc. cannot be performed. Recording does not work. A disc recorded using this recorder cannot be play ed back in other pla y- ers. 20 30 88 9 Incorrect operation is often mistaken f or trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this component, please check the points below . Sometimes the trouble ma y lie in another component. In vestigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified e ven after checking the points below , ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carr y out repair work. NO TE: If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity , disconnect the po wer plug from the AC outlet and insert again to retur n to normal operating conditions. If the unit will not work ev en if the pow er cord is unplugged and plugged back in, unplug the cord from the A C outlet for about 4 hours and then try plugging it back in and turn on the power . VCR/D VD DV D â 32 23 51 32, 50 32, 50 10 23 11, 23 11, 23 30 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 86
Additional information 08 87 En 24 24 24 18 â 21 20 20, 37 44 â â SYMPT OMS POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS P A GE TV recording does not work. Timer recording does not work. Noise bars on screen. ⢠The erase pre vention tab of the video cassette is brok en off. ⢠The unit is in the e xternal input mode. ⢠The time is not set correctly . ⢠The recording star t/end time is not set correctly . ⢠TIMER REC has not been pressed ( is not lit). â¢T ra c king adjustment be yond r ange of automatic tracking circuit. Tr y Manual trac king adjustment. ⢠Video heads are dir ty . ⢠The tape is worn or damaged. 46,52 22 60 58, 61 48 87 â No 4:3 (16:9) picture. No on-screen display . Nothing appears in the displa y window . No surround sound. The unit or remote operation k ey is not functioning. Pla yback does not start when the title is selected. A udio soundtrac k and/or subtitle language is not changed when you pla yback a D VD . No subtitles. I can't change the subtitles. Angle cannot be changed. â â appears on the screen. ⢠The setup does not match your TV . ⢠Select Displa y âÂÂONâÂÂ. ⢠Check the DIMMER setting f or SETUP . ⢠The setup does not match your stereo system. â¢T ur n off the unit and unplug the AC pow er cord f or sev eral min- utes, then replug it. ⢠Check the P arental setup. ⢠Multilingual language is not recorded on the D VD disc. ⢠Some discs hav e no subtitles. ⢠Subtitles are cleared. Press SUBTITLE. ⢠Subtitles on a DivX î file cannot be changed. ⢠Multi-angles are not recorded on the D VD disc. ⢠The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc. VCR O THER Good Picture Snowy Picture Video Head Clogging The video heads record and playback pictures and sound on the video tape. In the event that they become dirty you won't be able to do a perfect recording and the playback picture will be extremely snowy. Also, keep in mind that a poor tape quality and a damaged cassette may contribute to the rapid accumulation of dirt on the heads. Video head cleaning VIDEO HEAD CLEANING Video head cleaning is needed when the playback picture becomes unclear. This signifies that the heads are getting dirty and can occur when playing poor quality or damaged tapes. If the heads require cleaning, use a equivalent high quality chemical non-abrasive (wet) head cleaning tape or have them cleaned professionally. If playing a head cleaning tape in the VCR once does not improve the picture, play it several times before requesting service. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE VIDEO HEADS OR SERVICE THE UNIT BY REMOVING THE TOP COVER. NOTES: ⢠Video heads may eventually wear out and should be replaced when they fail to produce clear pictures. ⢠To help prevent video head clogging, use only good quality VHS tapes. Discard worn out tapes. Resetting the recorder If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory settings. 1 Make sure that the recorder is on and remove the disc . 2 Press and hold and press STANDBY/ON . The recorder turns off with all settings reset. 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 87
Additional information 08 88 En Handling video tapes Please do not use the f ollowing kinds of video tape: - Dusty or mouldy tape -T ape on which liquid has been spilled -T ape which has been broken and then repaired -T ape which has become unwound from the spools in the cassette ⢠Dir ty heads and very long length, thin video tape can cause problems such as une v en pla yback. ⢠When using a new video tape , f ast-forw ard to the end, then rewind it bac k to the star t before using. â¢A v oid dropping video tapes or exposing them to se- v ere vibr ation. Storing video tapes ⢠After using a video tape, re wind it back to the begin- ning and return to its case. ⢠Do not store tapes: - in excessiv ely dusty places - in excessiv ely hot or humid places - in direct sunlight - near air-conditioners or heaters - near strong magnetic fields Moving the recor der If you need to mo ve the recorder , first remov e the disc and the cassette, if the y are loaded, and close the disc tra y . Next press ST ANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby . Lastly , disconnect the power cord. Hints on installation We w ant you to enjoy using this unit f or years to come, so please bear in mind the f ollowing points when choos- ing a suitable location f or it: Do... î Use in a well-v entilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, le vel surf ace, such as a tab le, shelf or stereo rac k. Don't... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity , including near radiators and other heat- generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the recorder will be e xposed to direct sunlight. î Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room where it will be e xposed to excessiv e cigarette smoke . î Place directly on top of an amplifier , or other com- ponent in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as y ou ma y expe- r ience interference-especially if the tele vision uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder may be e xposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or car pet, or cov er with cloth- this ma y prev ent proper cooling of the unit. î Place on an unstable surf ace, or one that is not large enough to suppor t all four of the unit's f eet. Other (Additional inf ormation) Handling discs When holding discs of any type , take care not to lea ve finger prints, dir t or scratches on the disc surf ace. Hold the disc by its edge or b y the center hole and edge. Damaged or dir ty discs can affect pla yback and record- ing performance. T ak e care also not to scratch the label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc becoming unus- able . Should a disc become marked with fingerpr ints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dr y cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge as shown in the diagram below . If necessar y , use a cloth soak ed in alcohol, or a commercially av ailable CD/D VD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly . Ne ver use benzine , thinner or other cleaning agents, in- cluding products designed for clean- ing vinyl records . Storing discs Although CDs and D VD discs are more durable than vinyl records, y ou should still take care to handle and store discs correctly . When you're not using a disc , re- turn it to its case and store upr ight. Av oid leaving discs in e xcessively cold, humid, or hot en vironments (includ- ing under direct sunlight). Don't glue paper or put stick ers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other shar p-tipped writing in- strument. These could all damage the disc. F or more detailed care inf or mation see the instructions that come with discs. Do not load more than one disc into the recorder . Damaged discs Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder . If you can see that a disc is crack ed, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up dam- aging the recorder . This recorder is designed f or use with conv entional, fully circular discs only . Use of shaped discs is not recom- mended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. Cleaning the pickup lens The D VD recorder's lens should not become dir ty in normal use, but if f or some reason it should malfunc- tion due to dust or dir t, consult your nearest Pioneer- authorized ser vice center . Although lens cleaners for CD pla yers are commercially av ailable, we do not rec- ommend using them since some may damage the lens . 88 En 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 88
Additional information 08 89 En Specifications Note: The specifications and design of this product ar e subject to change without notice, due to improvement. GENERAL Po w er supply: Po w er consumption: W eight: Dimensions: Operating temperature: Operating humidity: Input Lev el: Output Le vel: Program: Po w er off memory: VCR section Signal system: Video head: A udio tr ack: Channel cov erage: RF channel output: F .FWD/REW Time: Hi-Fi F requency Response: Hi-Fi Dynamic Range: D VD section Signal system: Applicable disc: Recording format: Recording discs: Recording time: (based on a 4.7GB disc) A udio char acteristics frequency response: S/N Ratio: Harmonic distor tion: Wo w and flutter : Output: Pickup: A CCESSORIES: AC 230V 50Hz Operation: 31W Standby: 5.5W (if display windo w is off.) 5.0 kg Width : 430 mm Height : 90 mm Depth : 320 mm 5 ð C to 35 ðC Less than 80% RH SCART-socket: Video : 1 Vp-p, 75 ⦠Audio : 500 mV, 50k ⦠Audio IN jack: 500 mV, 50k ⦠SCART-socket: Video : 1 Vp-p, 75 ⦠Audio : 500 mV, 1k ⦠Audio OUT jack: 500 mV, 1k ⦠12 programs / 1 month Approx. 30 min PA L NTSC tape playbac k with P AL/60 Hz 4 Rotar y Heads Hi-Fi Sound - 2 T rac ks / MONO Sound - 1 T rac k 21-69 UHF channel 36 (23 to 69) Approx. 1 minute and 12 seconds (with E-180 Cassette T ape)(at 25ÃÂC) 20Hz to 20,000Hz More than 75dB PA L D VD (12cm, 8cm), CD (12cm, 8cm) D VD-Video Recording (VR mode) D VD-VIDEO (Video mode) D VD-RW , D VD-R XP: Appro x. 60 min SP: Appro x. 120 min LP: Approx. 240 min EP: Appro x. 360 min D VD: 4Hz - 22kHz CD: 4Hz - 20kHz 90dB Less than 0.06% Less than 0.01% Wrms Video : (RCA) 1 Vp-p/75 ⦠A udio : (RCA) âÂÂ12 dBm/1k ⦠Digital Audio : 0.5Vp-p/75 ⦠CD : W av elength: 780 nm Maximum output pow er : 8.5 mW D VD : W av elength: 660 nm Maximum output pow er : 120 mW Remote control x 1 75 ⦠Coaxial Cable x 1 21 pin SCART Cab le x 1 Dr y cell batter y (AAA/R03) x 2 Operating Instructions 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 89
Additional information 08 90 En 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 90
Additional information 08 91 En 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 91
Published by P ioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2005 Pioneer Corporation . All rights reserved. VRB1404-B PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: (905) 479-4411 P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 656-472-1111 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002E P rinted in Malaysia J2H30301B SH 05/10 X 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 92
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A_En CAUTION The ST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En W ARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230V or 120V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . This product complies with the Low V oltage Directive (73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives (89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC). D3-4-2-1-9a_En Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. To ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. D3-4-2-1-8_A_En The following caution label appears on your unit. Location: inside of the unit CAUTION ATTENTION CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM. DRW2247 - A RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B QUAND OUVERT. ÃÂVITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU. ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÃÂ LING VED ÃÂ BNING. UNDGÃÂ UDSÃÂTTELSE FOR STRÃÂ LING. VARNING KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÃÂ LNING NÃÂR DENNA DELÃÂRÃÂPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSÃÂTTA DIG FÃÂR STRÃÂ LEN. VARO! AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÃÂKYVÃÂLLE JA NÃÂKYMÃÂTTÃÂMÃÂLLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSÃÂTEILYLLE. ÃÂLÃÂ KATSO SÃÂTEESEEN. PRECAUCIAÃÂN CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACIÃÂN LÃÂSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICIÃÂN A LOS RAYOS LÃÂSER. VORSICHT BEI GEÃÂFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GERÃÂTEINNEREN VORHANDEN. AUGEN NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHLAUSSETZEN! 2H30301B_En_01_03 8/4/05, 19:18 2
W ARNING To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to impr ove heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 10 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ovided for ventilation to ensure r eliable operation of the product, and to pr otect it from overheating. T o prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 C â 35 C ( 41 F â 95 F); less than 80 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long- term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En Do not connect either wire to the earth terminal of a three pin plug. NOTE After replacing or changing a fuse, the fuse cover in the plug must be replaced with a fuse cover which corresponds to the colour of the insert in the base of the plug or the word that is embossed on the base of the plug, and the appliance must not be used without a fuse cover . If lost replacement fuse covers can be obtained from your dealer . Only 5 A fuses approved by B.S.I or A.S.T .A to B.S.1362 should be used. D3-4-2-1-2-2_En The wires in this mains lead are colour ed in accordance with the following code: Blue : Neutral Brown : Live If the plug provided is unsuitable for your socket outlets, the plug must be cut off and a suitable plug fitted. IMPOR T ANT FOR USE IN THE UNITED KINGDOM The cut-off plug should be disposed of and must not be inserted into any 13 amp socket as this can result in electric shock. The plug or adaptor or the distribution panel should be provided with 5 A fuse. As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ; The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured black. The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured red. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling. Private households in the 25 member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one). For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal. By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the environment and human health. 2H30301B_En_01_03 8/4/05, 19:18 3
4 En * WMA (Windows Media TM A udio) compatibility Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or register ed trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. 01 Before using y our unit Precautions ............................................................ 6 Accessories ............................................................ 7 Features ................................................................. 8 Disc ........................................................................ 9 Discs which can be pla yed bac k ......................... 9 Discs on which video can be recorded ............. 10 Recording f or mat .............................................. 10 Disc playbac k in other players .......................... 11 Pa r ts and functions .............................................. 12 F ront ................................................................. 12 Rear .................................................................. 12 Displa y window ................................................. 13 Remote control ..................................................... 14 Basic connections ................................................ 16 Playbac k connection ............................................ 16 02 V arious settings A utomatic TV tuning and clock setting ................. 18 SETUP MENU ...................................................... 19 Using the SETUP MENU .................................. 19 Setting the language ............................................ 20 OSD LANGU A GE ............................................. 20 D VD MENU ....................................................... 20 A UDIO .............................................................. 20 SUBTITLE ......................................................... 20 Setting the parental control .................................. 21 Selecting parental control ................................. 21 T emporarily cancelling parental control ............ 21 Setting the clock ................................................... 22 Setting the disc .................................................... 22 REFORMA T ...................................................... 22 NEW DISC FORMA T ........................................ 23 FINALISE .......................................................... 23 PRO TECT DISC ............................................... 23 UNDO FINALISE .............................................. 23 Other (SYSTEM SETUP) ..................................... 24 DIMMER (Brightness of the display windo w) .... 24 DISPLA Y/CALL (T urning the screen display âÂÂONâ or âÂÂOFFâÂÂ) ................................................. 24 Setting the screen ................................................ 24 TV SCREEN ..................................................... 24 STILL MODE .................................................... 25 NO NOISE BACKGR OUND ............................. 25 BRIGHTNESS .................................................. 25 D VD OUTPUT ................................................... 25 A V3 INPUT ....................................................... 25 Setting the audio .................................................. 26 DRC .................................................................. 26 EXTERNAL A UDIO INPUT ............................... 26 NICAM .............................................................. 26 DOLBY DIGIT AL OUTPUT ............................... 26 Setting the recording ............................................ 26 INITIAL REC TO ............................................... 26 INITIAL REC MODE ......................................... 26 AU TO CHAPTER .............................................. 27 INDEX PICTURE .............................................. 27 BILINGU AL RECORDING ................................ 27 Setting the other ................................................... 27 JPEG INTER V AL .............................................. 27 DivX î VO D ........................................................ 27 Setting the channel .............................................. 28 A utomatic station presetting ............................. 28 To skip a channel position ................................. 28 Replace TV station positions ............................ 29 Manual TV station presetting ............................ 29 03 Disc playbac k Playbac k procedure ............................................. 30 Playbac k by selecting a title ................................. 31 Checking media inf ormation ................................. 32 Special pla yback .................................................. 33 F ast forward pla ybac k ....................................... 33 Re view pla yback ............................................... 33 Still pla yback ..................................................... 33 Fr ame advance ................................................. 33 Slow motion pla yback ....................................... 33 Locating a chapter or track ............................... 33 Commercial skip ................................................... 34 Locating a specific scene ..................................... 34 Repeat pla yback ............................................... 35 One touch repeat .............................................. 35 A-B repeat pla yback ......................................... 35 Title, Chapter repeat pla yback .......................... 35 Title selection ....................................................... 36 D VD menu ............................................................ 36 Changing angles .................................................. 37 Zooming ............................................................... 37 Subtitles ............................................................... 37 Changing soundtrack language ........................... 38 Karaoke pla yback ................................................. 38 Va r ious operations on CD .................................... 39 MP3/WMA*/JPEG/DivX î playbac k ....................... 41 PROGRESSIVE scan .......................................... 45 Contents 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:18 4
5 En : D VD-Video : D VD-R : D VD-RW in VR mode : A udio CD and CD-R/CD-R W : D VD-RW in Video mode : Video tape Media mark Each applicable media are indicated using the symbol sho wn below . Editing an original title .......................................... 70 Adding a chapter mark ..................................... 70 Combining chapters .......................................... 71 Changing an original title name ........................ 72 Erasing a scene (Edit title) ................................ 73 Erasing an original title ..................................... 74 Changing a disc name ......................................... 75 Changing a disc name ...................................... 75 Using the ke yboard screen ............................... 76 07 Dubbing Dubbing a tape onto a disc .................................. 78 Dubbing a disc onto a tape .................................. 79 Dubbing using other equipment ........................... 80 08 Additional inf ormation Glossar y ............................................................... 82 Screen sizes and disc f ormats ............................. 83 Language code list ............................................... 84 Error/W arning message list .................................. 85 Problems and troub leshooting ............................. 86 Video head cleaning ............................................ 87 Other (Additional information) .............................. 88 Handling discs .................................................. 88 Storing discs ..................................................... 88 Damaged discs ................................................. 88 Cleaning the pickup lens ................................... 88 Handling video tapes ........................................ 88 Storing video tapes ........................................... 88 Moving the recorder .......................................... 88 Hints on installation .......................................... 88 Specifications ....................................................... 89 04 T ape playbac k Loading and unloading a cassette tape ............... 46 Cassette tape playbac k ........................................ 47 Special pla yback .................................................. 48 Picture search ................................................... 48 Still picture ........................................................ 48 Slow motion ...................................................... 48 Fr ame by F rame picture .................................... 48 Adjusting trac king condition .............................. 48 Repeat pla yback ............................................... 48 Commercial skip ............................................... 48 To displa y VCR oper ation status ....................... 48 ZERO RETURN function ...................................... 49 Video inde x search system .................................. 49 05 Recording Read this bef ore recording on disc ...................... 50 T ypes of disc ..................................................... 50 Recording modes ............................................. 50 Disc remaining time .......................................... 51 Images that cannot be recorded ....................... 51 Recording a TV program ...................................... 52 One-touch Timer Recording (OTR) ...................... 54 VIDEO Plus î programming system .................... 55 Checking the channel setup to use the VIDEO Plus system .................................. 55 Setting the timer program using the VIDEO Plus system .................................. 56 Timer recording .................................................... 59 Stereo recording and playbac k ............................ 62 06 Editing the disc Editing the disc ..................................................... 63 Editing a playlist ................................................... 64 Creating a pla ylist ............................................. 64 Changing a title name ....................................... 65 Erasing a scene (Edit title) ................................ 66 Combining the title ............................................ 68 Erasing a pla ylist ............................................... 69 DVD-Video VR mode Video mode DVD-R CD VCR 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:18 5
6 En Before using your unit 01 Precautions Follow Instructions â All operating and maintenance instructions should be followed and warnings adhered to. Cleaning â Unplug this product from the wall socket before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Accessories â Do not use accessories not recom- mended in this operation manual as they may be hazardous. Water and Moisture â Hazard of electric shock â Do not use this product near water or in rainy/moist situations. Placing or Moving â Do not place on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. Power Cord Protection â Power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them. Pay particular attention to plugs and the point from which the cords exit the product. Lightning â For added protection of this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, disconnect it from the wall socket. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power- line surges. Overloading â Do not overload wall sockets and extension cords as this can result in risk of fire or electric shock. Objects and Liquid â Never allow objects of any kind or liquids to be pushed/spilled into this product through openings as they may come into contact with dangerous voltage or other hazards. Do not place any objects, such as vases or lighted candles on the product. Servicing â Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service â Disconnect this product from the wall socket and all power sources including batteries, and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is dam- aged. b) If any liquid has been spilled onto, or objects have fallen into the product. c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water. d) If the product does not operate normally even if you follow the operation manual. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operation manual. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operating condition. e) If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance. This indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts â When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts that are specified or that have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorised substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards. Safety Check â Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in safe operating order. MOISTURE CONDENSATION - DO NOT OPERATE THIS VCR/DVD FOR AT LEAST TWO OR THREE HOURS WHEN MOISTURE IN THE AIR CONDENSES ON THE VCR/DVD. WHAT IS MOISTURE CONDENSATION? When cold liquid is poured into a glass, for example, water vapour in the air will condense on the surface of the glass. This is called moisture condensation. MOISTURE WILL CONDENSE ON THE UNIT IN THE FOLLOWING CASES; ⢠When you move this VCR/DVD from a cold to a warm place. ⢠After heating a cold room or under extremely humid conditions. WHEN YOU EXPERIENCE THE ABOVE CONDI- TIONS; Plug the power cord into the wall socket, turn on the unit and leave at room temperature until moisture condensation disappears. Depending on the surrounding conditions, this may take from two or three hours. Impor tant W arning Please read this page carefully before attempting to oper ate your VCR/D VD . 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:18 6
7 En Before using your unit 01 * Recording and pla yback of any material ma y require consent. Please ref er par ticular ly to the provi- sions of the cop yright Act 1956, the Dramatic and Musical P erf ormers Protection Act 1958, the P erformers Protection Acts 1963 and 1972 and to any subsequent statutor y enactments and orders. * Unauthorised recording of copyrighted television prog rams, films , video cassettes and other materials may infringe the rights of copyright owners and be contr ar y to cop yright laws. Copyright Remote control Tw o AAA/R03 siz e batteries for the remote control 21 pin SCAR T cable 75 ⦠coaxial cable Accessories 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:18 7
8 En Before using your unit 01 Features Playbac k function Title menu Recording function Timer recording Y ou can program the recorder to record up to 12 programs , up to a month in advance , using the VIDEO Plus î system* 1 f or easy programming if y ou w ant. As well as single programs , you can specify daily or weekly recordings, too . *1 VIDEO Plus and PlusCode ar e register ed trademarks of Gemstar Development Corporation. The VIDEO Plus system is manufactur ed under license from Gemstar Development Corporation. Edit function Editing recorded material without c hanging the original titles Y ou can create a pla ylist based on the or iginal titles. The playlist w onâÂÂt aff ect the original titles. If you erase the playlist, the original titles remain. It is recom- mended to create and edit the pla ylist to prev ent impor tant titles from being erased accidentally . Chapter mark Y ou can add (or delete) a chapter mark to (from) the original title. This function is useful when searching f or the scene y ou wish to watch that y ou ha ve marked with the Chapter mark function. Erasing scenes Y ou can erase an unnecessary scene from the created playlist or the original titles. Combining titles Y ou can combine se ver al original titles or playlists to a separate pla ylist. Dubbing function Dubbing a tape onto a disc or a disc onto a tape MP3/WMA/JPEG/ DivX î playbac k MP3/WMA files can be pla yed back. Also , you can display JPEG/DivX î files on the TV screen and enjoy them. The title list appears on finalised D VD-RW disc (recorded in the Video mode) and D VD-R disc. ⢠⢠Dubbing cannot be carried out when attempting to cop y a âÂÂcop y guardedâ video tape or disc. Not only can you pla yback and record video tapes , b ut y ou can also pla yback D VD discs or make recordings using D VD-RW/D VD-R discs with this unit. In addition, you can edit the programs y ou hav e recorded. A realistic, powerful, Movie Theater sound When connected to Dolby Digital and DTS compli- ant devices , you can enjo y realistic, powerful surround sound. Playbac k the scene y ou want to see immediately As D VDs do not require rewinding like video tapes , y ou can get to the scene y ou wish to watch immedi- ately . A v ariety of search functions allow you to find the scene you wish to w atch. As thumbnail images are display ed in the title menu, y ou can find the title y ou want to pla y bac k quickly . With just this one unit, you can dub ho we ver y ou like , from video tape to disc, or from disc to video tape. DVD-Video DVD-Video DVD-R VR mode Video mode DVD-R VR mode Video mode CD VR mode Video mode VCR VR mode VR mode VR mode VR mode DVD-R VR mode Video mode VCR Progressive scan-compatib le Compared to standard interlaced video, prog ressive scan effectiv ely doubles the amount of video information f ed to your TV or monitor . The result is a stable , flick er-free image. (Check y our TV/monitor for compatibility with this feature .) DVD-Video DVD-R VR mode Video mode One-touch Timer Recording (OTR) The One-touch Timer Recording f eature provides a simple and conv enient wa y to make a timed record- ing. DVD-R VR mode Video mode VCR DVD-R 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:19 8
9 En Before using your unit 01 Disc Region management information This unit is designed and manuf actured to suppor t the region management information that is recorded on a D VD disc. If the region number wr itten on the D VD disc does not correspond to the region number of this unit, this unit cannot play that disc. ⢠The region number of this unit is âÂÂ2âÂÂ. ⢠The unit will pla y D VD-Video discs mar ked with labels containing âÂÂ2â or âÂÂALL âÂÂ. Example: 2 * This unit is designed to playbac k music Compact Discs (CD) that conform to the CD standard. CDs that contain (copy- restriction) signals to protect copyrights cannot be play ed back. * About DualDisc playbac k. A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc , one side of which contains D VD content video, audio , etc. while the other side contains non- D VD content such as digital audio mater ial. The non-D VD , audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD Audio specification and therefore ma y not pla y . It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, the opposite side to that being pla yed will be scratched. Scratched discs may not be pla yable . The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. D VD-A udio content will not pla y . F or more detailed inf ormation on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manuf acturer or disc retailer. Discs which can be pla yed bac k In this unit, use only discs that meet the standard, such as those bear ing the below logo marks on the disc label surface. If you use a non-standard disc, we cannot guarantee playback. Ev en if such a disc can be play ed back, we cannot guarantee the image or sound quality . The D VD logo is a registered trademark. Media type Logo mark D VD-Video D VD-RW V er .1.0 V er .1.1 V er.1.2 Ve r .1.1CPRM suppor t Ve r .1.2CPRM suppor t D VD-R V er .2.0 (V er . 2.0/4x/8x) A udio CD* CD-R/CD-RW l 1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder befor e playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs may not play . 2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when you load a disc. However , this will not affect playback. 3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play . Model Playable DVR -7000 DVR -3100 DVR -5100H Recordable Ye s 1,2,3 Ye s 1 No No Operating D VD-Video ⢠Some operations of D VD-Video may be prohibited by the manuf acturer , or some operation methods or functions of the D VD-Video may be diff erent from the description in this manual. ⢠If you attempt an operation that is prohibited b y either the disc or the unit, a â â mark will appear on the TV monitor . For operations prohibited by the disc, see the inf ormation that came with the disc. ⢠When the menu screen or the operation guide appears during disc playbac k, follo w the displa yed inf ormation. Discs which cannot be play ed back The discs listed below cannot be pla yed bac k in general. Even if one of these can be pla yed bac k, it may not be pla yed back correctly . If a disc is played back b y mistake , extensiv ely loud sounds may blo w the speakers or ma y damage the hearing of those in hearing range. Do not playbac k the discs listed below . CDG, Photo-CD , CD-ROM, CD-TEXT , CD- EXTRA, Video CD , SVCD , SA CD , PD , D VD-R OM, D VD-RAM, D VD R/RW , D VD audio , etc. The follo wing D VD-Video discs may not be played bac k on this unit: â¢D VD-Video that do not hav e the region number âÂÂ2â or âÂÂALL âÂÂ. ⢠SECAM D VD-Video . ⢠Prohibited or business-use D VD-Video . CD-R/CD-R Ws may not be pla yed bac k for the f ollo wing reasons. ⢠Compatibility of the disc and this unit. ⢠Compatibility of the disc and the recorder used. ⢠Unfinalised discs. Do not playbac k the follo wing discs. Playbac k of these discs may cause a failure. ⢠Discs on which paper , labels or stickers are affixed. ⢠Discs that hav e sticky areas left b y adhesive tape. ⢠Special-shaped discs. PC-created disc compatibility Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be play able in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these par ticular instances, check with the software publisher f or more detailed information. Older models of D VD recorders and DVD writers may reject D VD-RW V er. 1.2 / 4x discs. If you want to share D VD-RW discs between this recorder and an older recorder/wr iter , we recommend using V er . 1.1 discs. The follo wing table shows older Pioneer D VD recorder compatibility with D VD-RW V er . 1.2 / 4x discs. 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:19 9
10 En Before using your unit 01 Discs on which video can be re- corded To record video with this unit, use the discs belo w: Media type For mat D VD-RW (V er .1.0) D VD-RW (V er .1.1 and Ve r .1.2) DV D - R (V er .2.0 and Ve r. 2.0/4x/8x) Av ailable functions VR mode VR mode Video mode Video mode Playbac k, recording and editing (Original/playlist) Playbac k, recording and editing (Original/playlist) Pla yback and recording Editing (with limitation) Pla yback and recording Editing (with limitation) Media type Logo mark D VD-RW V er .1.0 V er .1.1 V er .1.2 Ve r .1.1CPRM suppor t Ve r .1.2CPRM suppor t D VD-R V er .2.0 and V er . 2.0/4x/8x Recording f ormat This unit has two modes f or f ormatting discs for recording: VR mode and Video mode. When a blank, ne w disc is loaded into this unit, the automatic format function star ts to format the disc. (For the disc f or mat setting in this step, see page 23.) VR mode ⢠This mode can be used f or D VD-RW . ⢠In this mode, the discs can be recorded and edited repeatedly . ⢠The disc recorded in this mode can be pla yed back with other D VD-R W -compatib le play ers. ⢠When a V er.1.1 CPRM or V er .1.2 CPRM disc is used, you can record a âÂÂCopy Onceâ program (see page 51). Video mode ⢠This mode can be used f or D VD-R and D VD-RW (V er .1.1/1.2). ⢠When you finalise the disc after recording, the disc recorded with this unit can be play ed back with other D VD play ers. ⢠Recording, editing or playbac k of an unfinalised disc can be done only with this unit. Howe ver , there are some limitation to editing operations. ⢠In this mode, y ou cannot record a âÂÂCopy Onceâ program (see page 51). ⢠When you record a TV program of a bilingual broadcast, only one of the audio modes can be recorded. Y ou hav e to select it. Format modes that can be used with each disc The usable f ormat depends on the media type as shown in the below tab le. D VD-RW ⢠The disc can be erased and used again about 1,000 times. ⢠Only the VR mode can be used for V er .1.0 discs. ⢠With V er.1.1/1.2 discs , you can record b y select- ing the VR mode or Video mode. ⢠When you record in the VR mode, y ou can repeat- edly record and erase. By erasing unnecessary titles, y ou eff ectively increase remaining time . ⢠When you record in the Video mode, you can record until the disc becomes full. ⢠When you use the Video mode, you can ne wly record on the disc by f or matting the disc. How- ev er , if the disc is f ormatted, all the recorded contents will be erased. D VD-R â¢Y ou can record on the disc only in the Video mode. â¢Y ou can record until the disc becomes full. ⢠Finalising the discs allows pla yback on other D VD play ers. Howev er , the finalised discs can no longer be recorded. ⢠Discs can be recorded to repeatedly until they are finalised. NO TES: ⢠There are some pla yers that cannot pla yback discs that were recorded with this unit. We cannot guarantee the pla yback with other units . ⢠This unit cannot record on D VD-R and D VD-RW discs that are 8 cm in diameter . ⢠This unit cannot record on CD-R or CD-R W . ⢠This unit ma y not be able to record to or playbac k from discs that have been recorded on other units due to the recording conditions, surface dirt or scratches. ⢠Other units ma y not be able to record to or playbac k from discs that have been recorded on the unit due to the recording conditions, surface dirt or scratches. 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:19 10
11 En Before using your unit 01 CHAPTER 1 TITLE1 TITLE2 DVD DISC CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3 CHAPTER 1 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 TRACK 3 TRACK 4 TRACK 5 Audio-CD Disc playbac k in other player s A disc recorded in this unit can be finalised. The disc can be pla yed bac k in other play ers that can playbac k D VD-R W and D VD-R. F or more inf or mation on finalisation, see âÂÂFINALISEâ in âÂÂSetting the discâ (page 23). When recording in the VR mode Even if a disc recorded in the VR mode is finalised, y ou can record or edit b y cancelling the finalisation. (See âÂÂUNDO FINALISEâ on page 23.) When you pla yback the disc with another play er , make sure that the D VD pla yer supports D VD-RW and bears the follo wing mark. When recording in the Video mode When a disc recorded in the Video mode is finalised, it cannot be recorded onto any more. Therefore , bef ore finalisation, be sure to perform all desired recording. After finalisation, a title list that can be used by the D VD pla yer is automatically created. NO TES: ⢠The finalisation process may require from a f ew minutes up to 1 hour depending on the disc type and the amount of free space on the disc. â¢A D VD-RW V er .1.1/1.2 recorded in the Video mode cannot be recorded or edited after finalisation, but if y ou f ormat the disc by erasing all the content, you can again record on this disc. â¢A finalised disc may not pla y because of the condition of the D VD or the compatibility with the play er used f or pla yback. ⢠Some pla yers ma y not pla yback the discs recorded with this unit. W e cannot guarantee the playbac k using other players . Title/Chapter/T rac k A D VD-Video has large par titions called âÂÂTitlesâÂÂ, and smaller par titions within them called âÂÂChaptersâÂÂ. A music CD has other par titions called âÂÂT racksâÂÂ. A n umber is allotted to each par tition and these n umbers are called âÂÂtitle numbersâÂÂ, âÂÂchapter n umbersâ or âÂÂtrac k numbersâÂÂ. When recording in the VR mode One-time recording is set to 1 title (1 chapter). Howe ver , if y ou stop recording temporarily or erase scenes by editing, the chapter will automatically be par titioned. The interval between chapters can be specified. (See page 27.) When recording in the Video mode One-time recording is set to 1 title. In recording, chapters are set automatically . The inter val between chapters can be specified. (See page 27.) NO TES: ⢠The title, chapter and trac k are numbered, b ut some discs may not record the n umbers. ⢠Recording on D VD-R/RW in the Video mode is a new standard appro ved at the 2000 D VD f orum. Conf ormity to this standard varies with each D VD play er manufacturer . Some models of D VD play er or D VD-ROM drive , theref ore, will not pla yback recorded videos. 2H30301B_En_04_11 8/4/05, 19:19 11
Before using your unit 01 12 En AV3 Pa r ts and functions Rear Front ST ANDBY/ON b utton AUDIO (L/R)/VIDEO IN (A V3) jacks VCR EJECT button D VD S-VIDEO IN (A V3) jack VCR/DVD button OPEN/CLOSE button PLA Y button ST OP button FF (Fast Forward) button REW (Rewind) button REC button CHANNEL /â b uttons Disc tray Cassette Loading Slot VCR indicator DUBBING button Display window IR Remote sensor DVD indicator 2H30301B_En_12_17 8/4/05, 19:19 12
Before using your unit 01 13 En No . Displa y Description Lights during video tape playbac k. 1 NO TES: ⢠Some discs may not pla yback correctly , or chapter n umber , pla yback time , etc ma y not be displa yed. ⢠During CD playbac k, the counter display runs up to 99 M 59S and then restar ts from 00M 00S . Display windo w Video tape is temporarily stopped. Lights during video tape recording. Timer recording display . 2 4 Appears when a CD is inser ted. Appears when a CD-R is inser ted. Appears when a D VD-Video is inser ted. Appears when a D VD-R is inser ted. Appears when a D VD-RW is inserted. Appears when a D VD-RW in VR mode is inser ted. When the disc is set to video mode, VR does not appear . Video tape is in the unit. Clock displa y (Colon [ : ] flashes). Counter displa y in hour/minute/second f or VCR/D VD , minute/second f or CD . TV channel display . Tr ack number displa y for CD . The external input channel (A V1, A V2, or A V3) display . Lights during playback of D VD and CD . Flashes in auto resume. D VD or CD is temporarily stopped. Lights during D VD recording. CD CD-R DV D D VD-R D VD-RW VR 10:00 01 H 00M 00S 2CH TRK 002 A1/A2/A3 3 4 D VD recording modes. XP , SP , LP or EP can be selected in turn by pressing the REC MODE/SPEED repeatedly . 2 VCR recording modes. SP or LP can be selected in turn b y pressing the REC MODE/SPEED repeatedly . SP/LP XP/SP/LP/E P Appears when a CD-RW is inserted. CD-R W Progressiv e scanning mode. TV When the tape or disc is pla y ed back or the SETUP men u is displa yed, TV disappears. 2H30301B_En_12_17 8/4/05, 19:19 13
Before using your unit 01 14 En P age Remote control ST ANDBY/ON T ur ns power on/off. 19 VCR EJECT Ejects the cassette tapes. 46 D VD OPEN/CLOSE Opens or Closes the tra y . 30 D VD/VCR Switches to operation between VCR and D VD . 30, 47, 78, 79 0-9 Direct channel selection of TV . 52, 54 Entering a Pluscode for VIDEO Plus timer programming 56 Setting input. 20, 34, 76 Entering a password. 21 TIMER REC Sets the unit to star t recording at a preset time. 58, 61 INPUT SELECT SCART input or A V -F ront input. 80, 81 VIDEO Plus Display the VIDEO Plus program screen. 56 RETURN Close the menu window . 19, 42 CANCEL Deletes the Timer recording program. 58, 61 Cancels input data in the setting mode. 20, 77 TITLE MENU/T OP MENU Displays titles of a D VD disc. 31, 36, 39, 64 CH /â Channel selection for VCR. 52, 54 / Cursor buttons. TRK (TRACKING) /â Manual tracking in the pla yback mode for VCR. 48 / Cursor buttons. ENTER Option selection in the menu. D VD MENU Displays the menu of the D VD disc. 31, 36 SETUP Displays the setup men u. 19, 59 ST OP Stop. 30, 47, 53 PLA Y Playbac k. 30, 47 PA USE/STILL Still picture/Recording pause on/off. 33, 48, 53 SKIP / Skips chapters in the forw ard or rev erse direction. 33, 43, 72 INDEX âÂÂ/ Searches for the INDEX mark of a tape. 49 REW/SEARCH â Rewind/Re view pla yback. 33, 47, 48 F .FWD/SEARCH F ast Forward/F orward search pla yback. 33, 47, 48 ONE T OUCH REPEA T Skips the D VD playback bac k 10 seconds. 35 CM SKIP Skips commercial breaks. 34, 48 SLO W Slow motion pla yback. 33, 48 REC Recording/O TR. 52, 54, 80 REC MODE/SPEED Selects the recording mode. 52, 54, 78 DUBBING Copies VCR to D VD or D VD to VCR. 78, 79 A UDIO Changes the soundtrack language of the D VD . 38 A UDIO SELECT Switches sound between mono and stereo . 62 DISPLA Y Displays VCR or D VD operation status. 32, 48, 65 ZOOM Zoom (for D VD). 37, 43 REPEA T A-B Repeats playbac k between A and B . (D VD/CD) 35 ZERO RETURN Stops the tape when the counter reaches 00 H 00 M 00 S .4 9 COUNTER RESET Resets the counter to 00 H 00 M 00 S .4 9 ANGLE Changes playbac k angle of a D VD disc. 37, 43 SUBTITLE Selects subtitles of the D VD disc. 37 AT R Digital A UT O TRACKING. 48 PLA Y MODE Displays the pla ybac k mode. 34 REPEA T Repeats playbac k. 35, 48 CLOCK/COUNTER Changes the front panel displa y mode. 49 PROGRESSIVE Activates the progressive scanning mode . 45 2H30301B_En_12_17 8/4/05, 19:20 14
Before using your unit 01 15 En 1 23 Replace the compartment cov er . Install two AAA/R03 batteries (supplied), paying attention to the polarity diagram in the battery compartment. Open the battery compartment cover in the direction of the arrow . How to install the batteries Use dry cell batteries type AAA/R03. These batteries are offered as carbon / zinc-type. You may use both, but do not mix types. Note: Flat, weak batteries will leak. Corrosive electrolyte will damage the remote control handset. Leak proof batteries will not leak immediately when they are flat. As long as the handset is still working, there is no danger of leakage. To prevent damage, remove the batteries if you do not use the handset for several months. Damage because of leakage is not covered by the guarantee. Distance of Remote Control Operation Effective angle: approx. 60 ð approx. 7m Point the remote control directly at the remote sensor. If bright sunlight directly beams onto the unit front. If an obstacle is placed between the unit and the handset. The remote control handset will not work properly in the following cases: If the batteries have not been installed according to their polarities. If the batteries are weak. When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâ s rules that apply in your country/area. D3-4-2-3-1_En AV3 2H30301B_En_12_17 8/4/05, 19:20 15
Before using your unit 01 16 En Basic connections Connect your VCR/DVD to your main aerial and TV set as shown in the illustration. When you have finished making these connections, connect your VCR/DVD to the mains power supply (230V / 50Hz). Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet. TV AC power cord 230V/50 Hz VCR/DVD Aerial-Input To SCART socket RF-Input (from house antenna) TV Scart socket (AV1) RF-Output (to TV) Aerial Supplied Coaxial cable In addition to the coaxial cable connection, you should also connect the supplied SCART cable from the VCR/ DVD to your TV as shown. As well as transferring the high quality pictures and sound to your TV, the SCART connection can automatically switch the TV to its AV channel for playback. Connecting this unit to your TV using the SCART connections Some TVs may not allow automatic switching to the AV input channel. In this case you should manually select the AV input setting on your TV's controls when playing through this unit. Supplied SCART cable DECODER/EXTERNAL SCART Socket (AV2) Pla ybac k connection The exact arrangement you use to interconnect various video and audio components to the VCR/DVD is dependent on the model and features of each component. Check the Operation Manual provided with each component for the location of SCART socket. SCART-cable (not supplied) If a Satellite Receiver is used, we recommend the following configuration: Connection to a Satellite Receiver To record from Satellite Receiver press INPUT SELECT on the remote control of the VCR/DVD. âÂÂA1â will appear on the front display. Select the particular satellite channel on the Satellite Receiver. Satellite Antenna Satellite Receiver VCR/DVD TV SCART-cable (supplied) 2H30301B_En_12_17 8/4/05, 19:20 16
Before using your unit 01 17 En TV To A udio (L) Input To A udio (R) Input A UDIO Cord (not supplied) Stereo Amplifier VCR/D VD A udio (R) Output SCART -cable (supplied) A udio (L) Output To SCAR T input TV SCART sock et (A V1) Connect to a Stereo Amplifier with A udio Output If your VCR/D VD is connected to a stereo amplifier , the video soundtrack can output through the loudspeakers of the stereo system. Connect to an A V Amplifier with b uilt-in digital surround (f or DVD/CD pla yback) If you are using an Amplifier with a b uilt-in digital surround as f ollows, y ou can enjo y the various audio systems such as Dolby Digital and DTS b y using the Coaxial Digital Output. Connect to a TV with Component video output (for D VD/CD pla yback) Y ou can enjo y the highest quality picture by connecting the unitâ s component video out jacks to the component video input jacks of y our TV , with component video cab les (not supplied). At shipment (with the factory settings), component video signals are not output from these component video jacks . Connect the unit to the TV with the SCART cable and change the D VD OUTPUT setting to COMPONENT . (See page 25.) 3 3 3 3 3 PROGRESSIVE outputs Some TVs or monitors are equipped with component video inputs that are capable of reproducing a progressiv ely scanned video signal. Connecting to these inputs allows you to vie w the highest quality pictures with less flick er . 3 3 3 3 3 INTERLA CED outputs Some TVs or monitors are equipped with component video inputs. Connecting to these inputs allows y ou to enjoy the highest quality D VD picture pla yback. NO TES: ⢠In connecting to a TV that are not capab le of reproducing a pr ogressively scanned video signal using the component sockets, do not select progressive scanning mode. If y ou do it, the component video outputs does not feed the correct signals and y ou can not see any picture (see page 45). ⢠When connecting to a TV using the SCART sock et, make sure that the prog ressive indicator on the displa y window is not lit. If it is lit, the video and S-Video outputs do not f eed the correct signals and you cannot see any picture. T o turn off the progressive indicator , make the progressiv e scanning mode inactive (see page 45). ⢠If the component video input jacks on a TV are the BNC type, use an adapter to conv er t the RCA jac ks from the component video cables to BNC (not supplied). TV Coaxial digital cable (not supplied) AV Amplifier with built-in various decoder as above VCR/D VD Coaxial digital Audio Output SCART -cable (supplied) To SCAR T input TV SCART sock et (A V1) Use this connection to connect an: ⢠A V amplifier with built-in *Dolb y Digital decoder ⢠A V amplifier with built-in *DTS decoder NO TES: ⢠The COAXIAL jac k only outputs the audio from the D VD section. VHS signal is output only from the SCART -sockets and A UDIO L/R jacks. ⢠When you mak e the connections abov e, do not set DOLBY DIGIT AL to DOLBY DIGIT AL or DTS to ON on the AV Amplifier . If you do , a loud noise will suddenly come out from the speakers, aff ecting your ears or causing the speakers to be damaged. ⢠DTS audio is only output via the COAXIAL output jac k. Y ou theref ore need to connect this unit to a suitable DTS decoder in order to hear the audio from DTS discs. When pla ying DTS-encoded CDs, only noise will be heard from the speakers or analog stereo outputs . ⢠Some DTS decoders which do not suppor t D VD-DTS interface ma y not work properly with the unit. 2H30301B_En_12_17 8/4/05, 19:20 17
V arious settings 02 18 En A utomatic TV tuning and c loc k setting Plug in your unit into the mains supply and it will start to automatically tune itself in and set the correct date and time. After setting itself up, you must set the TV to the video channel. ONLY WHEN YOU PLUG IN THIS UNIT FOR THE FIRST TIME, THE AUTOMATIC SETUP WILL BE AVAILABLE. ST ANDBY/ON CHANNEL / â AV3 4 If there is interference from an adjacent broad- cast channel in the picture (wa vy lines, picture roll, etc.), press the CHANNEL / â buttons on y our unit to select any other RF channel betw een 23 and 69, retuning your TV until the word âÂÂTESTâ flashes on the TV screen. If you con- nected a satellite receiver as e xplained on page 16, you must s witch off the VCRâ s transmitter . Press the unitâ s CHANNEL / â b uttons repeatedly until OFF appears in the display windo w (OFF will appear after 69 or before 23). 5 Press the ST ANDBY/ ON button to turn OFF the unit. Now the TV is tuned to your unit. NO TES: ⢠The unit automatically corrects the clock setting every hour and automatically adjusts the clock setting for Daylight Saving Time. ⢠Your unit will tune the TV stations as follows. CH 1 BBC 1 CH 5 Channel 5 CH 2 BBC 2 CH 6 Satellite CH 3 ITV CH 7 etc. CH 4 Channel 4 ⢠If you want to change the RF output channel or switch to âÂÂOFFâÂÂ, press and hold the STANDBY/ON button on the front of your unit in the Standby mode until the current RF output channel appears. Press the CHANNEL / â buttons on your unit to select the RF channel you desire. Preparation: ⢠Make sure that your unit is connected properly to the TV. ⢠If a satellite receiver is connected with the coaxial lead, make sure itâÂÂs switched ON and set to SKY ONE. ⢠Turn on the TV and select the channel you wish to allocate for video use. 1 Plug in your unit's plug into the mains supply . âÂÂA utoâ will star t to flash in the unit displa y . And also âÂÂA UTO TUNINGâ will be displa yed on the TV screen. Y our unit will automatically tune itself in and set the correct time and date (Depending on the reception condition, it may tak e approx. 10 minutes.) 2 Press and hold the ST ANDBY/ON b utton on the front of your unit in the Standby mode until RF output channel âÂÂ36â will appear in the unit displa y . 3 If you ha v e used a 21 pin scar t lead you now , simply select the A V channel on y our TV and go to step 5. T une the TV in the same wa y as tuning in a TV broadcast station until the word âÂÂTESTâ flashes on the TV screen. Ref er to the TV operating instructions for tuning. Now the output from the unit is tuned to this channel. Whene ver y ou w ant to pla y back a tape , select this channel. 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 18
V arious settings 02 19 En SETUP MENU The SETUP MENU consists of several menus where you can make v arious settings concerning language, audio functions, and images. In addition, this menu inc ludes a cloc k, channel and other things that require setting just after pur- c hase. For details of each menu, see the corresponding section in this chapter . Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Press ST ANDBY/ON b utton to turn on the VCR/ DV D . Using the SETUP MENU The follo wing e xample shows the basic setting procedure of the SETUP MENU . The remote control ke ys that operate the SETUP MENU are displa yed at the bottom of the screen. TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP OTHER LANGUAGE P ARENT AL CLOCK DISC SETUP OTHER SETUP MENU TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU LANGUA GE P ARENT AL CLOCK DISC SETUP O THER LANGUA GE OSD LANGUA GE D VD MENU A UDIO SUBTITLE ENGLISH ENGLISH AUT OMATIC ENGLISH TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU LANGUA GE P ARENT AL CLOCK DISC SETUP O THER LANGUA GE OSD LANGUA GE D VD MENU A UDIO SUBTITLE RETURN SETUP ENTER BA CK END ENGLISH ENGLISH AUT OMATIC ENGLISH SELECT ENGLISH FRANCAIS ESP ANOL DEUTSCH IT ALIANO O THER AUT OMATIC OFF ENTER 1 Press SETUP while the D VD and video tape are stopped. The SETUP MENU screen will appear . 3 Press or to select the desired submenu and press ENTER . The screen for the selected submen u will appear . 4 Press or to select the desired item y ou w ant, and press ENTER. Selectable items will be listed. 5 Press or to select the desired item and press ENTER. This completes the setting procedure. ⢠To return to the pre vious screen, press RETURN . ⢠To close the SETUP MENU , press SETUP . NO TES: ⢠F or items that require different operations from the basic setting procedure, the setting procedure is described in each individual section. ⢠The item which is indicated by red colour cannot be selected. 2 Press or to select the desired menu and press ENTER . The submenu screen of the selected menu will appear . 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 19
V arious settings 02 20 En Setting the language Y ou can c hoose the language of the menu screen, D VD menu, DVD audio and subtitles. Preparation: ⢠T urn ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select âÂÂLANGU A GEâ from âÂÂSYSTEM SETUPâ . Fo r the procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. OSD LANGU A GE Y ou can set the language f or on screen display . Select âÂÂOSD LANGU AGEâ and select the language from the list below . Selectable languages: ENGLISH, FRANCAIS, ESP ANOL, DEUTSCH, IT ALIANO D VD MENU When sev eral menu languages are recorded on a DV D, you can select the language to be used for the D VD menu. Select âÂÂD VD MENUâ and select the language from the list below . Selectable languages: ENGLISH, FRANCAIS, ESP ANOL, DEUTSCH, IT ALIANO The selected language is the first priority menu language. O THER If you w ant to select another language, bef ore pressing ENTER, input the language code by using the n umeric ke ys . (See the Language code list on page 84). Then press ENTER . ⢠If you input a wrong number , press CANCEL . A UDIO When sev eral audio languages are recorded on a DV D, you can select the audio language to be pla yed back. The selected language remains in effect after the power is turned off or the disc is replaced. Select âÂÂA UDIOâ and select the audio language from the list below . Selectable languages: ENGLISH, FRANCAIS, ESP ANOL, DEUTSCH, IT ALIANO The language you ha ve selected will pla y if it is recorded on the disc. ORIGINAL The unit will select the first prior ity language of each disc. O THER If you w ant to select another language, bef ore pressing ENTER, input the language code by using the n umeric ke ys . (See the Language code list on page 84). Then press ENTER . ⢠If you input a wrong n umber , press CANCEL . NO TE: If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the first-prior ity language is selected. SUBTITLE When sev eral subtitles languages are recorded on DV D, you can select the language to be used for the subtitles. The selected language remains in eff ect after the power is turned off or the disc is replaced. Select âÂÂSUBTITLEâ and select the menu language from the list below . Selectable languages: ENGLISH, FRANCAIS, ESP ANOL, DEUTSCH, IT ALIANO The subtitle is display ed with the selected language if it is recorded on the disc. O THER If you w ant to select another language, bef ore pressing ENTER, input the language code by using the n umeric ke ys . (See the Language code list on page 84). Then press ENTER . ⢠If you input a wrong n umber , press CANCEL . AU T OMA TIC ⢠The unit will automatically select the same language in the A UDIO setting. ⢠When the unit selects the same language as the A UDIO setting, the subtitles will not appear during playbac k. ⢠When you do not use the same language as the A UDIO setting, the subtitles will appear during playbac k. OFF Subtitles do not appear . NO TE: If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the first-prior ity language is selected. TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU LANGUA GE P ARENT AL CLOCK DISC SETUP O THER LANGUA GE OSD LANGUA GE D VD MENU A UDIO SUBTITLE ENGLISH ENGLISH AUT OMA TIC ENGLISH 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 20
V arious settings 02 21 En Setting the parental contr ol Some discs are specified as not suitable for c hildren. This unit can prevent pla yback of such discs. Preparation: ⢠T urn ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â P ARENT AL â from â SYSTEM SETUP âÂÂ. For the procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. Selecting parental control Select âÂÂP ARENT AL â and select the parental control lev el. If the recorder is set to a lower le vel than the disc, it will require you to enter a pass word bef ore the disc will play . Select from lev el 1 to level 8. On a scale of 1- 8, âÂÂ1â is the most restrictive. To lock the selected parental contr ol level 1 To loc k the selected parental control level, press or to select âÂÂP ASSWORDâÂÂ. 2 Use the n umeric keys to input a 4-digit password. ⢠If you input a wrong n umber , press CANCEL . ⢠Be sure to remember this number! 3 Press ENTER. To cancel the locked parental contr ol level 1 Select âÂÂP ASSWORDâ shown in step 1 of the above section and use the n umeric keys to input the password. 2 Press ENTER. The lock ed mark â â will change to an unlock ed mark â âÂÂ. Then, you can change the parental control le vel, or enter a new pass word. ---- change to 1234 TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER LANGUA GE P ARENT AL CLOCK DISC SETUP O THER P ARENT AL P ASSWORD P ARENT AL SETUP MENU RETURN SETUP ENTER BA CK END DELETE - - - - INPUT NO. 09 CANCEL SELECT P ARENT AL OFF ENTER Y OUR DISC EXCEEDS THE P ARENT AL CONTROL LEVEL 1. P ARENT AL CONTROL LEVEL CANCEL PICTURE NO TES: ⢠The selected le vel will apply to oper ations ex ecuted after this. ⢠The unit cannot restrict playbac k of some discs. ⢠Some discs may not be encoded with specific r ating lev el information though its disc jacket sa ys âÂÂadultâÂÂ. P arental control will not wor k with those discs. ⢠If you forget the pass word, you can reset the recorder to its f actory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 87), then set a new pass word. T emporaril y cancelling parental contr ol P arental control can temporarily be cancelled with some D VDs. 1 Playbac k a D VD . (See page 30.) 2 If the D VD disc has been designed to temporarily cancel the rating le vel, the screen that f ollows the âÂÂREADINGâ screen will change. If you select âÂÂYESâ with the ENTER, the message âÂÂY OUR DISC EXCEEDS THE P ARENT AL CONTROL LEVEL 1. â will then appear . 3 If you wish to cancel the set rating le vel tempo- rar ily , select âÂÂP ARENT AL CONTROL LEVEL â with or , then press ENTER . If the pass word has been selected, the passw ord input screen will appear . Alternatively , if the pass word has not been set, playbac k will commence. If you donâÂÂt kno w (or hav e f orgotten) the pass word, select âÂÂCANCEL PIC- TUREâÂÂ. The setting screen will disappear . Press OPEN/ CLOSE to remov e the disc. 4 Use the n umeric keys to input the pass word. â¢T o interr upt the input process, press RETURN . 5 Press ENTER. 6 Playbac k will commence if the entered password w as correct. NO TE: This temporary cancellation of the rating lev el will remain active until the disc is ejected. When the disc is ejected, the original rating lev el will be set again automatically . 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 21
V arious settings 02 22 En Y ou can f ormat, protect, or finalise a disc. Preparation: ⢠T urn ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â DISC SETUP â from â SYSTEM SETUP âÂÂ. For the procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. REFORMA T Y ou can f ormat a recorded D VD-R W . Check the content of the disc bef ore f ormat. If you for mat the disc, the recorded content of the disc will be erased. To f or mat a D VD in the Video mode, select âÂÂREFOR- MA T AS D VD VIDEO âÂÂ, and to format it in the VR mode, select âÂÂREFORMA T AS D VD VRâÂÂ. The screen below will appear . ⢠When you select âÂÂST AR Tâ and press ENTER , fo r mat will star t. The screen below will appear . ⢠When format finished, âÂÂREFORMA TTING COM- PLETED PRESS ENTERâ will appear . Press ENTER , the normal TV screen will appear . ⢠When you select âÂÂCANCEL â and press ENTER, the DISC SETUP screen will appear . NO TES: â¢Y ou cannot reformat D VD-R. â¢Y ou cannot reformat a disc if the disc protection is âÂÂONâÂÂ. In such a case, be sure to cancel the disc protection (see page 23) bef ore format. ⢠During formatting, finalising and undo finalising, the progress will be shown b y âÂÂâÂÂâ in the front display window . Setting the c loc k /01/05 00:00 01 27/09/05 10:20 0 Y our VCR/D VD is fitted with a 24 hour clock. Y ou m ust set the date and time for timer recor d- ings. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â CLOCK â from the â SYSTEM SETUP â section of the SETUP MENU and press ENTER (F or the full procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19). Ex.: Setting the clock to âÂÂ10:20â September, 27th, 200 5. 1 Select the desired items using or (date, month, year , hour and minute), then press ENTER . 2 Press or to set the value of the selected item. 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to set the date, y ear and present time, and press ENTER . The SETUP MENU will close. This completes clock time setting. To set the A UTO TIME 1 Select â AU TO TIME â from âÂÂCLOCK âÂÂ. 2 Press ENTER , then press or to select ON or OFF . NO TES: ⢠In case of a power failure, the clock will continue to operate for another 30 minutes with quartzcontrolled precision. To indicate that the power failure has lasted for an excessive period of time âÂÂ0:00â will appear on the display. In this case readjust time and date. ⢠When the AUTO TIME is set to ON, the unit automatically corrects the clock setting. TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER LANGUA GE P ARENT AL CLOCK DISC SETUP O THER CLOCK CLOCK (DD/MM/YY) AU TO TIME ON 01 /01/05 00:00 SETUP MENU RETURN SETUP ENTER BA CK END SELECT SELECT ENTER TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER DISC SETUP REFORMA T AS DVD VIDEO REFORMA T AS DVD VR NEW DISC FORMA T FINALISE PROTECT DISC (VR ONL Y) UNDO FINALISE PROCEED VR PROCEED OFF PROCEED PROCEED SETUP MENU REFORMA T ST ART CANCEL REFORMA T Setting the disc 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 22
V arious settings 02 23 En NO TES: ⢠During the finalisation the cursor will move repeatedly . When the finalisation finished, âÂÂFINALISING COMPLETED PRESS ENTERâ will appear . Press ENTER , the normal TV screen will appear . ⢠The finalisation process may require a fe w minutes to about 1 hour according to disc type or the amount of free space on the disc. â¢Y ou can record or edit a finalised D VD-RW (in VR mode) by cancelling the finalising, but you cannot do these opera- tions with a D VD-RW (Video mode), or with a D VD-R. ⢠This unit may not be able to record or edit a disc which was recorded or edited using another D VD recorder . â¢Y ou cannot pla yback a disc recorded on VR mode on a unit that does not suppor t D VD-RW . â¢E v en if you finalise a disc in the Video mode, the disc cannot be play ed back in some D VD play ers. â¢A D VD-R disc can not be named after it is finalized. PRO TECT DISC Y ou can protect a disc to pre vent the content recorded on it from being er ased, edited or re-recorded. Only D VD-RW (in VR mode) can be protected. Select âÂÂPR O TECT DISC (VR ONL Y)â and select âÂÂONâ to protect the disc. To cancel the disc protection, select âÂÂOFFâÂÂ. UNDO FINALISE Y ou can cancel the finalisation of a finalised D VD-R W (in VR mode). Y ou cannot cancel the finalisation f or discs other than abo ve . Y ou can record or edit on a disc whose finalisation has been cancelled. Select âÂÂUNDO FINALISEâÂÂ, and the screen below will appear . ⢠When you select âÂÂST AR Tâ and press ENTER, the cancelling finalisation will star t. The screen belo w will appear . ⢠When you select âÂÂCANCEL â and press ENTER, the DISC SETUP screen will appear . NO TES: ⢠During the cancelling finalisation the cursor will mov e repeatedly . When the cancelling finalisation finished, âÂÂUNDO FINALISING COMPLETED PRESS ENTERâ will appear . Press ENTER , the normal TV screen will appear . ⢠The cancelling finalisation process ma y require a fe w minutes to about 1 hour according to disc type or the amount of free space on the disc. ⢠When the discâ s finalisation cannot be cancelled, y ou cannot select âÂÂUNDO FINALISEâÂÂ. FINALISING PLEASE W AIT FINALISE ST ART CANCEL NEW DISC FORMA T VIDEO MODE ST ART CANCEL INITIALIZING DISC VIDEO MODE UNFINALISING PLEASE W AIT UNDO FINALISE ST ART CANCEL NEW DISC FORMA T If you insert an unused disc, the disc is automatically for matted. If you use the D VD-R W (V er .1.1/1.2), you can select the mode to be used for automatic f or mat. Select âÂÂNEW DISC FORMA Tâ and select the mode from the list below . VR :F ormat the disc in the VR mode . VIDEO :F or mat the disc in the Video mode. When you insert an unused disc, the f ollowing message screen will appear . ⢠When you select âÂÂST AR Tâ and press ENTER, the for matting will star t. The screen belo w will appear . ⢠When format finished, âÂÂFORMA TTING COMPLETED PRESS ENTERâ will appear . Press ENTER , the normal TV screen will appear . ⢠When you select âÂÂCANCEL â and press ENTER, the normal TV screen will appear . NO TE: If a recorded disc has scratches or contamination on it, the âÂÂNEW DISC FORMA Tâ screen ma y appear . If this happens, select âÂÂCANCEL âÂÂ. FINALISE To pla y a D VD disc recorded on this unit you must finalise the disc to ensure compatibility with other D VD pla yers . In addition if you are using a D VD-R W disc you must record in Video mode. When âÂÂFINALISEâ is selected, the screen below will appear . ⢠When you select âÂÂST ARTâ and press ENTER , finalisation will star t. The screen belo w will appear . â¢W hen y ou select âÂÂCANCEL â and press ENTER, the DISC SETUP screen will appear . 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 23
V arious settings 02 24 En This section describes settings about the screen. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â VIDEO â from â AV SETUP âÂÂ. F or the procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. TV SCREEN Y ou can select the TV screen size to suit the screen image. Select âÂÂTV SCREENâ and select screen size from the list below . 4:3 Panscan It displa ys a wide picture across the whole screen with left and right edges automatically cut off. 4:3 Letter bo x Select this mode when connecting to a conv entional TV . When pla ying back a wide screen D VD disc, it displa ys a wide picture with blac k bands at the top and bottom of screen. 16:9 Select this mode when connecting to a wide-screen TV . A wide-screen picture is displayed in full siz e. NO TE: If you select â 4:3 Pan Scanâ but the DVD disc is not fo r matted in the pan scan format, the aspect ratio will be displayed as â 4:3 LetterboxâÂÂ. TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU TV SCREEN STILL MODE NO NOISE BA CKGROUND BRIGHTNESS D VD OUTPUT A V3 INPUT 4:3 Letter box AUT OMATIC ON STD RGB VIDEO VIDEO ENTER RETURN SETUP BACK END SELECT ENTER Other (SYSTEM SETUP) Y ou can turn the displa y window and screen display âÂÂONâ or âÂÂOFFâÂÂ. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â O THER â from â SYSTEM SETUP âÂÂ. For the procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. DIMMER (Brightness of the display window) Y ou ma y adjust the brightness or tur n off the display on the front panel of the unit. Select âÂÂDIMMERâ and select the displa y window status from the list below . AU T OMA TIC : When the power is on, the displa y window appears bright. When the power is off , it appears dar k. DIM : The window displa y alwa ys appears dark. OFF : When the power is on, the displa y window appears dark. When the power is off , it is tur ned off. DISPLA Y/CALL (T urning the screen display âÂÂONâ or âÂÂOFFâÂÂ) Y ou can turn off the screen display that is output to the TV screen by this unit. Select âÂÂDISPLA Y/CALL âÂÂ, and select âÂÂONâ or âÂÂOFFâÂÂ. ON : The screen display appears. OFF : Nothing but the SETUP MENU and error messages appear . ⢠In the OFF selection, The DISPLA Y button on the remote control will be av ailable . SPRACHE RA TING UHR DISC SETUP O THER TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU O THER DIMMER DISPLA Y/CALL AUT OMATIC ON ENTER RETURN SETUP BACK END SELECT ENTER Setting the screen 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 24
V arious settings 02 25 En STILL MODE Y ou can set the type of image displa yed on the TV screen when the playbac k of the D VD is stilled. Select âÂÂSTILL MODEâ and select the image to be display ed from the list below . AU T OMA TIC The field still or frame still is automatically selected. (F or normal use.) STILL BY FRAME The frame still is set. Note for the field still and frame still: ⢠Field* still Since only one field (half of the video information) is shown on the TV screen, the picture appears rough but does not shak e. â¢F r ame* still Tw o fields are alternatively sho wn on the TV screen. The picture shakes b ut the resulting picture quality is superior to the field still pictures. Field*: A field ref ers to the video inf ormation in one-half of a frame. 1 frame (screen) consists of 2 fields. Fr ame*: A frame refers to the total area occupied by each picture on the TV screen. NO NOISE B A CKGROUND When you select a channel where the broadcast has finished or no broadcast is set, the TV screen will automatically appear blue . The function abov e works when you select âÂÂNO NOISE BACKGR OUNDâ and select âÂÂONâ from the list. If you donâÂÂt w ant to use this blue bac kground function, select âÂÂOFFâÂÂ. The def ault setting is âÂÂONâÂÂ. BRIGHTNESS Y ou can control the brightness lev el of the image. Select âÂÂBRIGHTNESSâ and select the le vel from the list below . MAX : The image becomes br ighter . STD : The image is of standard brightness. MIN : The image becomes darker . D VD OUTPUT Y ou can select the output signal of D VD playbac k pic- ture to the TV screen as an RGB signal, a COMPO- NENT VIDEO signal or a S-VIDEO signal. RGB: RGB signal (A V1) COMPONENT : COMPONENT VIDEO signal S-VIDEO: S-VIDEO signal (A V1) NO TES: â¢I f you select COMPONENT , ref er to the connections shown on page 17. ⢠An RGB output is av ailable when being connected to TV using SCART connector . When you press ST OP on the front panel f or 5 sec- onds, D VD OUTPUT setting will be restored to âÂÂRGBâÂÂ. ⢠Use the appropriate connection setting for y our TV . Refer to the o wner's manual f or your TV f or details. ⢠Depending on its specifications, y our TV may not be able to receiv e RGB output from this unit. ⢠If you connect the unit to y our TV with S-VIDEO sig- nal input, a blac k and white image ma y be display ed f or around 10 seconds when you start the unit up. A V3 INPUT Y ou must select the input mode of A V3 (front A V - input). (see the upper connection on page 81) S-VIDEO: Only the S-Video signal will be (D VD only) input. (Composite video signal will be cut.) VIDEO: Only the composite video signal will be input. (S-Video input signal will be cut.) 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 25
V arious settings 02 26 En NICAM This unit is capable of NICAM stereo . Y ou can select the NICAM mode as f ollows (see page 60 f or NICAM recording and pla yback). AU T OMA TIC : to record NICAM programs OFF: to set the NICAM off DOLBY DIGIT AL OUTPUT Y ou can select the output sound from the DIGIT AL A UDIO OUTPUT on the rear panel. DOLBY DIGIT AL: to output with DOLBY DIGIT AL PCM: to output with PCM f ormat Setting the audio TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP SENDER SETUP O THER DRC EXTERNAL AUDIO INPUT NICAM DOLBY DIGIT AL OUTPUT STD STEREO AUT OMATIC DOLBY DIGIT AL A UDIO SETUP MENU ENTER RETURN SETUP BACK END SELECT ENTER This section describes audio settings. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â A UDIO â from â AV SETUP âÂÂ. For the proce- dure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. DRC DRC (Dynamic Range Control) enables y ou to control the dynamic range so as to achie ve a suitab le sound f or y our equipment. Select âÂÂDRCâ and select the le vel from the list below . MAX : Full dynamic range is maintained. STD : Full dynamic range is reduced. TV : Dynamic range is reduced. NO TES: ⢠This function works only during playbac k of Dolby Digital recorded discs. ⢠When you listen to the sound from TVâ s speaker , we recommend that you select âÂÂTVâÂÂ. ⢠The le vel of Dynamic Range Reduction ma y differ depending on the D VD . EXTERNAL A UDIO INPUT The audio mode for the audio input jac k can be selected, choosing either stereo or monaural. Select âÂÂEXTERNAL A UDIO INPUTâ and select from the list below (see page 81). STEREO : The sound is treated as stereo sound. L CH : The sound is treated as the monaural sound of the left channel. R CH : The sound is treated as the monaural sound of the right channel. This section describes recording settings. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and set it to the video input mode. ⢠Select â REC SETUP âÂÂ. For the procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. INITIAL REC T O Y ou can select the recording media that is first display ed in the item âÂÂREC TOâ on the timer recording screen. Select âÂÂINITIAL REC T Oâ and select âÂÂD VDâ or âÂÂVCRâÂÂ. INITIAL REC MODE Y ou can select the recording mode that is first display ed in the item âÂÂREC MODEâ on the timer recording screen. Select âÂÂINITIAL REC MODEâÂÂ. VCR recording modes: SP/LP D VD recording modes: XP/SP/LP/EP NO TE: F or the D VD recording mode , see page 50. And for the VCR recording mode, see page 46. TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL O THER REC SETUP INITIAL REC TO INITIAL REC MODE AU TO CHAPTER INDEX PICTURE BILINGUAL RECORDING SETUP MENU DVD SP 10MIN 0 SEC L CH ENTER RETURN SETUP BACK END SELECT ENTER Setting the recor ding 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 26
V arious settings 02 27 En Setting the other AU TO CHAPTER Y ou can automatically make chapter marks on the D VD to be recorded. Select âÂÂA UT O CHAPTERâ and select the inter val between chapter marks from the list below . OFF : The automatic chapter is not used. 5 MIN : The interval is set to 5 minutes . 10 MIN : The interval is set to 10 minutes. 15 MIN : The interval is set to 15 minutes. 30 MIN : The interval is set to 30 minutes. INDEX PICTURE Y ou can set the time that the thumbnail image is registered in the title menu of D VD-RW (VR mode). Select âÂÂINDEX PICTUREâ and select from the list below . 0 SEC : The image 0 second after a recording star t is registered. 1 MIN : The image 1 minute after a recording start is registered. 3 MIN : The image 3 minutes after a recording star t is registered. NO TE: Y ou cannot select the thumbnail image f or Video mode. BILINGU AL RECORDING In case of the recording of a bilingual program to a disc with video f or mat, you can select the recording sound. L CH : to record with left channel R CH : to record with right channel Y ou can set the s witching interval between pla yed back images in the slide sho w mode. And, you can display the registration code of DivX î VO D. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â O THER âÂÂ. For the procedure , see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. JPEG INTER V AL Y ou can select the interval time f or JPEG slide show (page 43). Select âÂÂJPEG INTER V AL â and select the switching inter val betw een images from the list below . OFF : The slide show mode is not used. 5 SEC : The inter val is set to 5 seconds. 10 SEC : The inter v al is set to 10 seconds. 15 SEC : The inter v al is set to 15 seconds. DivX î VO D In order to pla y DivX î V OD (video on demand) content on this recorder , you first need to register the recorder with your DivX î VOD content provider . Y ou do this by generating a DivX î V OD registration code, which you submit to y our provider . To display y our registration code , select âÂÂDISPLA Yâ and press ENTER . Y our 8-digit registtation code is displa yed. NO TES: ⢠DivX î V OD content is protected by a DRM (Digital Rights Management) system. This restricts playbac k of content to specific, registered devices . ⢠Resetting the recorder (as described in page 87) will not cause you to lose y our registration code . 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 27
V arious settings 02 28 En Setting the channel This VCR/D VD has a built-in tuner to receive TV broadcast transmissions. Before you recor d a TV - Broadcast, you must set and preset all a vailab le c hannels. This VCR/D VD can preset up to 80 c hannels. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Select â CHANNEL SETUP âÂÂ. For the procedure, see steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂUsing the SETUP MENUâ on page 19. A utomatic station presetting Select âÂÂA UT O TUNINGâ and press ENTER . The VCR/D VD will begin searching and storing all the broadcasting channels av ailable in y our area. While this is happening, âÂÂA UT O TUNINGâ will be sho wn on the screen. When automatic tuning process is completed, the screen will return to nor mal. NO TES: â¢Y our unit will tune the TV stations as follows . CH1 BBC1 CH2 BBC2 CH3 ITV CH4 Channel 4 CH5 Channel 5 CH6 Satellite CH7 etc. ⢠TV reception interf erence or power f ailure may result in Automatic station presetting malfunctions . In such a case repeat the setting procedure from the beginning. If the automatic tuning procedure has problems receiving some stations correctly , y ou can try to preset the station manually (see page 29). ⢠When the unit is in the auxiliary input mode, you cannot preset channels. TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER CHANNEL SETUP CH TUNING AU TO TUNING GUIDE CH SET PROCEED PROCEED PROCEED SETUP MENU ENTER RETURN SETUP BACK END SELECT ENTER To skip a channel position Unwanted channels can be skipped so that the y cannot be called up by pressing CH / â . Example: Skip the channel position 29. 1 Select âÂÂCH TUNINGâ and press ENTER . 2 Select âÂÂCHâ and press ENTER . Then select the skipping channel position number (29) and press ENTER . 3 Select âÂÂSKIPâ and press ENTER . 4 Select âÂÂONâ and press ENTER . Now this channel position is skipped. NOTE: To cancel skipping, select âÂÂOFFâ at step 4 above. CH 29 SKIP OFF CH 29 SKIP OFF 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:20 28
V arious settings 02 29 En Replace TV station positions Y ou can replace the channel positions as you lik e. Example: Replace the TV station No. 6 with position No . 2. 1 Select âÂÂCH TUNINGâ and press ENTER . 2 Select âÂÂCHâ and press ENTER . Then select the moving channel position number (6) and press ENTER . 3 Select âÂÂMO VEâ and press ENTER . 4 Select the channel position number (2) to which the selected position at step 2 abov e is to be mov ed and press ENTER . Now these channel positions were replaced with each other . CH 6 SKIP OFF MOVE 6 CH 6 SKIP OFF MOVE 6 Manual TV station presetting The Automatic station presetting function (See page 28) memorises the availab le broadcasts to suitab le CH positions. Some broadcasts may not be preset correctly b y the automatic tuning system - in this case you can tune stations manually as f ollows . Example: Presetting a station on program position 5. 1 Select âÂÂCH TUNINGâ and press ENTER . 2 Select âÂÂCHâ and press ENTER . Then select the channel position number (5) and press ENTER . 3 Select âÂÂTUNINGâ (tuning scale) and press ENTER . CH 5 SKIP OFF MOVE 5 TUNING 4 Press A (rising frequency) or B (falling frequency) once. The search star ts. It stops at each broadcast automatically . (â A â changes to â âÂÂ) Press B or A repeatedly until the desired station appears. If the broadcast is too weak (eg. with a dr ifting picture), the search will not stop . If you want to stop , press C /D or B /A . 5 If the tuned-up picture is not satisfactory , press C or D until the best picture is achiev ed. Then press ENTER. 6 Repeat the steps 2 and 5 to preset other TV stations. NO TE: Occasionally , the auto search might catch a w eak signal and stop . If the TV station signal is weak, you shouldn't store this station. In that case restar t the auto search using B or A . CH ENTER RETURN SETUP BACK END SEARCH F. TUNE 5 SKIP OFF MOVE 5 TUNING ENTER CH 5 SKIP OFF MOVE 5 2H30301B_En_18_29 8/4/05, 19:21 29
30 En Disc playback 03 READING Pla ybac k pr ocedure Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) 1 Press OPEN/CLOSE . The disc tra y will open. 2 Place a disc onto the tra y . Hold the disc, position it with the printed label side up, align it with the guides, and place it in its proper position. 3 Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc tra y . âÂÂREADINGâ appears on the screen and some discs star t pla yback automatically . â¢A menu screen ma y appear on the TV screen, if the disc has a menu f eature. In this case, press , , , or ENTER to operate a menu f eature. 4 Press PLA Y to star t playback. 5 Press ST OP to end pla yback. ⢠The VCR/D VD memor ises the stopped point, depending on the disc. â â appears on the screen for appro x. 4 seconds. â â k eeps blinking in the display until the pla yback is stopped completely . Press PLA Y to resume playbac k (from the scene point). ⢠If you press ST OP again (â â appears on the screen), the VCR/D VD will clear the stopped point. 6 Then press OPEN/CLOSE . The disc tra y opens. Remov e the disc and press ST ANDBY/ON . The disc tra y closes automatically and VCR/D VD turns off. DVD-Video VR mode Video mode DVD-R CD NO TES: ⢠If a non-compatible disc is loaded, âÂÂINCORRECT DISCâÂÂ, âÂÂREGION CODE ERRORâ or âÂÂP ARENT AL ERRORâ will appear on the TV screen according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check y our disc again (see pages 9 and 21). ⢠Some discs may tak e a minute or so to star t playbac k. â¢A prohibition symbol â â m ay appear at the upper right of the screen. This symbol means either the f eature you tried is not av ailable on the disc, or the VCR/D VD can not access the feature at this time . This does not indicate a problem with the VCR/D VD . ⢠When you set a single-f aced disc label downwards (ie . the wrong wa y up) and press PLA Y or OPEN/ CLOSE , âÂÂREADINGâ will appear and then it will change to âÂÂNO DISCâÂÂ. ⢠Some pla yback operations of D VDs may be intentionally fix ed by software producers . Since this VCR/ D VD plays D VDs according to the disc contents the softw are producers designed, some playbac k f eatures may not be a vailable . Also refer to the operation manual supplied with the D VDs. ⢠When pla ying DTS-encoded Audio CDs , excessiv e noise will be heard from the analog stereo outputs. T o av oid possib le damage to the audio system, the consumer should take proper precautions when the analog stereo outputs of the VCR/D VD are connected to an amplification system. ⢠Most discs labelled âÂÂNon PC/MAC CD F or matâ will not pla yback on this VCR/D VD . ⢠About DualDisc playbac k. A DualDisc is a new tw o -sided disc, one side of which contains D VD content video , audio , etc. while the other side contains non-D VD content such as digital audio material. The non-D VD , audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD Audio specification and theref ore ma y not play . It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, the opposite side to that being pla yed will be scratched. Scratched discs ma y not be play ab le. The D VD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. D VD- A udio content will not pla y . For more detailed inf or mation on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manuf acturer or disc retailer . 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:21 30
31 En Disc playback 03 Pla ybac k b y selecting a title When playing bac k a recorded disc, you can displa y the title menu and select the title to be played bac k. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a recorded D VD . ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) 1 Press TITLE MENU . The title menu will appear . If there are many original titles and playlists ... Before pressing TITLE MENU , press D VD MENU until âÂÂVR ORGâ or âÂÂVR PL â will appear on the upper right of the TV screen, then press TITLE MENU . The first original title or playlist will be highlighted. 2 Press or to select the title you want to pla yback. 3 Press ENTER or PLA Y . The selected title is pla yed bac k. NO TES: ⢠If you donâÂÂt display the title men u and press PLA Y , the first title is play ed bac k. ⢠When a title is play ed by selecting it from the title men u, only the title selected is play ed. ⢠When a disc that has been recorded in the Video mode is finaliz ed, a title list is automatically created that can be pla yed bac k e ven with other D VD pla y ers. Consequently , the menu bef ore finalizing is different from that of after finalizing. ⢠The title menu is used not only for pla ying back titles but also f or editing various discs and titles. For details of editing oper ation, see page 63. ⢠If you create a pla ylist, an original title and playlist appear in the title men u. For creating a pla ylist, see page 64. ⢠In case the disc includes more than 10 titles, y ou can turn to the next or the previous page . Press , then press or to display ne xt/previous page. T o return to nor mal use, press . â¢Y ou cannot s witch to the VCR mode when the title men u is showing. Press TITLE MENU to clear the title menu, then press DVD/VCR to switch to the VCR mode. ⢠The recording information of discs that hav e been recorded on other recorders ma y not be display ed. NO TE: When a disc that has been recorded in the Video mode is finalised, a title list is automatically created that can be play ed bac k ev en with other D VD play ers. Consequently , the menu bef ore finalising is different from that of after finalising. â â â â 1/1 PREV NEXT 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP PL TITLE MENU Original titles Playlist Thumbnail image Recording information DISC NAME:â â â â 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP PL REC DA TE :23/11/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP TITLE MENU REC DA TE :29/11/2005 TIME :11:30 LENGTH :00:59:45 CHANNEL :09 REC MODE :SP DISC NAME:â â â â 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP PL VR mode Video mode DVD-R 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:21 31
32 En Disc playback 03 Chec king media inf ormation V arious information on the loaded disc can be display ed on the TV screen. NO TES: ⢠The displa yed inf ormation varies with the type of media. ⢠Some inf or mation may not appear due to media type or operating conditions. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load the disc. ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) 1 Press DISPLA Y . Media inf ormation will appear. 2 Press DISPLA Y while the media inf ormation above is displa yed. The ne xt media information will appear . *The remaining time displa yed during recording may be diff erent from the actual remaining time. When you want to check the remaining time, stop recording and display the media informa- tion again. 3 Press DISPLA Y again while the media information above is displa yed. The media inf ormation will disappear . TITLE 01/35 TIME 00:25:41 CHAPTER 08/38 SUBTITLE -- / -- ANGLE 01/01 REC MODE SP A UDIO 01/03ENG Dolby Digital CLOCK 10:27 CH 3 Playback condition (playback, stop, pause and record) The number of audio languages and present language Playback elapsed time Current subtitles language Recording mode The number of titles and present title number Present channel Present time The number of angles and present angle number The number of chapters and present chapter number VR mode DVD-Video Video mode DVD-R 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:21 32
33 En Disc playback 03 Special pla ybac k F ast f orward playbac k Press SEARCH dur ing nor mal pla yback. Each press of SEARCH will increase the speed of the search (x1.5), (x12), (x24), (x60). The speed of the search is increased up to only 2 steps (x6, x16) in CD . â¢T o resume nor mal playbac k, press PLA Y . Revie w playbac k Press SEARCH during nor mal playbac k. Each press of SEARCH will increase the speed of the search (x3), (x12), (x24), (x60). The speed of the search is increased up to only 2 steps (x6, x16) in CD . â¢T o resume nor mal playbac k, press PLA Y . Still playbac k Press PA USE/STILL dur ing normal playbac k. â¢T o resume nor mal playbac k, press PLA Y . Frame adv ance Press PA USE/STILL dur ing still playbac k. One frame is adv anced each time you press PA USE/STILL. â¢T o resume nor mal playbac k, press PLA Y . Slow motion pla yback Press SLO W during nor mal playbac k or still pla yback. Each press of SLO W will change the speed of the slow â 1/2âÂÂ, â 1/4âÂÂ, â 1/8âÂÂ. â¢T o resume nor mal playbac k, press PLA Y . â¢T o resume the still playback, press PA USE/STILL . Locating a chapter or trac k Press SKIP ( ) Forward or SKIP ( ) Rev erse dur ing playbac k to locate a chapter that you want to w atch. Each time you press the b utton, a chapter or track is skipped. NO TE: There may be a slight delay between pressing the b utton and the function activation. NO TES: ⢠The unit is capable of holding a still video image or On screen displa y image on your television screen indefinitely . If you lea v e the still video image or On screen displa y image display ed on your TV for an e xtended period of time, you risk permanent damage to your television screen. Projection tele visions are very susceptible . â¢F ast forw ard and revie w pla yback does not work with a MP3/WMA/JPEG-CD . â¢F r ame advance and slow motion does not w ork with a CD . VR mode DVD-Video Video mode DVD-R CD 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:21 33
34 En Disc playback 03 Commer cial skip / Locating a specific scene Commercial skip Use this function to skip commercials while y ou pla yback. Press CM SKIP during playbac k. The time jumps to a point approx. 30 seconds later and pla yback resumes. NO TE: With some D VD-Video , the Commercial skip operation ma y not work. Locating a specific scene Specify the time recorded on the disc, chapter or title to play- back. 1 Press PLA Y MODE . The pla y mode screen will appear . 2 Press or to select âÂÂTIME SEARCHâÂÂ, âÂÂCHAPTER SEARCHâ or âÂÂTITLE SEARCHâÂÂ, and press ENTER . TIME SEARCH: Input the time until the pla yback is restar ted. CHAPTER SEARCH: Select the chapter number to be play ed back. TITLE SEARCH: Select the title number to be pla yed bac k. The screen abov e shows the displa y when âÂÂCHAPTER SEARCHâ is selected. 3 When selecting âÂÂTIME SEARCHâÂÂ, input the time until the pla yback is restarted with the n umeric keys or / / / . When selecting âÂÂCHAPTER SEARCHâ or âÂÂTITLE SEARCHâÂÂ, press or to select the chapter number or title number . 4 Press ENTER. The pla yback starts at the point you selected. NO TE: F or âÂÂREPEA TâÂÂ, see âÂÂTitle, Chapter repeat playbac kâ (page 35). NO TE: Y ou cannot s witch to the VCR mode when the play mode screen is showing. Press PLA Y MODE to clear the play mode screen, then press D VD/VCR to s witch to the VCR mode. TIME SEARCH CHAPTER SEARCH TITLE SEARCH REPEAT TIME SEARCH CHAPTER SEARCH TITLE SEARCH REPEA T CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3 DVD-Video VR mode Video mode DVD-R 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:21 34
35 En Disc playback 03 Repeat pla ybac k 1 Press REPEA T A-B during playbac k. The star t point is selected. 2 Press REPEA T A-B again. The end point is selected. Pla yback starts at the point that y ou selected. Pla yback stops at the end point, returns to point A automatically , then starts again. To resume normal playbac k, press REPEA T A-B again. âÂÂOFFâ appears on the screen. Title, Chapter repeat playbac k 1 P ress REPEA T . The play mode screen will appear . 2 Press or to select âÂÂREPEA Tâ and press ENTER . 3 Press or to select âÂÂOFFâÂÂ, âÂÂCHAPTERâ or âÂÂTITLEâ from the list. OFF: Playbac k is not repeated. CHAPTER: The chapter in playback is repeatedly pla yed back. TITLE: The title in pla yback is repeatedly pla yed bac k. 4 Press ENTER. To cancel the repeat pla yback, select âÂÂOFFâ in step 3. One touch repeat This feature can be used to repeat the last 10 seconds of viewed material on a D VD disc - then normal playbac k will continue. Press ONE T OUCH REPEA T during playbac k. The playbac k returns to a point 10 seconds earlier, then resumes playing. NO TE: If ONE T OUCH REPEA T is pressed less than 10 seconds after the beginning of the current title, it will just go bac k to the star t of that title. A-B repeat playbac k A-B repeat playbac k allows y ou to repeat material between two selected points. TIME SEARCH CHAPTER SEARCH TITLE SEARCH REPEAT TIME SEARCH CHAPTER SEARCH TITLE SEARCH REPEA T OFF CHAPTER TITLE NO TES: ⢠Some discs may not work with the repeat operation. ⢠In A-B repeat mode, subtitles near point A or B may not appear . ⢠A-B repeat does not work dur ing the Title and the Chapter repeat playbac k. â¢Y ou ma y not be able to set A-B repeat, depending on the scenes of the D VD . ⢠A-B repeat and Title , Chapter repeat does not work with a MP3/ WMA/JPEG-CD . â¢Y ou cannot s witch to the VCR mode when the play mode screen is showing. Press REPEA T to clear the play mode screen, then press D VD/VCR to s witch to the VCR mode. ⢠One touch repeat and Title , Chapter repeat playbac k does not wo rk with a CD . VR mode DVD-Video Video mode DVD-R CD 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:21 35
36 En Disc playback 03 Title selection / D VD menu NO TE: Depending on the D VD , you ma y be unable to select the title , and a âÂÂtitle menuâ may simply be called a âÂÂmenuâ or âÂÂtitleâ in the instructions supplied with the disc. Title selection Tw o or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title. 1 Press TITLE MENU/T OP MENU during playbac k. The title menu appears on the screen. ⢠Press TITLE MENU/T OP MENU again to resume playbac k at the scene when you pressed TITLE MENU/T OP MENU . 2 Press / or / to select the desired title. 3 Press ENTER . The playbac k of the selected title will start. D VD menu Some D VDs allow y ou to select the disc contents using the menu. When y ou playbac k these D VDs, you can select the subtitles language and soundtrack langua ge, etc. using the DVD menu. 1 Press D VD MENU during playbac k. The D VD menu appears on the screen. ⢠Press D VD MENU again to resume pla yback at the scene when you pressed D VD MENU . 2 Press / or / to select the desired item. 3 Press ENTER. The menu continues to another screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the item completely . DVD-Video 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 36
37 En Disc playback 03 Changing angles / Zooming / Subtitles NO TES: ⢠Depending on the D VD , you ma y not be able to change the angles ev en if multi-angles are recorded on the disc. â¢Y ou can use the P ause, Slo w , Search or Skip f eature in the z oom mode . ⢠Changing soundtrack or subtitles language is cancelled when you open the disc tra y . The initial def ault language or av ailable language will be heard and seen if the disc is pla yed bac k again. ⢠Depending on the D VD you ma y be unable to turn on, tur n off , or change the subtitles, e v en if they are re- corded on the disc. While pla ying the D VD , the subtitles may change while opening or closing the disc tra y , or while changing the title. ⢠In some cases, the subtitles lan- guage is not changed to the se- lected one immediately . Changing angles When playing bac k a disc recorded with m ulti-angle facility , you can change the angle that you are vie wing the scene from. 1 Press ANGLE during playbac k. The current angle will appear . 2 Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle is selected. Zooming This unit will allow y ou to zoom in on the frame image. Y ou can then make selections by s witching the position of the frame. 1 Press ZOOM during playbac k. The center par t of the image will be zoomed in. Each press of ZOOM will change the ZOOM âÂÂx2â , âÂÂx3â and âÂÂx4âÂÂ. 2 Press / or / to view a diff erent par t of the frame. Y ou ma y mov e the frame from the center position to UP , DO WN, LEFT or RIGHT direction. 3 In the zoom mode press ZOOM repeatedly to return to a 1:1 view âÂÂx1âÂÂ. ANGLE 1/3 Subtitles T urning the subtitles On and Off When playing bac k a disc recorded with subtitles, you can turn the subtitles on or off. Press SUBTITLE during pla yback until âÂÂSUBTITLE OFFâ appears. Changing the subtitles language Y ou can select the langua ge when playing bac k a disc recorded with multilingual subtitles. Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during playbac k until your desired language appears. The on screen display will disappear af- ter a f ew seconds. VR mode DVD-Video Video mode DVD-R 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 37
38 En Disc playback 03 Changing soundtrac k language Y ou can select the language when you pla y a multilingual disc. 1 Press A UDIO dur ing playbac k. The current soundtrac k language will appear . 2 Press A UDIO repeatedly until the desired language is selected. The on-screen displa y will disappear after a fe w seconds. Karaoke playbac k Y ou can turn the v ocal on or off recorded on the D VD KARA OKE. During D VD KARAOKE disc pla yback, press A UDIO repeatedly until the desired setting is selected. Vo. ON : The primary vocal is output when it is recorded on the disc. Vo. OFF : The primary vocal is not output. NOTES : ⢠Some Karaoke discs may not have the vocal on/off function. ⢠The on screen display will disappear after a few seconds. AUDIO 1/2 V o. OFF Dolby Digital Changing soundtrac k language / Karaoke pla ybac k A UDIO 1/8 ENG Dolby Digital A UDIO 2/8 FRA Dolby Digital NO TES: ⢠If the desired language is not heard after pressing the button sev eral times, the language is not recorded on the disc. ⢠The vocal output f eature is used during playback of Dolb y Digital (multi-channel) recorded D VD KARAOKE discs . This f eature allows you to turn off v ocal audio trac ks, or restore them f or background accompaniment. ⢠When pla ying Karaok e, connect appropriate audio equipment such as an amplifier to this unit. DVD-Video 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 38
39 En Disc playback 03 V arious operations on CD Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load the music CD . ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode . (The D VD indicator will light.) Press TITLE MENU/T OP MENU . The TRACK INFO screen will appear . This section describes the TRA CK INFO screen where m usic CDs can be pla yed bac k using the various operations. Press . The menu list will appear . NO TES: ⢠In case the disc includes more than 10 trac ks, you can turn to the next or the pre vious page. Press , then press or to displa y next/pre vious page. T o return to nor mal use, press . â¢Y ou cannot s witch to the VCR mode when the TRACK INFO screen is showing. Press TITLE MENU/T OP MENU to clear the TRACK INFO screen, then press D VD/VCR to s witch to the VCR mode. Playing bac k a selected trac k 1 Press or to select the track number you w ant to pla yback and press . 2 Press or to select âÂÂP LA Yâ from the menu list and press ENTER . The selected trac k will be play ed back. Excluding specified trac k 1 During stop, press or to select the track number y ou do not want to pla yback and press . 2 Press or to select â HIDE/SHO Wâ from the menu list and press ENTER . The selected trac k will not be play ed back. (âÂÂHâ appears at the side of the track n umber .) When you w ant to cancel the exclusion, press or to select the track n umber with âÂÂHâ and press . Press or to select âÂÂHIDE/SHOWâ from the menu list and press ENTER , âÂÂHIDEâ will be cancelled. 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 39
40 En Disc playback 03 V arious operations on CD NOTES: ⢠When pla ying a CD-R/CD-RW recorded in the MP3 or WMA fo r mat, âÂÂRANDOM PLA Yâ and âÂÂTIME SEARCHâ will not appear in the menu list. ⢠See also A-B Repeat on page 35. Random playbac k 1 Press or to select âÂÂRANDOM PLA Yâ from the menu list and press ENTER . The order of music trac ks is randomly changed. 2 Press PLA Y . Music is play ed back in random order . To cancel random pla yback, select âÂÂRANDOM PLA Yâ from the menu list again, and press ENTER . Repeat playbac k of selected track 1 Press or to select the track number y ou want to repeat pla yback and press . 2 Press or to select âÂÂREPEA T TRA CKâ from the menu list and press ENTER . 3 Press PLA Y . The selected trac k will be play ed bac k repeatedly . To cancel repeat trac k pla yback, select âÂÂREPEA T TRACKâ from the menu list again, and press ENTER . Repeat playbac k of all tracks 1 Press or to select âÂÂREPEA T ALL â from the menu list and press ENTER. 2 Press PLA Y . All tracks on CD will be pla yed back repeatedly . To cancel the repeat all pla yback, select âÂÂREPEA T ALL â from the menu list again, and press ENTER . Playing bac k programs Y ou can specify the pla yback order y ourself . 1 Press or to select âÂÂPROGRAM PLA YBACKâ from the menu list and press ENTER . 2 Press or to select to the track number that y ou want to change the order of and press ENTER . The â â mark will appear at the r ight side of the trac k number . 3 Press or to select to the track number that y ou want to specify and press ENTER . The trac k number that you select in step 2 mo ve to the bef ore position that you specified tr ack. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the pla yback order . 5 Press PLA Y . The trac ks will be play ed back in the changed order . To cancel progr am playbac k, select âÂÂEXIT PROGRAM MODEâ from the menu list and press ENTER . Playing bac k trac k by specifying the time 1 Press or to select âÂÂTIME SEARCHâ from the menu list during playbac k and press ENTER . 2 Press / or / to specify the elapsed time of the track (this will be the star ting point of playbac k) and press ENTER . Pla yback will start from the specified elapsed time. CD 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 40
41 En Disc playback 03 MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX î pla ybac k MP3/WMA files can be played back. Also, y ou can displa y JPEG/DivX î files on the TV screen. Some discs may not pla y due to the condition of the recording. Limitations on MP3/WMA/ JPEG/DivX î file playbac k: ⢠MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX î file is a disc that is standardised by ISO9660. ⢠The director y and file names of the MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX î file must correspond to the ISO standardised file names. ⢠This unit can read 200 files per director y . If one directory has more than 200 files, it reads up to 200 files, the remaining files will be omitted. ⢠The unit is able to recognise up to a maximum of 50 directories per disc. ⢠MP3/WMA files cannot be used for playbac k f or the purpose of duplicating. ⢠MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX î files may be used f or playbac k, but not f or recording. ⢠If the CD has both audio tracks and MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX î files, only audio trac ks are play ed. ⢠It may take more than one min ute f or this unit to read MP3/WMA/ JPEG/DivX î files depending on its structure. ⢠Music recorded by âÂÂJoliet Record- ing Specificationâ can be play ed back. Long file names will be cut. ⢠The music files recorded by âÂÂHierarchical File System â (HFS) cannot be play ed. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load the disc storing MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX î . ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) Using the BRO WSER screen 1 Press TITLE MENU . The BRO WSER screen will appear. 2 The MP3, WMA JPEG and DivX î files and folders stored in the disc are displa yed on the BR OWSER screen. ⢠Select a f older and press ENTER . The files in the folder appear . When the file to be display ed is selected Y ou can select the file types to be displa yed on the BR O WSER screen. 1 Press and then press or to select âÂÂSELECT FILESâ and press ENTER . The follo wing list will appear . MUSIC ONL Y : Only the MP3/WMA files appear. PICTURES ONL Y : Only the JPEG files appear . MO VIE ONL Y : Only the DivX î files appear . ALL: All files and folders appear . 2 Select one item in the abov e list and press ENTER . The display will be changed to the selected displa y type. popArt Grammy03_01.mp3 Grammy03_02.mp3 Grammy03_03.mp3 Grammy03_04.mp3 Grammy03_05.mp3 Gramm y 03_06.m p 3 T oulouse-Lautrec PLA Y SELECT FILES BRO WSER MUSIC ONL Y MUSIC ONL Y PICTURES ONL Y MOVIE ONL Y ALL CD 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 41
42 En Disc playback 03 Playing bac k MP3/WMA files 1 Press or to select MP3/WMA file. ⢠In case the disc includes more than 10 files, y ou can turn to the next or the pre vious page. (See page 39.) BRO WSER PLA Y RETURN TITLE MENU BACK END SELECT SET w01.wma w02.wma w03.wma w04.mp3 w05.wma w06.wma w07.mp3 w08.wma w09.wma w10.mp3 ENTER w02.wma w03.wma w04.mp3 w05.wma w06.wma w07.mp3 w08.wma w09.wma w10.mp3 w01.wma w01.wma 00:00:19 MODE: NORMAL REPEA T: OFF TRACK INFO RETURN PLA Y BA CK END SELECT SET TITLE MENU ENTER MP3 file specifications ⢠MP3 files must ha ve the e xtension letters âÂÂ.mp3âÂÂ. ⢠Standard, sampling frequency , and the bit rate: MPEG-1 A udio 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz 32kbps to 320kbps (constant bit r ate or v ariable bit rate) ⢠The recommend recording setting for a high quality sound is 44.1kHz of sampling frequency and 128kbps of constant bit rate. WMA file specifications ⢠When creating a WMA disc, make sure that the cop yr ight function is off . DRM (Digital Rights Management) files cannot be pla yed bac k. ⢠WMA files must hav e the e xtension letters âÂÂ.wmaâÂÂ. ⢠Standard, sampling frequency , and the bit rate: WMA version 7 and 8 32kHz, 48kbps 44.1kHz, 48kbps to 192kbps 48kHz, 128kbps to 192kbps ⢠Music files recorded as mono , 48kHz, 48kbps cannot be pla yed back b y this unit. CD 3 To return to the BRO WSER screen, press RETURN . â¢T o stop playback of the MP3/WMA files , press TITLE MENU . 2 Carry out either of the item a or b belo w . a : Press ENTER . b : Press and then press or to select âÂÂPLA Yâ and press ENTER. The TRACK INFO screen appears to pla yback the selected file . F or the details of the TRA CK INFO screen, see âÂÂV arious operations on CDâ on page 39. 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 42
43 En Disc playback 03 Playing bac k JPEG files 1 Press or to select JPEG file. ⢠In case the disc includes more than 10 files, y ou can turn to the next or the pre vious page. (See page 39.) 2 Select either a or b as below: a : Press ENTER . b : Press and then press or to select âÂÂPLA Yâ and press ENTER . The thumbnail images of the JPEG files stored in the route director y or the f older appear . Press , , or to select the pages of the thumbnail images, or select the JPEG file to be displa yed at first for the slide show . 3 Press ENTER to play the selected picture. If you ha ve set the interval time for JPEG slide show , the pictures will be play ed back one after another automatically . (See page 27.) ⢠Press ZOOM to enlarge the displa yed image . ⢠Press ANGLE to rotate the image b y 90 degrees each time. â¢T o display the next or the pre vious picture, press SKIP 7 or 6 . JPEG file specification JPEG files must hav e the extension letters âÂÂ.jpeâÂÂ, âÂÂ.jpegâ or âÂÂ.jpgâÂÂ. 4 To return to the thumbnail screen, press RETURN . â¢T o stop the slide show , press TITLE MENU . Base_ball.jpg Friend.jpg Drive.jpg party_240803.jpg practice_ski.jpg My_car.jpg ENTER RETURN PLA Y BACK END SELECT SELECT TITLE MENU CD 2H30301B_En_30_43 8/4/05, 19:22 43
44 En Disc playback 03 1 Press or to select DivX î file. ⢠In case the disc includes more than 10 files, y ou can turn to the next or the pre vious page. (See page 39.) 2 Select either a or b as below: a : Press ENTER . b : Press and then press or to select âÂÂPLA Yâ and press ENTER . The selected title is play ed back. â¢Y ou can use F ast f orward, Re view , Still, Fr ame advance and Slo w motion playbac k (See page 33). DivX î video file specifications ⢠Official DivX î Cer tified product. ⢠Pla ys DivX î 5, DivX î 4, DivX î 3 and DivX î V OD video content (in com- pliance with DivX î Cer tified techni- cal requirements). ⢠DivX î file must hav e the extension letters âÂÂ.aviâ âÂÂ.divâ or âÂÂ.divxâÂÂ. Note that all files with the .avi e xtension are recogniz ed as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX î video files and theref ore may not be pla yable on this unit. ⢠Standard, sampling frequency , and the bit rate: DivX î file A udio f or mat: MPEG1 La yer2 (MP2), MPEG1 La yer3(MP3) Bit rate 8kbps - 320kbps Sampling frequencies 8kHz - 48kHz Resolution: Max 720 x 576 (at 25fps) Max 720 x 480 (at 30fps) If the incorrect DRM file is loaded, âÂÂAuthorization Error This player is not authorized to play this video . â will appear on the screen. When you attempt to pla y DivX î VO D, the number of pla ys is lim- ited and the f ollowing message will appear on the screen. If you wish to pla y it, select âÂÂYESâÂÂ. ⢠If the number of plays goes ov er the limit, then âÂÂRental Expiredâ will be display ed, in which case the file will not be played. Playing bac k DivX î video files NO TES: â¢F or e xter nal subtitle files the following subtitle f or mat filename e xtensions are not supported: .sr t, .sub , .ssa, .smi â¢Y ou cannot change the subtitles. ⢠Skip , F rame Advance, Progr am Pla yback, Random Pla yback, Title/All Repeat, Title Search and Zooming cannot be used with DivX î files. ⢠It depends on the recording situation of the DivX î file, the start- up playback position could alter from the time you initially set up to do a âÂÂTime SearchâÂÂ. 2H30301B_En_44_45 8/4/05, 19:23 44
45 En Disc playback 03 Pr ogressive scan The unit supports the progressive scanning system as well as the con- ventional interlaced scanning sys- tem. If your TV is equipped with com- ponent video input jacks which sup- port the progressive video input, y ou can enjoy high quality picture b y making the progressive scanning mode active. Preparation: ⢠Change the D VD OUTPUT setting to COMPONENT and then con- nect the unit to a TV that is equipped with component jacks and suppor ts progressive video input. (See page 25.) ⢠Tu rn ON the TV and set it to the corresponding video input mode. ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) 1 Press PR OGRESSIVE in the stop mode. The PROGRESSIVE in- dicator â â on the display window will light. ⢠The unit recognizes the picture source (film or video) of the cur- rent disc according to the disc inf or mation. 2 Press PLA Y to star t playback. ⢠To mak e the progressiv e scanning mode inactive , press PRO- GRESSIVE in the stop mode. The PROGRESSIVE indicator â â on the displa y window will go off . Wa r n ing: Once âÂÂProgressiveâ is selected when connecting to a TV progres- sive scan incompatib le, no image will be seen on the video dis- play . In this case, y ou must reset the unit b y pressing ST OP on the front panel f or five seconds . The video output will be restored to âÂÂInter- laceâ setting, and a picture will once again be seen on a conv en- tional analog display . Different scanning modes Interlaced scan T echnology that alter nately displays odd-n umbered scanning lines and e ven-n umbered scanning lines. Also called âÂÂ576iâÂÂ, âÂÂiâ meaning âÂÂinterlaceâÂÂ. Progressive scan T echnology that simultaneously displays odd-n umbered scanning lines and ev en-numbered scanning lines from top to bottom. Also called âÂÂ576pâÂÂ, âÂÂpâ meaning âÂÂprogressiv eâÂÂ. NO TES: ⢠Some discs ma y not be play ed bac k with the progressive scan mode correctly because of the disc char acteris- tics or recording condition. ⢠There are some progressiv e TV and High-Definition TV sets that are not fully compatible with the unit, resulting in an unnatural picture when pla ying back a D VD disc in the progressiv e scan mode. In such a case, use the interlaced scanning mode. â¢Y ou cannot activate the prog ressive scan mode in the f ollowing cases: - The unit is in the VCR mode. -A D VD disc is currently pla ying. Y ou must stop pla yback first. P DVD-Video VR mode Video mode DVD-R 2H30301B_En_44_45 8/4/05, 19:23 45
46 En T ape playback 04 T ape speed and maxim um recording time Loading and unloading a cassette tape Use only video cassette tapes marked . Erase prevention tab Erase prevention tab Screwdriver Loading Push the center of the tape until it is automatically inser ted. Inser t the cassette tape with its labeled side facing up and the erase pre vention tab positioned at y our left. An inv er ted cassette tape cannot be inser ted. A utomatic po wer ON When you insert a cassette tape the VCR power will turn ON automatically . A utomatic pla yback When loading a cassette tape without an erase pre vention tab , playbac k will star t automatically . Unloading Y ou can eject the video tape while the unit is turned off. 1 Press (EJECT) on the unit or the remote control. 2 Remov e the cassette tape. A utomatic tape eject This VCR will automatically rewind the tape when the tape has ended. And when the tape is re wound to its beginning, the cassette tape will be ejected automatically . To prevent accidental erasure Remov e the erase pre v ention tab with a screwdriver . Adhesive T ape To record again Cover the hole with a piece of adhesive tape. Video cassette tape E-30 30 min. 1 hour E-60 1 hour 2 hours Standard Play (SP) Long Play (LP) E-90 1 1/2 hou. 3 hours E-240 4 hours 8 hours E-180 3 hours 6 hours Tape speed We recommend using E-180 video tapes or shor ter. VCR ⢠HQ VHS is compatib le with existing VHS equipment. 2H30301B_En_46_49 8/4/05, 19:23 46
47 En T ape playback 04 Cassette tape playback NO TES: ⢠This VCR selects the playback tape speed SP or LP automati- cally . â¢A cassette tape and D VD disc can be pla yed bac k simulta- neously . If y ou press D VD/VCR , the tape pla yback and D VD playbac k alter nate with each other on the screen. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the VCR mode. (The VCR indicator will light.) 1 Load a prerecorded tape (When loading a cassette tape without the erase pre v ention tab , pla yback will start automatically). 2 To start playbac k Press PLA Y . Pla yback will start. If the cassette has not loaded yet, will blink for approx. 4 seconds. To stop playbac k Press ST OP once. The tape will stop but remain fully loaded and ready to pla y . To rewind the tape or forward it rapidly Press ST OP . To rewind the tape: Press REW . To stop the tape winding, press ST OP . To s witch to playback directly (without ST OP ), press PLA Y . Forward/Re verse picture sear ch mode When the tape is being wound, you can s witch to picture search mode (see next page). T o do this, press REW or F .FWD and hold it down. The unit will resume the tape winding as soon as the button is released. To forwar d the tape: Press F .FWD . NTSC video cassette playback When using a pre-recorded NTSC video cassette tape, the connected TV set must be compatible with a 60Hz vertical frequency (sometimes known as a PAL 60Hz feature). Otherwise the on-screen picture will be affected by vertical rolling. Even if your VCR set is capable of processing NTSC video signals, the picture may be shortened vertically (appearance of black bars at the top and at the bottom of the TV screen). The dubbing of a NTSC video cassette tape to a standard PAL VCR is not possible. VCR 2H30301B_En_46_49 8/4/05, 19:23 47
48 En T ape playback 04 Special playback NO TES: ⢠The audio output is muted during SPEED SEARCH, STILL, FRAME AD V ANCE and SLOW MO TION. ⢠Dur ing picture search mode there will be noise bars which are caused by the system. ⢠The Special Playback will automatically change to playbac k after appro x. 5 minutes to protect the video tape against excessiv e wear . Repeat playbac k The entire video tape will be play ed until its end. The tape will then automatically rewind to the beginning and the playbac k will be repeated. 1 Press REPEA T . 2 By pressing REPEA T each time, âÂÂREPEA T ONâ or âÂÂREPEA T OFFâ is selected in turn. 3 When âÂÂREPEA T ONâ is selected, the tape is play ed bac k to the end, and then, it is automati- cally rewound to the starting point and play ed back again. To cancel repeat pla yback: Press REPEA T to select âÂÂREPEA T OFFâÂÂ. Commercial skip Press CM SKIP during playbac k. The video is rapidly f orwarded f or appro x. 30 seconds and playbac k resumes. Y ou ma y press the button up to six times in a ro w to mov e 180 seconds ahead. To display VCR operation status Press DISPLA Y . The clock, da y of the week and more information will be indicated. While watching TV While operating a tape To cancel the display : Press DISPLA Y again. REPEAT ON CH 29 8 : 47 MON 00 : 00 : 00 SP NICAM ST DAY OF THE WEEK CHANNEL TAPE SPEED REAL TIME COUNTER CLOCK STEREO (displayed only for approx. 4 seconds) 8 : 30 MON 00 : 15 : 12 SP L CH HI-FI OPERATING MODE TAPE IN AUTO REPEAT HI-FI STEREO Slow trac king and vertical lock adjustment If noise bars appear in the picture during slow motion, press the TRK (TRA CKING) or â to reduce the noise bars. If the still picture jitters e xcessively , press TRK (TRA CKING) or â to stabilise the still picture. Frame by Frame picture Press PA USE/STILL dur ing pla yback. Press SLO W one by one: The picture advances frame b y frame. To return to playbac k: Press PLA Y or PA USE/STILL . Adjusting tracking condition Automatic tracking adjustment Whenev er you inser t a tape and star t playbac k, automatic tracking starts working and continuously analyses the signal to enable optimum picture quality during playbac k. Manual tracking adjustment If automatic tracking cannot eliminate noises w ell during playbac k, press TRK (TRA CKING) / or TRK (TRA CKING) â / to eliminate the noises. âÂÂMANU AL TR. â will appear . Press it briefly for a fine adjustment, or press and hold f or more sev ere adjustments. To return to automatic tracking, press AT R . âÂÂA UT O TR. â will appear . Slow motion During playback press SLOW . You can change the slow speed by the additional pressing of SLOW . To return to playback: Press PLAY . Picture search Reverse picture search function Press REW x 1 or x 2 during the playbac k. Forward picture search function Press F.FWD x 1 or x 2 during the playback. To return to playback: Press PLAY . Still picture Press PAUSE/STILL during playback. To resume normal playback: Press PLAY . Indication for the selected playback sound (e.g.: L CH = VCR Left Channel) (displayed only for approx. 4 seconds.) 2H30301B_En_46_49 8/4/05, 19:23 48
49 En T ape playback 04 ZER O RETURN function / Video inde x sear ch system ZERO RETURN function This function makes tape rewinding (or f orwarding) stop at the counter âÂÂ00:00:00â position automatically . CH 1 INDEX or is displayed 3 INDEX NO. (up to 9) 1 Press DISPLA Y . The counter display sho ws the tape r unning time during playback or recording. 2 Press COUNTER RESET at the desired tape position. The counter display will be reset to the âÂÂ00:00:00â position (e.g. the beginning of recording). 3 Press ST OP when playbac k or recording is finished. Press ZERO RETURN . The tape will be rew ound or fast f orwarded and automatically stop at the âÂÂ00:00:00â position. Switching the displa y between cloc k and counter Press CLOCK/COUNTER . The clock and tape counter alternate with each other in the display . Video index sear ch system This function enables y ou to locate the beginning of any recording made on the VCR. Recording an INDEX MARK The Index search function automatically records an INDEX mark on the tape whenev er a recording is initiated. Index sear ch Press INDEX or during stop or play mode. F or Succeeding prog rams: Press INDEX F or Preceding prog rams: Press INDEX . (Additional press increases the INDEX NO . up to 9.) When the INDEX or is pressed, the unit star ts searching the INDEX NO . selected and finds the por tion, then playbac k star ts automatically . To stop the Inde x Search, press ST OP . . VCR NO TES for Counter Displa y: ⢠If you re wind the tape bey ond âÂÂ00:00:00âÂÂ, a minus sign (âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂ) will be display ed in front of the time. ⢠When you load a tape , the counter will reset to âÂÂ00:00:00âÂÂ. ⢠The counter does not function on nonrecorded (blank) sections of the tape. When you re wind, f ast f orward or pla y tapes through b lank sections , the counter stops. NO TES for Video index search system: ⢠When you record an INDEX mark at the very beginning of the tape, the mark ma y not be found. ⢠During INDEX search, the tape may stop and begin to pla y at a slightly different location. ⢠INDEX may not function properly with old or worn out video tapes. ⢠INDEX marks may not be f ound if it is extremely close to the point where the search began. ⢠In recording, if you stop record- ing temporarily , the INDEX mark is not recorded on the tape. 2H30301B_En_46_49 8/4/05, 19:23 49
50 En Recording 05 Read this before recording on disc T ypes of disc Y ou can use D VD-RW and D VD-R discs to record video . D VD-R W discs â¢V er 1.1/1.2 discs can be f ormatted for recording in either of the two modes: the VR mode or the Video mode. V er .1.0 discs can only be fo r matted for recording in the VR mode. ⢠High quality images and sound can be repeatedly recorded about 1,000 times. â¢A disc f ormatted in the VR mode can ha ve as man y as 99 original titles and pla ylist titles each. Discs formatted in the Video mode can hav e up to 99 original titles. D VD-R discs ⢠Discs can only be recorded in the Video mode. ⢠Discs can be recorded only once. ⢠Up to 99 titles can be created. For more information on recor ding format, see âÂÂRecording f ormatâ (pa ge 10). Notes on recording in the Video mode ⢠The Video mode cannot be selected for V er. 1.0 D VD-R W discs. ⢠The remaining av ailable area on the disc decreases as recording progresses. Additional contents can be recorded in the remaining time area, but it cannot be o verwritten into the recorded area. â¢T o format a new D VD-RW in the Video mode, set the automatic fo r mat feature to the Video mode. (See page 23.) Recording modes There are 4 modes for recording on disc. Recording time and quality va ry according to mode. ⢠Recording time abov e is based on a 4.7GB disc. Since D VD recording is performed using VBR (V ariable Bit Rate), recording time varies according to the recorded content. To know the correct recording time , stop recording and check the media information. (See page 32.) This section explains things y ou m ust know to record onto a disc. Read it before attempting to record. NO TES: Recording time can change for the f ollo wing reasons. ⢠When image quality is poor as during poor TV reception. ⢠When recording on a disc that has been edited before . ⢠When the video is follo wed with recordings of still images or just audio . NO TE: Should a power f ailure occur or should the A C cord plug be disconnected while recording, editing, initializing, finalising or any other function, the program being recorded will be lost or the disc may not be pla yable . Manufacturer can not guarantee against loss of program or disc should this occur . Recording mode XP SP LP EP Recording time Approx. 60 min Approx. 120 min Approx. 240 min Approx. 360 min Quality Can record high quality images. Can record normal quality images. Quality deteriorates slightly , but recording time is longer . Recording time is prioritised over quality . 2H30301B_En_50_53 8/4/05, 19:23 50
51 En Recording 05 NO TES: ⢠Because of characteristics peculiar to digital video compres- sion technology , scenes with f ast motion may appear as a matrix of larger bloc ks. ⢠During recording, if the picture noise continues f or 1 minute, the recording will stop automatically . Disc remaining time VR mode ⢠Recording is possible as long as there is a vailab le space on the disc. (Finalised discs can be recorded by cancelling the finalisation, see âÂÂUNDO FINALISEâ on page 23.) â¢E r asing unnecessary title frees up availab le space on the disc. (Titles can be erased from finalised discs b y first undoing the finalisation. See âÂÂUNDO FINALISEâ on page 23.) Video mode ⢠Up until the disc is finalised, recording is possible as long as there is av ailable space on the disc. (Once the disc has been finalised, additional recording and erasing are not possible .) ⢠The remaining time cannot be increased, nor can recorded title be ov erwritten. ⢠Titles cannot be erased nor can recorded titles be ov erwritten. Images that cannot be recor ded Some D VD-Video and broadcasts contain copy-restriction signals to protect copyrights . There are 3 types of cop y-restr iction signals: âÂÂCopy F reeâÂÂ, âÂÂCop y Nev erâ and âÂÂCop y OnceâÂÂ. âÂÂCopy Freeâ (unrestricted recording) Land-based TV broadcasts and images y ou record yourself with a video camera allow unrestricted recording. There are no restrictions on recording. âÂÂCopy Ne verâ (recor ding prohibited) ⢠Images that contain the recording prohibited signal cannot be recorded. ⢠If the recording prohibited signal appears halfwa y through an image you are recording, recording is paused at that instant. When the recording prohibited signal ends, recording resumes. ⢠This unit incor porates a b uilt-in cop y guard. It cannot record software or broadcasted progr ams that contain copy restriction signals designed to protect copyright, etc. âÂÂCopy Onceâ (one-time recordable) Programs (images) that contain the one-time recordab le signal can be recorded only in the VR mode using a D VD-R W disc that sup- por ts CPRM V er . 1.1 and V er . 1.2. 2H30301B_En_50_53 8/4/05, 19:23 51
52 En Recording 05 Recording a TV program Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a recordable D VD or video tape into the unit. ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the appropriate mode. 1 Press REC MODE/SPEED to select the recording mode. The recording mode will appear on the TV monitor and change ev er y time REC MODE/SPEED is pressed. VCR recording modes: SP/LP D VD recording modes: XP/SP/LP/EP SP is the normal recording mode for video tapes. LP off ers 2 times the recording time as SP . For more inf orma- tion on D VD recording modes, see page 50. 2 Press the n umeric keys or CH / â to select the channel to be recorded. 1~9 : e.g. 5 = press â 5â 10~80 : e.g. 29 = press â 2â and â 9â within 2 seconds. 3 Press REC . â â appears on the screen f or about 4 seconds and recording will star t. NO TES: ⢠When recording onto a D VD , it takes some time from when y ou press REC until recording actually star ts. Press REC a little bef ore your pref erred star ting point. With a video tape, recording star ts almost at the same time y ou press REC . ⢠If the erase pre vention tab of video tapes is remov ed, the tape will eject when REC is pressed f or recording. Y ou can record pr ograms y ou watch on TV onto video tapes or D VDs. CH 29 CH 29 VCR mode DVD mode INDEX DVD-Video VR mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_50_53 8/4/05, 19:23 52
53 En Recording 05 To stop recording Press ST OP to stop recording. NO TE: When recording onto a D VD , ev en if ST OP is pressed during recording, recording does not stop instantly due to the concluding process of recording. Recording may continue f or as long as 1 minute maximam. While this pro- cess, âÂÂPR OCESSING PLEASE W AITâ will appear on the screen. To stop recording temporarily Press PA USE/STILL to av oid recording unwanted material. â 4 â will appear on screen for about 4 seconds. Press again to resume recording. NO TES: ⢠In the recording onto a video tape, the pause function will be released after 5 minutes to pre vent damage the video tape . The unit will change to the ST OP mode. ⢠When recording onto a video tape, y ou can change a recording channel in the recording pause mode. (Y ou cannot change a recording channel in the D VD recording pause mode.) ⢠Chapter marks are made when recording to a D VD in the VR Mode. A uto Re wind feature This VCR will automatically rewind the tape when the tape has ended (except during OTR and TIMER REC). It will also eject the tape. NO TES: ⢠If the disc space become full, the recording is stopped and âÂÂRECORDING INTERR UPTEDâ will appear on the screen. ⢠In the e vent of a po wer f ailure during D VD recording including O TR and TIMER REC, the program can not be recorded on the disc. When the power resumes , after theVCR/D VD is turned on, the set checks the disc to repair the error which is caused by a po wer f ailure. This checking process ma y require about 1 minute 30 seconds according to disc condition. In this process âÂÂSYSTEM ERROR PLEASE W AIT DISC CHECKINGâ will appear on the screen. DVD-Video VR mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_50_53 8/4/05, 19:23 53
54 En Recor ding 05 One-touch Timer Recor ding (O TR) The One-touch Timer Recording f eature pro vides a simple and con venient way to make a timed recording. CH 29 INDEX CH 29 OTR 0 : 30 OTR 0 : 30 VCR mode DVD mode Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a recordable D VD or video tape into the unit. ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the appropriate mode. Example: One-touch Timer Recording for 30 minutes . 1 Press REC MODE/SPEED to select the recording mode. F or the recording mode, see the step 1 on page 52. 2 Press numeric keys or CH / â to select the channel to be recorded. 3 Press REC . Each additional press of REC will increase recording time as shown in the chart below , up to a maximum of 6 hours. The O TR and recording time will appear on the screen f or about 4 seconds. To cancel O TR Press ST OP or turn off the power . NO TE: If you wish to w atch the D VD playbac k dur ing the VCR O TR, press D VD/VCR to change to D VD mode and perform the D VD playbac k. Y ou can also pla yback the VCR dur ing D VD OTR. Press once twice 3 times 4 times 5 times 6 times NORMAL REC O TR - : - - O TR 0:30 O TR 1:00 O TR 1:30 OTR 2:00 OTR 3:00 OTR 4:00 OTR 5:00 OTR 6:00 NORMAL REC Recording time Press 7 times 8 times 9 times 10 times 11 times Recording time DVD-Video VR mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 54
55 En Recording 05 VIDEO Plus î pr ogramming system VIDEO Plus system is a timer programming system which simplifies timer recording programming. Instead of entering the date, c hannel and recording time, y ou simply enter a PlusCode TM programming n umber that you can find in y our TV listings. NO TE: There are two wa ys to enter a GUIDE CH NO . : â¢T o select numbers you can either use the numeric keys and then ENTER , or you can press ENTER first then use the / buttons to select a number , f ollowed b y ENTER . ⢠When using the n umeric keys, enter using two digits. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a recordable D VD or video tape into the unit. ⢠Press DVD/VCR to select the appropriate mode. Checking the c hannel setup to use the VIDEO Plus system Before y ou can use the VIDEO Plus system y ou need to set up the channel mapping. This ensures that the VIDEO Plus system uses the correct channels for recording b y matching up the preset channels in the recorder with âÂÂguide channelsâÂÂ. Y ou can find these guide channel numbers in your local TV guide or newspaper TV listings. 1 Press SETUP and press or to select âÂÂCHANNEL SETUPâ and press ENTER . The Channel Setup menu will appear . TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER CHANNEL SETUP CH TUNING AU TO TUNING GUIDE CH SET PROCEED PROCEED PROCEED SETUP MENU TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU ENTER RETURN ENTER BACK END SELECT SETUP INPUT NO. 0 - 9 CHANNEL SETUP CH TUNING AU TO TUNING GUIDE CH SET PROCEED PROCEED PROCEED GUIDE CH NO. TUNER CH NO. OK -- 01 TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU CHANNEL SETUP CH TUNING AU TO TUNING GUIDE CH SET PROCEED PROCEED PROCEED TV /CA TV SELEC AU TO CH MEMORY ADD/DELETE GUIDE CH SET GUIDE CH NO. TUNER CH NO. OK -- 01 2 Press or to select âÂÂGUIDE CH SETâ and press ENTER . A window appears to set a guide channel number and the corresponding tuner channel number . 3 Enter a GUIDE CH NO . (guide channel number). DVD-Video VR mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 55
56 En Recor ding 05 4 Press to highlight TUNER CH NO ., then enter the corre- sponding tuner channel number . ⢠Select a tuner channel number in the same wa y as you selected the guide channel number . â¢Y ou can also select one of the external inputs (A V1, A V2 or A V3) instead of a channel number if some channels are received via an e xter nal receiver . 5 Repeat steps 3 â 4 to input the rest of the channel list. 6 Press to highlight OK and press ENTER. 7 When youâ re done, press SETUP to e xit. Setting the timer program using the VIDEO Plus system The VIDEO Plus system simplifies timer recording so that you just enter a PlusCode number (which y ou can find in your TV listings guide) f or the program y ou want to record, tell the recorder whether y ou want to record it just once or regularly , and then select the D VD or the VCR for recording. Note that f or the VIDEO Plus system to work correctly , the clock must be set to the right time and the guide channels must be setup . (See âÂÂChec king the channel setup to use the VIDEO Plus systemâ on page 55.) 1 Press VIDEO Plus . If a PROGRAM FULL message appears then y ouâÂÂll need to delete one of the existing timer prog rams bef ore continuing. Select a timer program from the list and press CANCEL . 2 Use the n umeric keys to enter the PlusCode number . TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU ENTER RETURN ENTER CANCEL DELETE BACK END SELECT SETUP INPUT NO. 0 - 9 CHANNEL SETUP CH TUNING AU TO TUNING GUIDE CH SET PROCEED PROCEED PROCEED TV/CA TV SELECT AU TO CH MEMORY ADD/DELETE GUIDE CH SET GUIDE CH NO. TUNER CH NO. OK 01 -- RETURN CANCEL VIDEO Plus DELETE BACK END SELECT INPUT NO. 0 - 9 VIDEO Plus PlusCode# TYPE OK ONCE 1 - - - - - - - - 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 56
57 En Recording 05 VIDEO Plus PlusCode# TYPE OK ONCE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ENTER RETURN BAC K SELECT ENTER VIDEO Plus PlusCode# TYPE OK ONCE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 VIDEO Plus END OK ONCE DAIL Y WEEKL Y 3 Press to select âÂÂTYPEâÂÂ. Here you can set whether y ou want to record the progr am ONCE, D AIL Y or WEEKL Y . If you want to change it, press ENTER then use the / buttons to select, then press ENTER again. 4 Press to highlight OK, then press ENTER. NO TES: ⢠If youâÂÂve entered a v alid PlusCode number , a summar y of the timer recording appears. Y ou can edit any of this inf ormation as necessar y . Use the / buttons to select the item y ou w ant to edit, press ENTER , then use the / or / buttons as appropriate to select, then press ENTER again. ⢠VPS/PDC is a ser vice provided by the public TV station. When y ou se- lect a VPS/PDC-compatible TV sta- tion and activate the VPS/PDC function, the beginning and the end of the timer recording will be con- trolled by the TV station. Any pro- gr am air time delays will be tak en care of . T o make cer tain this works correctly alwa ys enter the e xact star ting time as published in the news paper or TV listing magazine. ⢠When you use the VPS/PDC func- tion, the recording star t time may be dela yed b y around 1 minute. ⢠If you use the VPS/PDC function and timer recording to record con- secutiv e programs on the same channel, the 2 programs are re- corded as a single title on a D VD . When the programs are recorded using a VCR, no VISS signal is in- ser ted when the second program star ts. ⢠TYPE â select the frequency of the recording (more options av ailable here than in the pre vious screen, such as ev er y w eekda y) â¢D A TE (DD/MM) â the recording date â¢S TA RT â recording star t time ⢠END â recording end time ⢠CH â the channel to be recorded, or one of the e xternal inputs (A V1, A V2 or A V3) ⢠REC TO â record to the D VD or the VCR ⢠REC MODE â recording quality ⢠VPS/PDC â If you w ant to receiv e VPS/PDC signal, select âÂÂONâ at step 4. ⢠Note that If you ha v enâÂÂt set a guide channel f or the selected TV channel, the CH field will be blank ( -- ). In this case, set the channel number manually . 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 57
58 En Recor ding 05 5 Highlight OK and press ENTER . The TIMER REC SET screen appears and you should see the new timer recording in the list. 6 Press SETUP to e xit. 7 Press TIMER REC . The timer indicator â â will appear on the display and the unit stands by for recording. ⢠If the program is D VD recording only , the unit will change to VCR mode automatically . (The D VD mode cannot be selected.) ⢠If the program is VCR recording only , the unit will change to D VD mode automatically . (The VCR mode cannot be selected.) ⢠If the programs are D VD and VCR recording, the unit will tur n off. If you w ant to use the unit, press TIMER REC again to deactiv ate the timer . ⢠If the clock symbol ( ) blinks in the display in spite of the pressing of TIMER REC, the cassette may not have been loaded yet. (see page 46) ⢠If the cassette is ejected in spite of the pressing of TIMER REC, the erase prevention tab of the cassette may have been removed. (see page 46) Checking or c hanging the timer recording When you w ant to check the selected timer recording, f ollow the steps 1 and 2 of âÂÂSetting timer recordingâ and display the TIMER REC SET screen. T o change the timer recording, select the program to be changed and press ENTER . The changing method is the same as that for the recording a program f or the first time. Cancelling the timer recording Display the TIMER REC SET screen. Select the program y ou want to cancel and press CANCEL, then the selected program will be erased from the timer recording list. In case Timer programs-overlap Do not ov erlap timer programs as por tions of the conflicting programs will be lost. The first recording time has priority ov er the next recording time as shown in the diagram belo w . In this case, the ne xt recording time is dela yed a maximum of about 2 minutes . Even when one timer recording is set to star t at the same time as another is set to finish, the later timer recording will be delay ed by up to 2 minutes. NO TES: ⢠Recording star ts a f ew seconds bef ore the preset star ting time. ⢠Y ou cannot use the timer record- ing f or the both D VD and VCR at the same time. ⢠Y ou can pla ybac k the D VD during the VCR timer recording, and you can pla yback the VCR during the D VD timer recording. ⢠If the clock symbol ( ) blinks when the timer recording ended, the TV program has not been completely recorded because of an insufficient capacity for DVD disc or video tape. Press TIMER REC to cancel the timer program. ⢠After setting the timer prog ram with VPS/PDC is âÂÂONâÂÂ, press TIMER REC then unit will automatically turn off . TIMER REC SET REC REC TO MODE VPS/ PDC CH END ST ART DATE DVD EP O N 7 02:35 01:35 27/09(SA T) VCR SP OFF 8 16:00 15:00 MON-SA T DVD XP OFF 12 18:00 17:00 SUN DVD XP OFF 7 02.54 01:54 28/09(SUN) NEW SETUP MENU 8 : 00 11 : 00 9 : 00 10 : 00 Program 1 Prog.1 Deleted Parts Non Recorded Portion Parts Prog.2 Prog.3 Program 2 Program 3 Recording Control Settings 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 58
59 En Recording 05 Timer recor ding The timer recording system allo ws y ou to select the date , time and c hannel and recor d the desired programs. Up to 1 2 timer pro- grams within a month can be stored in this unit. Setting timer recording Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a recordable D VD or video tape. ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the appropriate mode. ⢠Confirm that the clock is indicating the correct time. Example: Set the recording mode to LP and record on D VD; the TV program is on channel 1 starting at 20:00 and stopping at 23:00 on a date of 20th. 1 Press SETUP . The SETUP MENU screen appears. NO TE: In the e vent of a pow er f ailure the data of the automatic recording will be maintained in the built-in memory f or about 30 minutes . Also , the clock will continue to run for this period of time. Thereafter the data will be deleted. When the po wer resumes, the time display will change to âÂÂ0:00â that the timer setting will hav e to be set. 2 Press or to select âÂÂTIMER REC SETâ and press ENTER . The TIMER REC SET screen will appear . 3 Press or to select âÂÂNEWâ and press ENTER . The program screen will appear . TIMER REC SET SYSTEM SETUP AV SETUP REC SETUP CHANNEL SETUP O THER SETUP MENU DVD-Video VR mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 59
60 En Recor ding 05 4 Press or to select âÂÂTYPEâ and press ENTER . Press or to select âÂÂONCEâ from the list and press ENTER . NO TES: ⢠If you select timer recording on a specified date only one time, select âÂÂONCEâ in the âÂÂTYPEâ for recording. Y ou can record same days of e v er y w eek or from Monda y to F riday using the item âÂÂTYPEâÂÂ. The items you can select are as follo ws: ONCE: Recording on the selected âÂÂD A TEâ EVER Y SUN: Recording every Sun. EVER Y MON: Recording every Mon. EVER Y TUE: Recording e v er y T ue. EVER Y WED: Recording every Wed. EVER Y THU: Recording e v ery Thu. EVER Y FRI: Recording every F ri. EVER Y SA T: Recording e very Sat. MON-FRI: Recording from Mon. to Fr i . MON-SA T: Recording from Mon. to Sat. EVER Y D A Y : Recording e veryday . ⢠The initial setting of âÂÂREC T Oâ and âÂÂREC MODEâ can be changed using âÂÂSetting the recordingâÂÂ. (See page 26.) ⢠VPS/PDC is a service provided by the public TV station. When you select a VPS/PDC-compatible TV station and activate the VPS/PDC function, the be- ginning and the end of the timer record- ing will be controlled by the TV station. Any progr am air time delays will be taken care of . T o mak e cer tain this wor ks correctly alwa ys enter the e xact star ting time as published in the ne ws paper or TV listing magazine. ⢠When y ou use the VPS/PDC function, the recording star t time may be dela yed by around 1 minute. ⢠If you use the VPS/PDC function and timer recording to record consecutive programs on the same channel, the 2 programs are recorded as a single title on a D VD . When the progr ams are re- corded using a VCR, no VISS signal is inser ted when the second program star ts. 5 Press or to select âÂÂD A TEâ and press ENTER . Press or to select the date to be recorded and press ENTER. 6 Press or to select âÂÂST ARTâ and press ENTER . Set the time when the recording is star ted. â¢T o switch ov er the selection item (hour or minute), press or , then press ENTER. ⢠Press or to adjust the time. ⢠After setting the time, press ENTER. 7 Press or to select âÂÂENDâ and press ENTER . Set the stopping time in the same manner for setting the starting time of timer recording. 8 Press or to select âÂÂCHâ and press ENTER . ⢠Press or to select the channel to be recorded and press ENTER. â¢Y ou can select the external input setting mode by pressing . Then press or to select âÂÂA V1âÂÂ, âÂÂA V2â or âÂÂA V3â and press ENTER . 9 Press or to select âÂÂREC TOâ and press ENTER . Select the media (D VD or VCR) to be recorded from the list and press ENTER. 10 Press or to select âÂÂREC MODEâ and press ENTER . The recording modes for the media selected in âÂÂREC T Oâ item are listed up . Select the recording mode and press ENTER . For the recording modes in VCR, see page 46, and for the recording modes in D VD , see page 50. 11 Press or to select âÂÂVPS/PDCâ and press ENTER . Select âÂÂONâ if you want to receiv e VPS/PDC signal. Then press ENTER . 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 60
61 En Recording 05 NO TES: ⢠Recording starts a fe w seconds bef ore the preset starting time. â¢Y ou cannot use the timer recording f or the both D VD and VCR at the same time. â¢Y ou can playbac k the D VD during the VCR timer recording, and you can pla yback the VCR during the D VD timer recording. ⢠If a recordab le tape is not inserted or no disc space is a vailab le, the timer record indicator â â flashes, and âÂÂTIMER RECORDING ERR OR. PLEASE CHECK THE DISC OR T APE. â appears on the screen. Replace the tape or disc to allo w recording. ⢠If y ou perf orm any operation during timer recording, the po wer will not go OFF when timer recording finishes. T o turn the power OFF , press ST ANDBY/ON. â¢F rom about 2 minutes before timer recording starts, some operations cannot be done. ⢠If y ou set recording to start less than 2 minutes ahead of time , the power will not turn OFF after recording finishes. ⢠If the recording media fills up during timer recording, â â will flash and the pow er will not turn OFF . Also, any timer recording scheduled f or later is cancelled. ⢠After setting the timer prog ram with VPS/PDC is âÂÂONâÂÂ, press TIMER REC then unit will automatically turn off. 12 Select âÂÂOKâ and press ENTER . The timer program is deter- mined and the TIMER REC SET screen appears again. 13 When you enter the other prog ram f or the timer recording, repeat the steps 3 to 12 . 14 Press SETUP . The TIMER REC SET screen disappears and the displa y will return to the nor mal screen. 15 Press TIMER REC . The timer indicator â â will appear on the displa y and the unit stands by f or recording. ⢠If the program with âÂÂVPS/PDCâ OFF is D VD recording only , the unit will change to VCR mode automatically . (The D VD mode cannot be selected.) ⢠If the program with âÂÂVPS/PDCâ OFF is VCR recording only , the unit will change to D VD mode automatically . (The VCR mode cannot be selected.) ⢠If the programs with âÂÂVPS/PDCâ OFF are D VD and VCR re- cording, the unit will turn off. Also if the program with âÂÂVPS/ PDCâ ON is set, the unit will turn off. If you want to use the unit, press TIMER REC again to deactiv ate the timer . ⢠If the clock symbol ( ) blinks in the display in spite of the pressing of TIMER REC, the cassette may not have been loaded yet. (see page 46) ⢠If the cassette is ejected in spite of the pressing of TIMER REC , the erase prevention tab of the cassette may have been removed. (see page 46) Checking or c hanging the timer recording When you w ant to check the selected timer recording, f ollow the steps 1 and 2 of âÂÂSetting timer recordingâ and displa y the TIMER REC SET screen. T o change the timer recording, select the program to be changed and press ENTER . The changing method is the same as that for the recording a program f or the first time. Cancelling the timer recording Displa y the TIMER REC SET screen. Select the program y ou want to cancel and press CANCEL, then the selected program will be erased from the timer recording list. In case Timer programs-overlap Do not ov erlap timer programs as por tions of the conflicting programs will be lost. The first recording time has priority ov er the next recording time as shown in the diagr am below . In this case, the ne xt recording time is dela yed a maximum of about 2 minutes. Even when one timer recording is set to start at the same time as another is set to finish, the later timer recording will be delay ed by up to 2 minutes. ENTER RETURN SETUP BACK END SELECT ENTER TIMER REC SET REC REC TO MODE VPS/ PDC TYPE DA TE (DD/MM) ST ART END CH REC TO REC MODE VPS/PDC OK SETUP MENU ONCE 1 DVD LP LP 20/11(THU) 20:00 23:00 XP SP LP EP 8 : 00 11 : 00 9 : 00 10 : 00 Program 1 Prog.1 Deleted Parts Non Recorded Portion Parts Prog.2 Prog.3 Program 2 Program 3 Recording Control Settings 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 61
62 En Recor ding 05 Stereo recording and playback NOTE: When playing HiFi cassette tapes recorded on another VCR, the sound output may be distorted. This is normal and no indication of a unit malfunction. Try to minimise sound distortions by using TRK (TRACKING) /â or change to MONO by pressing of AUDIO SELECT . Bilingual playback performed as follows: On-screen indications (for 4 sec.) Stereo playback performed in: Simultaneously both languages from HiFi track (Mixed sounds) Original sound track (Sub sound) One's mother tongue dubbing (Main sound) One's mother tongue dubbing (Main sound) Stereo Mono Right channel signal output from both loudspeakers Left channel signal output from both loudspeakers L CH HI-FI R CH HI-FI NICAM OFF NICAM M1/2 NICAM M1 NICAM ST NICAM programmes are divided into 4 types as shown belo w . NICAM STEREO broadcast âÂÂNICAM STâ illuminates when a NICAM STEREO broadcast signal is received. NICAM MONO A broadcast âÂÂNICAM M1â illuminates when a NICAM MONO A broadcast signal is received. NICAM MONO A B broadcast âÂÂNICAM M1/2â illuminates when a NICAM MONO A and MONO B broadcast signal is received. NICAM OFF This will be displayed if a NICAM signal is received when âÂÂNICAM OFFâ is selected in the AV SETUP MENU. Playback Press AUDIO SELECT to select either stereo/mono or bilingual playback (where applicable). See the table below for more information. This VCR/D VD is capable of recording Hi-Fi quality sound. When recording on a video cassette, a br oadcast which is transmitted in NICAM Stereo normally records to the HiFi audio tracks - the normal Mono FM audio signal is recorded to the mono audio track on the cassette. The NICAM stereo reception can be switched off if required, b ut normally y ou would leave this on the A utomatic setting (See page 26). When a bilingual broadcast is received, both soundtracks will be recorded (when recording to cassette only). However , bilingual broadcasts are not usually transmitted in the UK. Output selection for D VD Y ou can s witch between the left or right channel and stereo only when pla ying a disc on which a bilingual broadcast was recorded in the D VD-RW VR mode. It is not possible to s witch between channels otherwise as only the channel selected in the setting of NICAM (A UTOMA TIC or OFF) is recorded in the D VD-RW Video mode or D VD-R (see page 25). VR mode Video mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_54_62 8/4/05, 19:24 62
63 En Editing the disc 06 Editing the disc This section explains how to edit the recorded contents on D VD- R Ws. Howe ver , the items that y ou can edit v ary with the recording f ormats. In VR mode, y ou can edit v arious title menus, whereas in Video mode, you can edit only a fe w items. Title menu When the content is recorded, a title name that includes the date, time, channel number and other inf or mation is created automatically . The title menu can be used when you pla yback after confirming the contents (see page 31), or when you chec k the contents recorded on the disc. Original title The titles e xplained abov e are called original titles; these will be added with e very recording. In VR mode you can do various editing operations i.e., y ou can rename the titles, or add the chapter marks. In addition, you can erase the unnecessary titles to increase the disc space. Playlist Y ou can create a pla ylist based on the original titles. Y ou can combine or erase undesired scenes . If you create a pla ylist it will become the pr imar y list used by the disc. If you create a pla ylist to customise your viewing pref erences, and choose to delete it, the original titles will not be affected. It is recom- mended to create and edit the playlist to pre vent impor tant titles from being erased accidentally . If you create a pla ylist, both the or iginal title and playlist will be display ed on the title menu. Editable items The items that can be edited are different betw een original title and playlist. F or the disc in Video mode, only the title name can be edited. The items can be edited in each are as follo ws: NO TES: ⢠This unit ma y not be able to record or edit a disc which was recorded or edited using another D VD recorder . â¢Y ou cannot edit or record the disc on which disc protection is set. In such a case, be sure to cancel the disc protection (see page 23) bef ore star ting the operation. ⢠When a scene has been erased, the selected position f or erasing may v ar y slightly from the actual erased position. Editing items VR mode Video mode Original Playback Adding chapter mark Combining chapters Erasing scenes Erasing titles Renaming titles Creating playlist Combining titles Original Playlist Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y N N Y Y Y N Y Y N N N N Y N N If you finalise the disc in Video mode, the title list will be created and y ou cannot use the title menu. 2H30301B_En_63 8/4/05, 19:25 63
64 En Editing the disc 06 Editing a pla ylist Y ou can create and edit the playlist based on the original title. NO TES: â¢A pla ylist can only be created with a D VD-RW in VR mode. Y ou cannot create a playlist with a D VD-RW in Video mode, nor with a D VD-R. ⢠In case the disc includes more than 10 titles, y ou can turn to the ne xt or the previous page . (See page 31.) â¢Y ou cannot s witch to the VCR mode when the title menu is showing. Press TITLE MENU to clear the title menu, then press D VD/VCR to s witch to the VCR mode. Preparation: ⢠T urn ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load the recorded D VD-RW (VR). ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) Creating a playlist 1 Press TITLE MENU . The title menu will appear . 2 Press or to select the or iginal title which will be used as the base of a playlist. 3 Press . The editing menu of original title will appear . 4 Press or to select âÂÂNEW PLA YLISTâÂÂ. 5 Press ENTER. The editing menu closes and the created pla ylist appears at the bottom of the list. DISC NAME: ---- 1/T 1 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP REC DA TE :23/11/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP TITLE MENU Created playlist RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- Titl11e 1 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME : 08:41 LENGTH : 00:01:17 TITLE MENU PLA Y ADD CHAPTER MARK COMBINE CHAPTERS EDIT TITLE DELETE TITLE RENAME TITLE NEW PLA YLIST NEW PLA YLIST VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 64
65 En Editing the disc 06 NO TES: ⢠The title name can be a maxi- m um of 64 characters . Long names will be shor tened in the title menu. ⢠F or using the k eyboard screen, see âÂÂChanging a disc nameâ (page 76). Changing a title name 1 Press TITLE MENU to display the title men u. 2 Select the pla ylist where you w ant to change the title name. ⢠Press or to select the pla ylist. ⢠Press to display the editing men u of the pla ylist. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂRENAME TITLEâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. The ke yboard screen will appear . 4 Use the ke yboard screen to enter the title name (See P . 76). 5 Press DISPLA Y to retur n the title menu. Family 1 ( . < > # 2 a b c 3 d e f CANCEL Back RETURN Exit Caps 0 Space bar 4 g h i 5 j k l 6 m n o 7 q p r s 8 t u v 9 w x y z DISPLA Y OK DISPLA Y OK Numbers Signs Letters RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP 23/11/2005 08:41 0 6 E P P L REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :006 REC MODE :SLP TITLE MENU PLA Y EDIT TITLE DELETE PLA YLIST RENAME TITLE TITLE COMBINE RENAME TITLE RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :23/11/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP TITLE MENU VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 65
66 En Editing the disc 06 Erasing a scene (Edit title) Y ou can erase an unnecessary scene from the created playlist. When you erase the scene from the pla ylist, the scene is not erased from the original title. 1 Press TITLE MENU to displa y the title menu. 2 Select the pla ylist where a scene you want to er ase is included. ⢠Press or to select the playlist. ⢠Press to display the editing menu of the pla ylist. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂEDIT TITLEâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. The EDIT TITLE screen appears. 4 Press ENTER to pla yback the pla ylist on the EDIT TITLE screen. ⢠Use each operation button ( F .FWD , REW , SKIP 6 6 6 6 6 , SKIP 7 7 7 7 7 , PLA Y , PA USE/STILL , SLO W , CM SKIP ) for the pla yback to search the star ting point of the scene you want to er ase. RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :006 REC MODE :SLP TITLE MENU PLA Y EDIT PROGRAM DELETE PLA YLIST RENAME TITLE TITLE COMBINE EDIT TITLE VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 66
67 En Editing the disc 06 NO TES: ⢠It is no problem to omit the procedures for confirming the scene or adjusting star t and end points. ⢠It is not possible to make an y adjustments f or 2 seconds after a title star ts or 2 seconds before it ends. â¢T o set a star t point at the beginning of a title, set it during countdown. ⢠The points during editing may be different from the pre view . ⢠Star t and end points are adjusted in units of 1 second. 5 Press or to select âÂÂSET ST AR Tâ at the star t point of the scene that you w ant to erase and press ENTER . (T o set the start point easily , search the star t point while âÂÂSET ST ARTâ is selected) The still image at the star t point appears at the left small screen. 6 Press or to select âÂÂSET ENDâ at the end point of the scene you w ant to erase and press ENTER . The still image at the end point appears at the right small screen. 7 Check the er ased scenes. ⢠Select âÂÂPre viewâ and press ENTER . Then the video where the scenes between the star t and end points are erased is pla yed back. ⢠Each operation b utton ( F .FWD , REW , SKIP 6 6 6 6 6 , SKIP 7 7 7 7 7 , PLA Y , PA USE/STILL ) for pla yback also can be used. 8 Adjust the star t and end points. ⢠T o adjust the start point, select âÂÂAdjust startâ and press ENTER . Y ou can change the start point ev er y one frame by pressing or . ⢠T o adjust the end point, select âÂÂAdjust endâ and press ENTER . Y ou can change the end point in the same wa y as the star t point. 9 If you determine the scene to be erased, press or to select âÂÂFinishâ and press ENTER . â¢A chapter mark is automatically added at the location of the erased scene. VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 67
68 En Editing the disc 06 Combining the title Y ou can create a pla ylist by combining sev eral original titles or pla ylists. T o combine titles, it is necessary to create a playlist first. B y combining the titles in the playlist, a pla ylist where sev eral titles are combined is created. 1 Press TITLE MENU to displa y the title menu. 2 Select the pla ylist where you w ant to combine the titles. ⢠Press or to select the playlist. ⢠Press to display the editing menu of the pla ylist. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂTITLE COMBINEâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. Select the title that you w ant to combine from the title menu. 4 Press ENTER. F ollowing the pla ylist, the selected title is combined. The se ver al titles were combined so that the total recording time is displa yed. RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP Title 1 PL F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :006 REC MODE :SLP TITLE MENU PLA Y EDIT TITLE DELETE PLA YLIST RENAME TITLE TITLE COMBINE TITLE COMBINE RETURN ENTER BA CK END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :25/11/2005 TIME :10:03 LENGTH :00:20:00 CHANNEL :11 REC MODE :SP TITLE MENU RETURN PLA Y B ACK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP Title 1 PL F amily REC DA TE :23/11/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:50:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP TITLE MENU VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 68
69 En Editing the disc 06 Erasing a playlist Y ou can erase the created pla ylist. Even if y ou erase the pla ylist, the original title will not be erased. 1 Press TITLE MENU to display the title men u. 2 Select the pla ylist that you want to er ase. ⢠Press or to select the playlist. ⢠Press to displa y the editing menu of the pla ylist. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂDELETE PLA YLISTâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. The selected pla ylist will be erased. RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :006 REC MODE :SLP TITLE MENU PLA Y EDIT TITLE DELETE PROGRAM RENAME TITLE TITLE COMBINE DELETE PLA YLIST VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 69
70 En Editing the disc 06 Editing an original title In VR mode, you can edit v arious items, whereas in Video mode, y ou can edit the title names onl y . NO TES: â¢Y ou can automatically add a chapter mark in recording. F or more inf ormation, see page 27. ⢠In case the disc includes more than 10 titles, y ou can turn to the ne xt or the previous page . (See page 31.) Preparation: ⢠T urn ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load the recorded disc. ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) Adding a chapter mark Y ou can add a chapter mark to the original title. Y ou can add up to 999 chapter marks to one disc, and up to 99 chapter marks to one title. 1 Press TITLE MENU to displa y the title menu. 2 Select the original title where a chapter mark is added. ⢠Press or to select the original title. ⢠Press to display the editing men u of the original title. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂADD CHAPTER MARKâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. The ADD CHAPTER MARK screen will appear . 4 Press PLA Y to search a scene where you want to add the chapter mark. ⢠Search the scene by using each operation b utton ( F .FWD , REW , SKIP 6 6 6 6 6 , SKIP 7 7 7 7 7 , PA USE/STILL, SLO W , CM SKIP ) f or the pla yback. DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP PLA Y COMBINE CHAPTERS EDIT TITLE DELETE TITLE RENAME TITLE NEW PLA YLIST ADD CHAPTER MARK TITLE MENU VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 70
71 En Editing the disc 06 5 When the scene you w ant to add a chapter mark, press ENTER . The playbac k is paused and the position of the added chapter mark appears green. 6 If you w ant to continue to add chapter mark, repeat step 5 . 7 Adding chapter marks is finished. ⢠T o displa y the title menu, press RETURN . ⢠T o return to the nor mal screen, press TITLE MENU . Combining chapters By erasing the added chapter marks, the chapters can be combined. 1 Press TITLE MENU to displa y the title menu. 2 Select the original titles where you want to combine the chap- ters. ⢠Press or to select the original title. ⢠Press to display the editing men u of original title. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂCOMBINE CHAPTERSâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. The COMBINE CHAPTERS screen will appear . At the begin- ning, the top still image in the chapter 2 is displa yed. ADD CHAPTER MARK 17% NAME 2 3 / 11/2005 08:41 CHAPTER 2/4 LENGTH 00:03:08/00:30:17 The added chapter mark RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP PLA Y COMBINE CHAPTERS EDIT TITLE DELETE TITLE RENAME TITLE NEW PLA YLIST ADD CHAPTER MARK TITLE MENU NO TE: Chapter marks that hav e been added automatically in the erasing of a scene procedure (page 73) cannot be erased. VR mode 2H30301B_En_64_71 8/4/05, 19:25 71
72 En Editing the disc 06 4 Press SKIP 6 or 7 to select the chapter marks to be erased. 5 Press ENTER. The chapter marks are erased and 2 chapters are combined into 1 chapter . 6 To contin ue erasing the chapter marks, repeat steps 4 and 5 . 7 The combining chapters will completed. ⢠T o displa y the title menu, press RETURN . ⢠T o return to the nor mal screen, press TITLE MENU . Changing an original title name 1 Press TITLE MENU to displa y the title menu. 2 Select the original title that you want to rename . ⢠Press or to select the original title. ⢠Press to display the editing men u of original title. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂRENAME TITLEâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. The ke yboard screen will appear . The entering method of the title name is the same as for the playlist. See the steps 4 and 5 of âÂÂChanging a title nameâ in âÂÂEditing a playlistâ (page 65) and enter the title name (See also page 76 f or more about the ke yboard screen). SELECT RETURN ENTER BA CK END TITLE MENU ENTER COMBINE CHAPTERS NAME 2 3 / 11/2005 08:41 CHAPTER 2/4 LENGTH 00:02:03/00:30:17 RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP TITLE MENU PLA Y ADD CHAPTER MARK COMBINE CHAPTERS EDIT TITLE DELETE TITLE RENAME TITLE NEW PLA YLIST RENAME TITLE NOTES: ⢠The title name can be a maxi- m um of 64 characters in VR mode and a maximum of 30 characters in Video mode. Long names will be shor tened in the title menu. ⢠âÂÂRENAME TITLEâ can only be used with D VD-R discs and video mode D VD-RW discs bef ore they hav e been finalized. VR mode VR mode DVD-Video DVD-R 2H30301B_En_72_77 8/4/05, 19:25 72
73 En Editing the disc 06 3 By pressing ENTER, the f ollowing message screen will appear . 4 Press or to select âÂÂYESâ and press ENTER, then the EDIT TITLE screen will appear. ⢠By selecting âÂÂNOâÂÂ, the title menu appears. 5 The method f or erasing a scene is the same as f or the playlist. See the steps 4 to 9 of âÂÂErasing scenes (Edit title)â in âÂÂEditing a pla ylistâ (page 66). Erasing a scene (Edit title) Y ou can erase an unnecessary scene from the or iginal title. Erase the scene after checking the title . Y ou cannot restore the erased scene. When you erase the scene , you can increase the disc space . 1 Press TITLE MENU to display the title men u. 2 Select the original title where a scene you want to erase is included. ⢠Press or to select the original title. ⢠Press to display the editing men u of original title. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂEDIT TITLEâÂÂ. RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP TITLE MENU PLA Y ADD CHAPTER MARK COMBINE CHAPTERS EDIT PROGRAM DELETE TITLE RENAME TITLE NEW PLA YLIST EDIT TITLE NO TES: ⢠If the scene is erased from the original title, the created playlist is erased. ⢠Disc space will only be freed up if scenes lasting sev eral minutes are deleted. â¢A chapter mark is automatically added at the location of the erased scene. Chapter mark added by er asing scene cannot be erased. VR mode 2H30301B_En_72_77 8/4/05, 19:26 73
74 En Editing the disc 06 NO TE: If the original title is erased the created playlist is also er ased. 3 By pressing ENTER, the f ollowing message screen will appear . 4 Press or to select âÂÂYESâ and press ENTER, then the original title will be erased. ⢠Erasing the title will be cancelled by selecting âÂÂNOâÂÂ. Erasing an original title Y ou can erase the original title. Erase the original title after checking its title. The erased title cannot be restored. When you erase the titles , you can increase the disc space . 1 Press TITLE MENU to display the title menu. 2 Select the original title you want to erase. ⢠Press or to select the original title. ⢠Press to display the editing men u of original title. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂDELETE TITLEâÂÂ. RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER DISC NAME: ---- 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily REC DA TE :11/23/2005 TIME :08:41 LENGTH :00:30:17 CHANNEL :06 REC MODE :EP TITLE MENU PLA Y ADD CHAPTER MARK COMBINE CHAPTERS EDIT TITLE DELETE TITLE RENAME TITLE NEW PLA YLIST DELETE TITLE VR mode 2H30301B_En_72_77 8/4/05, 19:26 74
75 En Editing the disc 06 Changing a disc name Y ou can change a disc name from the title men u. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load the recorded D VD disc. ⢠Press D VD/VCR to select the D VD mode. (The D VD indicator will light.) Changing a disc name 1 Press TITLE MENU to displa y the title menu. 2 ⢠Press or to select âÂÂDISC NAMEâÂÂ. ⢠Press to display the editing menu. ⢠Press or to select âÂÂRENAME DISCâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. The ke yboard screen will appear . 4 Use the ke yboard screen to enter the disc name. 5 Press DISPLA Y to retur n the title menu. Drama_Family Numbers Signs Letters 1 ( - < > # 2 a b c 3 d e f Back Exit Caps 0 4 g h i 5 j k l 6 m n o 7 q p r s 8 t u v 9 w x y z CANCEL RETURN DISPLA Y OK DISPLA Y OK Space bar NO TES: ⢠The disc name can be a maxi- m um of 30 characters . Long names will be shor tened in the title menu. â¢F or using the ke yboard screen, see âÂÂUsing the ke yboard screenâ (page 76). ⢠âÂÂRENAME DISCâ can only be used with D VD-R discs and video mode D VD-RW discs bef ore they hav e been finalized. 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily DISC NAME: ---- PLA Y LENGTH : CHANNEL : REC MODE : RENAME DISC TITLE MENU RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER 23/11/2005 08:41 06 EP 25/11/2005 10:03 11 SP 29/11/2005 11:30 09 SP 01/12/2005 06:52 06 XP F amily DISC NAME:Drama_Family REC DA TE : TIME : LENGTH : CHANNEL : REC MODE : TITLE MENU RETURN ENTER BA CK SET END SELECT TITLE MENU ENTER VR mode Video mode DVD-R 2H30301B_En_72_77 8/4/05, 19:26 75
76 En Editing the disc 06 Using the keyboar d screen This section explains the function of the k eyboard screen and how to input characters . The disc name and the title name can be changed using the ke yboard screen. Ke yboard screen types The ke yboard screen has three types of âÂÂLettersâÂÂ, âÂÂNumbersâ and âÂÂSignsâÂÂ. The type can be s witched over by pressing REW or F .FWD . Letters : This is mainly used f or inputting alphabetical letters. F or the k eyboard screen of Letters , see the previous page . Numbers : This is used for inputting n umbers. Signs : This is used for inputting symbols . Live Show Numbers Signs Letters 1 < > 2 3 Back Exit 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 CANCEL RETURN DISPLA Y OK DISPLA Y OK Inputting characters Live Show Numbers Signs Letters 1 ) ! < > , 2 ? @ # 3 & % / Back Exit 0 Space bar 4 . * _ 5 - = 6 [ ] : 7 è ; \ â 8 < > $ 9 :÷) :÷( ;-/ :÷} CANCEL RETURN DISPLA Y OK DISPLA Y OK There are two methods f or inputting characters. Character input 1 1 Press , , or to select the character to be input. 2 Press ENTER. The selected character will be input. Character input 2 Example: Explained here is the procedure when you input âÂÂFâ and âÂÂJâÂÂ. 1 Press the n umeric keys where a character y ou w ant to input is assigned. 3 d e f 2 Press the n umeric keys contin uously and select the character to be input. To input F , press 3 three times. 3 d e f NO TE: When the inter v al between the pressing numeric keys is 2 seconds or more in selecting the input character , the selected character will automatically be input. 3 Stop the ke y operation when y ou select the character to be input. The selected character will automatically be input. F 4 Press the n umeric keys where the f ollowing character is assigned. 5 j k l Fj 5 When the character to be input is selected, stop the ke y operation. The selected character is automatically input. 2H30301B_En_72_77 8/4/05, 19:26 76
77 En Editing the disc 06 Erasing a character Y ou can erase the input character . Erasing method 1 1 Press , , or to select âÂÂBac kâÂÂ. 2 Press ENTER. The last input character will be erased. 3 To erase the characters continuously , press ENTER . The input characters will be erased from the last to the top one by one . Erasing method 2 1 Press CANCEL on the remote control. The last input character is erased. 2 To erase the characters continuously , press CANCEL . The input characters will be erased from the last to the top one by one . Erasing method 3 Use the cursor to select the character and erase it. 1 Press SKIP 6 or 7 to mov e the cursor after the character y ou want to erase . 2 Press CANCEL . Erase the character bef ore the cursor position. Live Show 1 ( - < > # 2 a b c 3 d e f Back Exit Caps 0 4 g h i 5 j k l 6 m n o 7 q p r s 8 t u v 9 w x y z Numbers Signs Letters Upper Lower Auto caps CANCEL RETURN DISPLA Y OK DISPLA Y OK Space bar Selecting between uppercase and lo wercase letters Y ou can select either uppercase or low ercase letters when modifying your titles , using the ke yboard screen with the âÂÂLettersâ tab . 1 Press STOP . (Or , press , , or to select âÂÂCapsâÂÂ, then press ENTER.) 2 Press or to select the type of letters in the list below and press ENTER . A uto caps : Determines uppercase and lower- case automatically . Upper : Inputs all with uppercase letters. Lower : Inputs all with lo wercase letters. Determining a name To determine the entered disc name and title name, press DISPLA Y . Or , press , , or to select âÂÂOKâÂÂ, then press ENTER . The ke yboard screen disappears and the displa y will retur n to the title menu. The entered disc name and title name are display ed in the title menu. Cancelling character input When you w ant to cancel the input and changed characters, press RETURN . Or , press , , or to select âÂÂExitâÂÂ, then press ENTER . The input and changed characters are cancelled and the title menu will appear . 2H30301B_En_72_77 8/4/05, 19:26 77
78 En Dubbing 07 NO TE: Confirm that the VCR indicator lights . 4 Press DUBBING. ⢠The unit is changed to D VD mode automatically . ⢠The VCR is waiting for pla yback and the D VD is waiting for recording. Then the f ollowing message will appear . 5 Press DUBBING , or or to select âÂÂYESâ and press ENTER . Dubbing star ts. â¢T o cancel dubbing, press ST OP , or select âÂÂNOâ and press ENTER. In dubbing, VCR playbac k, D VD recording and âÂÂdubâ (dubbing) indicator appear on the displa y window . Press CLOCK/COUNTER to displa y the elapsed dubbing time in the displa y window . 6 To stop dubbing, press ST OP . Dubbing a tape onto a disc Y ou can recor d video or audio on a video tape onto a disc. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this may be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a source video tape and a disc for recording. ⢠Remov e the erase protection tab of the source video tape to prev ent the data from accidentally being erased. ⢠Confirm the disc space before operation. 1 Press D VD/VCR to set this unit to D VD mode. The D VD indicator will light. 2 Press REC MODE/SPEED and select the recording mode SP , LP , EP or XP . ⢠The recording mode is indicated on both the TV screen and the display windo w . â¢F or the details of the recording mode, see page 50. 3 Press D VD/VCR and set the unit to VCR mode. STOP ENTER ENTER NO YES SELECT DUBBING CONFIRM DUBBING FROM VCR TO DVD YES NO NO TES: ⢠Dubbing cannot be accomplished when - a copy protected tape is used. - a finalised disc is used. - disc protection is set. - disc has no recording space. ⢠Dubbing stops when - the video tape is pla yed bac k to the end and stops. - recording space becomes full. - the picture noise continues f or 1 minute. ⢠The videos recorded from TV programs or mo vies can be used only f or your personal enjo yment without permission of the copyright holder . VR mode Video mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_78_81 8/4/05, 19:26 78
79 En Dubbing 07 NO TES: ⢠When a title is play ed by selecting it from the title menu, only the title selected is play ed. ⢠Dubbing cannot be accomplished when -a copy protected disc is used. -a DivX î file is play ed. - the er ase prev ention tab of video tape is remov ed. ⢠Dubbing stops when - the disc is pla yed back to the end and stops. - no recording space on the Video tape remains ⢠During dubbing, the unit is changed to interlaced scan mode automatically , if it has been previously set to progressiv e scan mode. ⢠If no special permission is obtained from the copyright owner , videos recorded from TV programs or movies can only be used for y our own personal enjo yment. Y ou can recor d both video and audio from a disc to a video tape. When a disc with a cop y guard is used, dubbing cannot be accomplished. Preparation: â¢T ur n ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a source disc and a video tape for recording. ⢠Confir m the remaining tape for recording bef ore operation. 1 Press D VD/VCR to set this unit to VCR mode. The VCR indicator will light. 2 Press REC MODE/SPEED and select the recording mode SP or LP . ⢠The recording mode is indicated on both the TV screen and the display windo w . â¢F or the details of the recording mode, see page 46. 3 Press D VD/VCR and set the unit to D VD mode. NO TE: Confirm that the D VD indicator lights. 4 Press DUBBING. ⢠The D VD is waiting f or pla yback and the VCR is waiting f or recording. Then the f ollowing message appears. 5 Press DUBBING , or or to select âÂÂYESâ and press ENTER . Dubbing star ts. â¢T o cancel dubbing, press STOP , or select âÂÂNOâ and press ENTER . In dubbing, D VD pla yback, VCR recording and âÂÂdubâ (dubbing) indicator appear on the displa y window . Press CLOCK/COUNTER to displa y the tape counter in the displa y window . 6 To stop dubbing, press ST OP . Dubbing only the specified titles or the pla ylist When you w ant to dub only specific titles or playlists recorded on the disc, start the playbac k of the desired title or playlist, and then press DUBBING and proceed from step 5 abov e. Dubbing star t from the beginning of the title or playlist. Dubbing only a specified scene When you w ant to dub only specific scene on the disc, press P AUSE/STILL at the desired scene , and then press DUBBING and proceed from step 5 abov e. Dubbing a disc onto a tape STOP ENTER ENTER NO YES SELECT DUBBING CONFIRM DUBBING FROM DVD TO VCR YES NO VR mode Video mode DVD-R VCR 2H30301B_En_78_81 8/4/05, 19:26 79
80 En Dubbing 07 Y ou can connect another VCR or camcorder f or dubbing. T ypical connection: When using this unit as a recording device See next page f or the diagrams of connection. NO TES: ⢠When this unit is used as a playbac k device, an y on screen displa ys that appear would also appear on the recording. Howe ver it is possible to set the on screen display to OFF - see the âÂÂDISPLA Y/CALL â section on page 24 f or more information. ⢠If no special permission is obtained from the copyright o wner , videos recorded from TV programs or mo vies can only be used f or your own personal enjo yment. â¢Y ou may not dub a cop y pro- tected video tape or D VD disc. Dubbing using other equipment VR mode Video mode DVD-R VCR 2 Press REC MODE/SPEED and select the recording mode. VCR: SP or LP (See page 46.) D VD: SP , LP , EP or XP (See page 50.) 3 Press REC on this unit. 4 Press the PLA Y b utton on the pla yback de vice. 5 To stop dubbing, press ST OP . When a video is recorded using this unit Preparation: ⢠T urn ON the TV and select its A V channel (this ma y be labelled EXT / A UX etc.). ⢠Load a video tape where the erase-protection tab is not activated or a disc with enough recording space. ⢠T o record onto a video tape, set the unit to VCR mode, whereas to record onto a disc, set it to D VD mode. 1 Press INPUT SELECT and set the channel to A3 (or A2). A2: DECODER/EXTERNAL scar t on the rear panel A3: AUDIO/VIDEO input on the front panel Confirm that A3 (or A2) appears on the display window . 2H30301B_En_78_81 8/4/05, 19:26 80
81 En Dubbing 07 Playbac k unit connection. The playbac k unit can be a camcorder or a video recorder . See each operation man ual for each pla yback operation. The cop y protected video or D VD disc cannot be copied. See âÂÂEXTERNAL A UDIO INPUTâ on page 26 for how to s witch the external audio input. Dubbing with A/V -cable (or S-Video cable) (not supplied) To pla yback unit Recording unit A/V -cable (not supplied) Press INPUT SELECT on the remote control repeatedly until A3 appears on the front displa y . If the other VCR or camcorder is equipped with S-Video output, a superior picture will be achie ved using an S-Video cab le connected to the S-Video-input (A V3) on the front panel with S-Video cable . In this case, y ou must select âÂÂS-VIDEOâ mode in A V3 INPUT -setting on page 25. If you select âÂÂVIDEOâÂÂ, only the composite video signal will be input. (S-Video input signal will be cut.) The S-Video input can be used only for recording on the disc. (The S-Video input cannot be used for recording on the video tape.) To pla yback unit SCART cab le (not supplied) SCAR T cable (supplied) TV -unit (not supplied) Dubbing with SCART cable (not supplied) Press INPUT SELECT on the remote control repeatedly until A2 appears on the front displa y . Recording unit S-Video cable (not supplied) AV3 2H30301B_En_78_81 8/4/05, 19:26 81
Additional information 08 82 En Glossary A-B Repeat Playbac k Pla yback that repeats between tw o set points, A and B. angle Recorded onto some D VD discs are scenes which hav e been simultaneously shot from a number of different angles (the same scene is shot from the front, from the left side, from the right side, etc.). With such discs you can select the angle from which to view the scene . auto chapter F eature that automatically makes chapter marks on a D VD disc during recording. b lue backgr ound F eature that automatically changes unpleasant noise images to a blue screen when a channel without a broadcast or a channel on which the broadcast has ended has been selected. BRO WSER screen Screen that appears when TITLE MENU is pressed during MP3/WMA or JPEG CD is inser ted. c hapter A section within a title is called a âÂÂchapterâÂÂ. CM Skip When pressed during playbac k, playbac k jumps 30 sec ahead and resumes. copy guar d Copyright protection signal. Software and broad- casts that contain this signal cannot be recorded. DivX DivX is a compressed digital video f or mat created by the DivX î video codec from DivXNetworks, Inc. This unit can pla y DivX video files burned on CD-R/ R W/R OM discs. K eeping the same ter minology as D VD-Video , individual DivX video files are called âÂÂTitlesâÂÂ. When naming files/titles on a CD-R/R W disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by def ault they will be pla yed in alphabetical order . DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivXNetworks, Inc. and are used under license. Dolby Digital With multichannel audio , this high quality surround system is used in many movie theaters around the wor ld. Manufactured under licence fr om Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS DTS stands for Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround system diff erent from Dolby Digital that has become a popular surround sound format f or movies. "DTS" and "DTS Digital Out" are r egistered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. D VD menu Menu recorded on a D VD-Video that enables the user to select subtitles language, soundtrac k language, etc. finalise Operation that enab les discs recorded or edited with this unit to be pla yed bac k on other D VD play ers. letter box F eature that displays b lac k bands above and belo w the playbac k images dur ing playbac k of a disc recorded in wide (16:9) format on a 4:3 TV con- nected to this unit. MP3 One type of audio compression that uses MPEG1. one touch repeat If ONE TOUCH REPEA T is pressed during play- back, pla yback retur ns to a point 10 sec earlier and resumes. original title The file created by recording something is called an âÂÂoriginal titleâÂÂ. OT R One-touch Timer Recording. Star t a timed record- ing by pushing just one b utton (up to 6 hours). pan scan F eature that cuts the left and right edges of playbac k images to a 4:3 size during playback of a disc recorded in wide (16:9) f ormat on a 4:3 TV connected to this unit. parental control Some discs control viewing according to the age of the viewer . A control lev el can be set f or those types of discs. 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:26 82
Additional information 08 83 En Screen sizes and disc f ormats playlist User-created titles based on each original title. Progressive scan T echnology that simultaneously displays odd- n umbered scanning lines and e ven-n umbered scanning lines from top to bottom. Also called âÂÂ576pâÂÂ, âÂÂpâ meaning âÂÂprogressiv eâÂÂ. Regions (D VD only) 2 ALL (example region code marks) Regions associate discs and play ers with par ticular areas of the world. This unit will only pla y discs that hav e compatible region codes . Y ou can find the region code of your unit b y looking on the rear panel. Some discs are compatible with more than one region (or all regions). SETUP MENU Menu that contains settings f or various f eatures of this unit, such as recording and pla yback. Timer recording is also set from the SETUP MENU . slide show T echnique for flipping through and vie wing many images (JPEG files). subtitle language Language used for subtitles of mo vies, etc. Viewers can watch in a language of their choosing. title A program recorded on a disc is called a âÂÂtitleâÂÂ. title menu Menu that lists titles and trac ks recorded on the disc. It is used for pla yback and disc editing. top menu Menu on a D VD-Video f or selecting chapters for playbac k, subtitle language, etc. The top menu may be ref erred to as a Title Menu on some D VD discs. track A song on a music CD is called a âÂÂtrac kâÂÂ. TRA CK INFO screen The screen that appears when TITLE MENU is pressed, if an A udio disc is in the unit. Video mode This recording f or mat is compatible with commer- cially av ailable D VD pla yers. VR mode This recording f or mat is the basic D VD-RW recording f or mat, and lets you enjo y the various editing functions av ailable with this unit. Screen sizes and disc formats (See page 24) When viewing on a standard TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 4:3 (Letter Box) The program is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The sides of the program are cropped so that the picture fills the whole screen. Please note that many 4:3 16:9 The program appears squashed. Set to either 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (P an & Scan). 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The program is presented correctly on either setting. When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 16:9 The program is presented in widescreen. 4:3 16:9 Y our TV will determine how the picture is presented-check the manual that came with the TV for details. NO TE: Using the 16:9 (Wide) setting with a standard 4:3 TV , or either of the 4:3 settings with a widescreen TV , will result in a distorted picture. widescreen discs override the player's settings so that the disc is shown in letter box format regardless of the setting. 16:9 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:26 83
Additional information 08 84 En Enter the appropr iate code number for the initial settings âÂÂD VD MENUâÂÂ, âÂÂA UDIOâ and/or âÂÂSUBTITLEâ (see page 20). Language code list Language Abkhazian Af ar Afrikaans Albanian Amharic Arabic Armenian Assamese A ymara Azerbaijani Bashkir Bengali; Bangla Bhutani Bihari Breton Bulgarian Burmese Byelorussian Catalan Cambodian Chinese Corsican Croatian Czech Danish Deutsch Dutch Greek English Esperanto Spanish Code 1112 1111 1116 2927 1123 1128 1835 1129 1135 1136 1211 1224 1436 1218 1228 1217 2335 1215 1311 2123 3618 1325 1828 1329 1411 1415 2422 1522 1524 1525 1529 Code 1530 1531 1611 1625 1620 1619 1628 1635 1722 2111 2122 1724 1731 1811 1933 1819 1831 1929 1924 1911 1711 1930 2011 2033 2124 2129 2121 2135 2125 2131 2225 Language Estonian Basque P ersian F aroese Fiji Finnish F rench Fr isian Galician Georgian Greenlandic Guarani Gujarati Hausa Hebrew Hindi Hungarian Icelandic Indonesian Interlingua Irish Italian J apanese Jav anese Kannada Kashmiri Kazakh Kirghiz K orean Kurdish Laothian Code 2211 2232 2224 2230 2321 2317 2329 2322 2330 2319 2328 2325 2324 2411 2415 2425 2528 2611 2629 2622 2630 2731 2823 2825 2831 2923 2911 1714 2928 2918 2924 Language Latin Latvian, Lettish Lingala Lithuanian Macedonian Malagasy Mala y Mala yalam Maltese Maori Marathi Moldavian Mongolian Nauru Nepali Norwegian Oriya P anjabi P ashto , Pushto P olish Po r tuguese Quechua Rhaeto-Romance Romanian Russian Samoan Sanskrit Scots Gaelic Serbian Serbo-Croatian Shona Language Sindhi Singhalese Slov ak Slov enian Somali Sundanese Swahili Swedish T agalog T ajik T amil T atar T elugu Thai Tibetan Tigrinya T onga Tu r kish Tu r kmen Tw i Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese V olapük W elsh W olof Xhosa Y iddish Yo r uba Zulu Code 2914 2919 2921 2922 2925 2931 2933 2932 3022 3017 3011 3030 3015 3018 1225 3019 3025 3028 3021 3033 3121 3128 3136 3219 3225 1335 3325 3418 2019 3525 3631 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 84
Additional information 08 85 En SYSTEM ERROR PLEASE W AIT SYSTEM ERROR PLEASE W AIT DISC CHECKING SYSTEM ERROR DISC MIGHT BE F AILED PRESS ENTER NO DISC REGION CODE ERROR INCORRECT DISC - C104, C105, C106, C107 PROGRESSIVE OUTPUT . ST OP DISC PLA Y BACK THEN PRESS PROGRESSIVE T O CANCEL. Err or/W arning message list -- ERROR/W ARNING MESSAGE CA USE POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS P AGE NO TE: It is possible that other warning messages other than this listed abov e could appear . If this happens, please chec k the possible solutions abo ve as the y could still provide an e xplanation. The power w as shut down without completing the termination process due to a power failure or dis- connection of the AC cord plug. (Abnor mal termi- nation) The power was abruptly turned off before writ- ing to the disc was completed. The data restoration was completed. PLA Y w as pressed when a disc was not loaded into the unit. A disc specified other than âÂÂRegion 2â or âÂÂRegion ALL â was loaded. The disc cannot be identified. W ait until the message disappears. The data is now restoring. Press ENTER , then the screen re- turns to the nor mal display . The data may not be restored ev en if the res- toration process is perf ormed. Load a disc. A disc specified other than âÂÂRegion 2â or âÂÂRegion ALL â cannot be played back. Check to mak e sure that the disc is compatible with this unit. -- 50 30 9 9 Playbac k Po w er ON REC w as pressed when a disc was not loaded into the unit. The recording termination is processing. Disc became full during recording. Recording was tried onto the disc having no space. Recording was tried onto the disc which does not suppor t recording. Disc erase-protection is applied. Recording was tried onto the finalised disc. Adding data was tried onto the disc recorded in the other unit. Adding data was tried to the disc where PC data w as recorded. A scratch or contamination was f ound on the disc. 99 titles were recorded on the disc. Load a disc. W ait until the process is completed. Erase unnecessary titles or load another disc and restart recording. Check the disc space. Load a recordable disc. Set âÂÂProtect discâ to âÂÂOFFâÂÂ. Undo finalisation or load another disc for recording. Load another disc for recording. Load another disc for recording. Check the disc and reload it, or use another disc for recording. Erase unnecessary titles or load another disc. -- 52 32 10 23 23 -- -- -- 74 71 51 51 51 74 999 chapters were existed on the disc. Y ou tried to record a cop y-guard video. The video was changed to a copy-guard f or mat in recording. Yo u tried to record the âÂÂCopy Onceâ progr am onto a disc (Video mode). Yo u tried to record the âÂÂCopy Onceâ progr am onto a disc without CPRM. Erase unnecessary chapters or load another disc. Y ou cannot record the video con- taining copy-guard signal. Y ou cannot record the video con- taining copy-guard signal. Load a D VD-RW V er. 1.1/1.2 (VR mode) with CPRM. Load a D VD-RW V er. 1.1/1.2 (VR mode) with CPRM. 51 NO DISC PROCESSING PLEASE W AIT RECORDING INTERRUPTED - C204 CANNOT RECORD - C203 CANNOT RECORD - C206 CANNOT RECORD - C207 CANNOT RECORD - C208 CANNOT RECORD - C209 CANNOT RECORD - C210 DISC ERROR - C205, C211, C212, C213 CANNOT RECORD EXCEEDS LIM- ITED NUMBER OF TITLES. CANNOT RECORD , EXCEEDS LIMITED NUMBER OF CHAPTER. CANNOT RECORD PR O TECTED IMAGE. RECORDING INTERRUPTED PRO- TECTED IMAGE. CANNOT RECORD IN VIDEO MODE. COPY IMAGE ONCE ONL Y . CANNOT RECORD ON DISC . THIS IS NOT CPRM DISC . TIMER RECORDING ERROR PLEASE CHCK THE DISC OR T APE Recording When the unit was not connec-ted to the TV with the component video cables, PR OGRESSIVE w as pressed. Press PROGRESSIVE in the stop mode to make the progressiv e scanning mode inactive. 45 No video tape or disc is inser ted as a source for the recording. The source video or disc to be copied is copy- guarded. The video tape or disc became full during dubbing. Cannot Format disc due to a scratch or contami- nation on the disc. Cannot Finalise disc due to a scratch or con- tamination on the disc. Cannot Undo Finalise disc due to a scratch or contamination on the disc. Cannot Protect disc ON/OFF due to a scratch or contamination on the disc. Editing cannot be performed due to a scratch or contamination on the disc. Combining chapters cannot be performed. Load a video tape or disc into the source drive. Y ou cannot dub a video containing copy-guarded material. Load another video tape or disc for recording and restar t. Check the disc and reload it, or use another disc for recording. Check the disc and reload it. Check the disc and reload it. Check the disc and reload it. Check the disc and reload it, or use another disc for recording. Chapter marks that have been added automatically in the erasing of a scene procedure cannot be erased. 78, 79 51 78, 79 -- 88 88 88 -- A process requiring a longer time such as edit- ing is being performed. W ait until the process is complete . -- 73 CANNOT COPY D A T A - C251 CANNOT COPY D A T A - C254, C255 COPYING INTERRUPTED DISC ERROR - C302, C303 DISC ERROR - C304, C305 DISC ERROR - C306 DISC ERROR - C307, C308 CANNOT EDIT CANNOT EDIT - C408 PROCESSING PLEASE W AIT Dubbing Disc setup Title Menu When a recordable tape is not inserted or no disc space is av ailable , TIMER REC was pressed. Load a recordabl tape or disc. 58, 61 85 En 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 85
Additional information 08 86 En SYMPT OMS POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS ⢠Make sure the po wer cord is plugged in. â¢T ry another A C outlet. â¢P ow er is off, chec k fuse or circuit breaker . ⢠Unplug unit, then plug it back in. ⢠Select the D VD or VCR mode bef ore operating. ⢠Antenna connection is not correct or antenna cable is disconnected. ⢠Chec k the unit is connected correctly . ⢠The video input selector of the TV is not set to VIDEO. Set to VIDEO (or equivalent). ⢠Channel is set to the e xternal mode. ⢠Chec k the input settings on the TV and the output settings on the unit. ⢠Chec k the unit is connected correctly . ⢠Chec k the input selector of the amplifier is set properly . ⢠The unit is in the Special pla yback mode. ⢠Aim at the remote control at the remote sensor . ⢠Operate within Appro x. 5 metres or reduce the light in the room. ⢠Clear the path of the beam. ⢠The batteries are weak. Replace the batter ies. ⢠Chec k the batteries are inser ted correctly . ⢠This unit may on rare occasions stop working in cer tain situations, such as when a soiled or damaged disc is used. If this occurs, hold down ST ANDBY/ON on the unit for 10 seconds or longer to reset the unit. The unit may also automatically reset itself if it detects a problem. ⢠If the unit performs a reset of this sor t while data is being recorded onto a disc, it may in rare cases no longer be possible to successfully record to or play back from the disc. VCR/D VD does not operate. No picture. The picture is not nor mal (appears in black and white, etc.). No sound. The remote control does not function. No function in D VD mode. Pr oblems and tr oubleshooting â â â â 30 16 16 â â 25 16~17 â 33, 48 15 â â â¢Y our preferred language ma y not be av ailable on the disc. ⢠No disc is inserted. ⢠The disc ma y be dir ty . Clean up the disc. ⢠The unit cannot pla y D VD-ROMs, etc. ⢠Chec k that the disc is not a D VD-RAM, D VD R/RW , dual disc (D VD/CD h ybrid disc) or other incompatib le format disc. ⢠Some discs ma y not do some of the functions. ⢠Chec k the disc space, using the disc inf ormation. ⢠Chec k the disc for protection. ⢠Chec k if the video to be recorded is not âÂÂcop y-guardedâÂÂ. ⢠Check that the number of recorded titles is 99 or less, using the disc information. ⢠Chec k that the total number of chapters for the recorded titles does not e xceed 999 in the disc inf or mation section. ⢠In a D VD-RW of V er.1.0, recording in Video mode does not wo rk. Check the disc type. ⢠Chec k that the disc is finalised. ⢠Some D VD play ers will not pla y ev en if the disc has been finalised. ⢠If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other pla yer must be R W compatible in order to pla y the disc. Display is not sho wn in your language. Playbac k doesnâÂÂt start. Stopping playbac k, search, slow- motion play , repeat play , or program play , etc. cannot be performed. Recording does not work. A disc recorded using this recorder cannot be play ed back in other pla y- ers. 20 30 88 9 Incorrect operation is often mistaken f or trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this component, please check the points below . Sometimes the trouble ma y lie in another component. In vestigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified e ven after checking the points below , ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carr y out repair work. NO TE: If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity , disconnect the po wer plug from the AC outlet and insert again to retur n to normal operating conditions. If the unit will not work ev en if the pow er cord is unplugged and plugged back in, unplug the cord from the A C outlet for about 4 hours and then try plugging it back in and turn on the power . VCR/D VD DV D â 32 23 51 32, 50 32, 50 10 23 11, 23 11, 23 30 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 86
Additional information 08 87 En 24 24 24 18 â 21 20 20, 37 44 â â SYMPT OMS POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS P A GE TV recording does not work. Timer recording does not work. Noise bars on screen. ⢠The erase pre vention tab of the video cassette is brok en off. ⢠The unit is in the e xternal input mode. ⢠The time is not set correctly . ⢠The recording star t/end time is not set correctly . ⢠TIMER REC has not been pressed ( is not lit). â¢T ra c king adjustment be yond r ange of automatic tracking circuit. Tr y Manual trac king adjustment. ⢠Video heads are dir ty . ⢠The tape is worn or damaged. 46,52 22 60 58, 61 48 87 â No 4:3 (16:9) picture. No on-screen display . Nothing appears in the displa y window . No surround sound. The unit or remote operation k ey is not functioning. Pla yback does not start when the title is selected. A udio soundtrac k and/or subtitle language is not changed when you pla yback a D VD . No subtitles. I can't change the subtitles. Angle cannot be changed. â â appears on the screen. ⢠The setup does not match your TV . ⢠Select Displa y âÂÂONâÂÂ. ⢠Check the DIMMER setting f or SETUP . ⢠The setup does not match your stereo system. â¢T ur n off the unit and unplug the AC pow er cord f or sev eral min- utes, then replug it. ⢠Check the P arental setup. ⢠Multilingual language is not recorded on the D VD disc. ⢠Some discs hav e no subtitles. ⢠Subtitles are cleared. Press SUBTITLE. ⢠Subtitles on a DivX î file cannot be changed. ⢠Multi-angles are not recorded on the D VD disc. ⢠The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc. VCR O THER Good Picture Snowy Picture Video Head Clogging The video heads record and playback pictures and sound on the video tape. In the event that they become dirty you won't be able to do a perfect recording and the playback picture will be extremely snowy. Also, keep in mind that a poor tape quality and a damaged cassette may contribute to the rapid accumulation of dirt on the heads. Video head cleaning VIDEO HEAD CLEANING Video head cleaning is needed when the playback picture becomes unclear. This signifies that the heads are getting dirty and can occur when playing poor quality or damaged tapes. If the heads require cleaning, use a equivalent high quality chemical non-abrasive (wet) head cleaning tape or have them cleaned professionally. If playing a head cleaning tape in the VCR once does not improve the picture, play it several times before requesting service. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE VIDEO HEADS OR SERVICE THE UNIT BY REMOVING THE TOP COVER. NOTES: ⢠Video heads may eventually wear out and should be replaced when they fail to produce clear pictures. ⢠To help prevent video head clogging, use only good quality VHS tapes. Discard worn out tapes. Resetting the recorder If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory settings. 1 Make sure that the recorder is on and remove the disc . 2 Press and hold and press STANDBY/ON . The recorder turns off with all settings reset. 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 87
Additional information 08 88 En Handling video tapes Please do not use the f ollowing kinds of video tape: - Dusty or mouldy tape -T ape on which liquid has been spilled -T ape which has been broken and then repaired -T ape which has become unwound from the spools in the cassette ⢠Dir ty heads and very long length, thin video tape can cause problems such as une v en pla yback. ⢠When using a new video tape , f ast-forw ard to the end, then rewind it bac k to the star t before using. â¢A v oid dropping video tapes or exposing them to se- v ere vibr ation. Storing video tapes ⢠After using a video tape, re wind it back to the begin- ning and return to its case. ⢠Do not store tapes: - in excessiv ely dusty places - in excessiv ely hot or humid places - in direct sunlight - near air-conditioners or heaters - near strong magnetic fields Moving the recor der If you need to mo ve the recorder , first remov e the disc and the cassette, if the y are loaded, and close the disc tra y . Next press ST ANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby . Lastly , disconnect the power cord. Hints on installation We w ant you to enjoy using this unit f or years to come, so please bear in mind the f ollowing points when choos- ing a suitable location f or it: Do... î Use in a well-v entilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, le vel surf ace, such as a tab le, shelf or stereo rac k. Don't... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity , including near radiators and other heat- generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the recorder will be e xposed to direct sunlight. î Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room where it will be e xposed to excessiv e cigarette smoke . î Place directly on top of an amplifier , or other com- ponent in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as y ou ma y expe- r ience interference-especially if the tele vision uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder may be e xposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or car pet, or cov er with cloth- this ma y prev ent proper cooling of the unit. î Place on an unstable surf ace, or one that is not large enough to suppor t all four of the unit's f eet. Other (Additional inf ormation) Handling discs When holding discs of any type , take care not to lea ve finger prints, dir t or scratches on the disc surf ace. Hold the disc by its edge or b y the center hole and edge. Damaged or dir ty discs can affect pla yback and record- ing performance. T ak e care also not to scratch the label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc becoming unus- able . Should a disc become marked with fingerpr ints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dr y cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge as shown in the diagram below . If necessar y , use a cloth soak ed in alcohol, or a commercially av ailable CD/D VD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly . Ne ver use benzine , thinner or other cleaning agents, in- cluding products designed for clean- ing vinyl records . Storing discs Although CDs and D VD discs are more durable than vinyl records, y ou should still take care to handle and store discs correctly . When you're not using a disc , re- turn it to its case and store upr ight. Av oid leaving discs in e xcessively cold, humid, or hot en vironments (includ- ing under direct sunlight). Don't glue paper or put stick ers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other shar p-tipped writing in- strument. These could all damage the disc. F or more detailed care inf or mation see the instructions that come with discs. Do not load more than one disc into the recorder . Damaged discs Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder . If you can see that a disc is crack ed, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up dam- aging the recorder . This recorder is designed f or use with conv entional, fully circular discs only . Use of shaped discs is not recom- mended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. Cleaning the pickup lens The D VD recorder's lens should not become dir ty in normal use, but if f or some reason it should malfunc- tion due to dust or dir t, consult your nearest Pioneer- authorized ser vice center . Although lens cleaners for CD pla yers are commercially av ailable, we do not rec- ommend using them since some may damage the lens . 88 En 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 88
Additional information 08 89 En Specifications Note: The specifications and design of this product ar e subject to change without notice, due to improvement. GENERAL Po w er supply: Po w er consumption: W eight: Dimensions: Operating temperature: Operating humidity: Input Lev el: Output Le vel: Program: Po w er off memory: VCR section Signal system: Video head: A udio tr ack: Channel cov erage: RF channel output: F .FWD/REW Time: Hi-Fi F requency Response: Hi-Fi Dynamic Range: D VD section Signal system: Applicable disc: Recording format: Recording discs: Recording time: (based on a 4.7GB disc) A udio char acteristics frequency response: S/N Ratio: Harmonic distor tion: Wo w and flutter : Output: Pickup: A CCESSORIES: AC 230V 50Hz Operation: 31W Standby: 5.5W (if display windo w is off.) 5.0 kg Width : 430 mm Height : 90 mm Depth : 320 mm 5 ð C to 35 ðC Less than 80% RH SCART-socket: Video : 1 Vp-p, 75 ⦠Audio : 500 mV, 50k ⦠Audio IN jack: 500 mV, 50k ⦠SCART-socket: Video : 1 Vp-p, 75 ⦠Audio : 500 mV, 1k ⦠Audio OUT jack: 500 mV, 1k ⦠12 programs / 1 month Approx. 30 min PA L NTSC tape playbac k with P AL/60 Hz 4 Rotar y Heads Hi-Fi Sound - 2 T rac ks / MONO Sound - 1 T rac k 21-69 UHF channel 36 (23 to 69) Approx. 1 minute and 12 seconds (with E-180 Cassette T ape)(at 25ÃÂC) 20Hz to 20,000Hz More than 75dB PA L D VD (12cm, 8cm), CD (12cm, 8cm) D VD-Video Recording (VR mode) D VD-VIDEO (Video mode) D VD-RW , D VD-R XP: Appro x. 60 min SP: Appro x. 120 min LP: Approx. 240 min EP: Appro x. 360 min D VD: 4Hz - 22kHz CD: 4Hz - 20kHz 90dB Less than 0.06% Less than 0.01% Wrms Video : (RCA) 1 Vp-p/75 ⦠A udio : (RCA) âÂÂ12 dBm/1k ⦠Digital Audio : 0.5Vp-p/75 ⦠CD : W av elength: 780 nm Maximum output pow er : 8.5 mW D VD : W av elength: 660 nm Maximum output pow er : 120 mW Remote control x 1 75 ⦠Coaxial Cable x 1 21 pin SCART Cab le x 1 Dr y cell batter y (AAA/R03) x 2 Operating Instructions 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 89
Additional information 08 90 En 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 90
Additional information 08 91 En 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 91
Published by P ioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2005 Pioneer Corporation . All rights reserved. VRB1404-B PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: (905) 479-4411 P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 656-472-1111 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002E P rinted in Malaysia J2H30301B SH 05/10 X 2H30301B_En_82_Back 8/4/05, 19:27 92